OSN 1800 V100R009C00 Product Description 01

OptiX OSN 1800 Multi-Service Edge Optical
Transport Platform
V100R009C00
Product Description
Issue 01
Date 2019-02-28
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

OptiX OSN 1800 Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport
Platform
Product Description About This Document
About This Document
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation.
Product Name Product Version
OSN 1800 V100R009C00
iManager U2000 V200R018C60 and later
Intended Audience
This document describes the OSN 1800 in terms of network application, functions, hardware
structure, software architecture, features, and technical specifications.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers

l Data configuration engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
NOTE Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Platform
Symbol Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
TIP Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
GUI Conventions
Convention Meaning
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are
in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Based on Product Version

V100R009C00
This is the first document issue for the V100R009C00 product version. Compared with
V100R008C10, this issue provides the following updates:
Update Description
1 Product For OSN 1800 I Enhanced, enhanced the functions, and updated 1.1
Highlights and Product Highlights and 1.4 Product Specifications(1800 I
Specifications Enhanced).
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Platform
Update Description
5 Supported Added boards such as SL16Q/SL64S/UXCL(SLN), and updated the

Services following topics:
l 5.1 Supported Service Types(1800 V)
l 5.3 Supported Service Types(1800 I Enhanced)
l 5.4 Supported Service Types(1800 II Enhanced)
l 5.5 Supported Service Capabilities(1800 V)
l 5.3 Supported Service Types(1800 I Enhanced)
l 5.8 Supported Service Capabilities (1800 II Enhanced)
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

Platform
Product Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Product Highlights and Specifications..................................................................................... 1
1.1 Product Highlights.......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Product Specifications(1800 V)......................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Product Specifications(1800 I&II Compact).................................................................................................................. 8
1.4 Product Specifications(1800 I Enhanced).....................................................................................................................11
1.5 Product Specifications(1800 II Enhanced)................................................................................................................... 14
2 Product Networking....................................................................................................................19
3 Product Application.................................................................................................................... 22
3.1 5G Transport Networks: WDM to Site, Maximizing Last-Mile Fiber Values............................................................. 22
3.2 Premium Private Line: MS-OTN+TSDN, Premium Pipes for Private Lines...............................................................25
3.3 Video Bearer: OTN to CO, Ready for Premium Video Experience ............................................................................ 27
3.4 SAN Bearer: Dual-Link Solution Guarantees Higher Reliability................................................................................ 30
4 System Architecture.................................................................................................................... 33
5 Supported Services......................................................................................................................35
5.1 Supported Service Types(1800 V)................................................................................................................................35
5.2 Supported Service Types(1800 I&II Compact)............................................................................................................ 41
5.3 Supported Service Types(1800 I Enhanced).................................................................................................................45
5.4 Supported Service Types(1800 II Enhanced)............................................................................................................... 47
5.5 Supported Service Capabilities(1800 V)...................................................................................................................... 53
5.6 Supported Service Capabilities(1800 I&II Compact).................................................................................................. 56
5.7 Supported Service Capabilities (1800 I Enhanced)...................................................................................................... 59
5.8 Supported Service Capabilities (1800 II Enhanced).....................................................................................................60
5.9 Service Mapping...........................................................................................................................................................62
5.9.1 Mapping Client Services into ODUk Signals............................................................................................................62
5.9.2 Multiplexing and Mapping ODUk Signals into OTUk Signals................................................................................ 65
5.9.3 Mapping and Multiplexing SDH Services.................................................................................................................65
6 Product Features...........................................................................................................................67
6.1 Line Rate.......................................................................................................................................................................68
6.2 OTN Feature................................................................................................................................................................. 71
6.2.1 OTN Cross-Connection............................................................................................................................................. 72
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

Platform
6.2.2 E2E Service Management Based on OTN Overheads.............................................................................................. 73

6.2.3 Channel Monitoring over Different Operators' Networks......................................................................................... 74
6.2.4 Flexible Bandwidth Utilization Based on ODUflex..................................................................................................75
6.2.5 Board-based ODUk ADM Grooming........................................................................................................................76
6.3 Packet Feature...............................................................................................................................................................79
6.3.1 Ethernet Services Model (Packet)............................................................................................................................. 79
6.3.1.1 E-Line/E-LAN........................................................................................................................................................ 80
6.3.1.2 VPWS/VPLS.......................................................................................................................................................... 84
6.3.2 CES Services............................................................................................................................................................. 86
6.3.3 Service Bearer Solutions and Technologies.............................................................................................................. 87
6.3.3.1 Service Transmission Solutions..............................................................................................................................87
6.3.3.2 Service Bearer Technologies.................................................................................................................................. 87
6.3.4 Saving Tunnel Resources at Aggregation Nodes Using MS-PWs............................................................................ 89
6.3.5 Multicast Applications based on IGMP Snooping.................................................................................................... 91
6.3.6 Flexibly Planning VLANs based on QinQ................................................................................................................ 92
6.3.7 Service Quality Guarantee based on QoS..................................................................................................................93
6.3.8 Hierarchical Traffic Control based on HQoS............................................................................................................ 94
6.4 TDM Application......................................................................................................................................................... 95
6.4.1 SDH Services Application.........................................................................................................................................96
6.4.2 Ethernet Services Application (EoS)......................................................................................................................... 97
6.4.3 Existing SDH Network Carrying Ethernet Services................................................................................................101
6.5 ROADM Feature........................................................................................................................................................ 102
6.5.1 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................ 102
6.5.2 1-Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................................. 104
6.5.3 2-Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................................. 104
6.5.4 3-Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................................. 106
6.5.5 4-Degree ROADM.................................................................................................................................................. 109
6.5.6 9-Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................113
6.6 OTN + ROADM Feature............................................................................................................................................ 117
6.7 MS-OTN..................................................................................................................................................................... 118
6.8 Multi-Service Transmission over a Universal Line Board......................................................................................... 119
6.9 DWDM over CWDM Application............................................................................................................................. 120
6.10 Temperature-Hardened Feature(1800 I&II Compact).............................................................................................. 122
6.11 Redundancy and Protection...................................................................................................................................... 125
6.11.1 Network Level Protection......................................................................................................................................125
6.11.2 Equipment-Level Protection.................................................................................................................................. 128
6.12 Automatic Optical Power Management................................................................................................................... 131
6.12.1 AGC.......................................................................................................................................................................132
6.12.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown (1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I Enhanced).......................................................... 134
6.12.3 Automatic Laser Shutdown (1800 I&II Compact)................................................................................................ 136
6.12.4 Intelligent Power Adjustment................................................................................................................................ 140
6.12.5 Intelligent Fiber..................................................................................................................................................... 141
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

Platform
6.12.6 OPA........................................................................................................................................................................141
6.13 Synchronization........................................................................................................................................................ 144
6.13.1 Why Does the WDM/OTN Network Need Clock Synchronization?....................................................................145
6.13.2 Clock Synchronization Requirements of Service Networks................................................................................. 146
6.13.3 Frequency Synchronization Solutions................................................................................................................... 148
6.13.4 Phase Synchronization Solutions...........................................................................................................................150
6.13.5 E2E WDM/OTN Clock Solution...........................................................................................................................152
6.13.6 Introduction of Physical Clocks (OTN & Packet & SDH)....................................................................................152
6.13.7 Introduction of IEEE 1588v2 (OTN & Packet).....................................................................................................154
6.13.8 Introduction of ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 (OTN & Packet)................................................................................ 154
6.14 ASON....................................................................................................................................................................... 156
7 Board Category...........................................................................................................................158
8 Hardware Architecture............................................................................................................. 210
8.1 Introduction to Cabinets............................................................................................................................................. 210
8.2 OSN 1800 V Chassis.................................................................................................................................................. 216
8.3 OSN 1800 I Compact Chassis.................................................................................................................................... 218
8.4 OSN 1800 I Enhanced Chassis................................................................................................................................... 219
8.5 OSN 1800 II Compact Chassis................................................................................................................................... 220
8.6 OSN 1800 II Enhanced Chassis..................................................................................................................................222
8.7 OSN 1800 OADM Frame...........................................................................................................................................223
9 Node Configuration.................................................................................................................. 224

9.1 OTM........................................................................................................................................................................... 225
9.1.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................225
9.1.2 Chassis Layout.........................................................................................................................................................226
9.2 FOADM .....................................................................................................................................................................228
9.2.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................228
9.2.2 Chassis Layout.........................................................................................................................................................230
9.2.2.1 Networking with OSN 1800 Only........................................................................................................................ 230
9.2.2.2 Networking with OSN 1800 and Compact OptiX OSN 1800 II (2 U Chassis)................................................... 233
9.3 1 Degree ROADM......................................................................................................................................................235
9.3.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................235
9.3.2 Chassis Configuration Layout................................................................................................................................. 236
9.4 2 Degree ROADM......................................................................................................................................................237
9.4.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................237
9.5 3 Degree ROADM......................................................................................................................................................239
9.5.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................239
9.6 4 Degree ROADM......................................................................................................................................................242
9.6.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................242
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Platform
9.7 9 Degree ROADM......................................................................................................................................................245

9.7.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................245
9.8 OLA............................................................................................................................................................................ 247
9.8.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................247
9.8.2 Chassis Layout.........................................................................................................................................................248
9.9 Regeneration Station (REG)....................................................................................................................................... 249
9.9.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................249
9.9.2 Chassis Layout.........................................................................................................................................................250
9.10 CWDM..................................................................................................................................................................... 253
9.10.1 Signal Flow............................................................................................................................................................253
9.10.2 Chassis Layout.......................................................................................................................................................254
10 Network Management............................................................................................................ 256

10.1 Network Management Software............................................................................................................................... 258
10.2 Inter-NE Communication Management Based on DCN.......................................................................................... 259
10.2.1 DCN Network Application.................................................................................................................................... 259
10.2.2 DCN Implementation Scheme...............................................................................................................................261
10.2.3 DCN Design Requirements................................................................................................................................... 264
10.2.3.1 Related Concepts................................................................................................................................................ 264
10.2.3.2 Networking Capability....................................................................................................................................... 266
10.2.3.3 Subnetting........................................................................................................................................................... 267
10.2.3.4 Gateway NE Selection........................................................................................................................................268
10.3 Intra-NE Communication Management based on Master-Slave Shelf.....................................................................269
10.3.1 Master-Slave Shelf Planning Principle.................................................................................................................. 269
10.3.2 Master-Slave Shelf Cascading Scheme................................................................................................................. 272
10.4 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs...........................................................................................................276
10.5 Interfaces Between the NMS and OSS.....................................................................................................................278
11 Operation and Maintenance..................................................................................................280

11.1 Optical Doctor System..............................................................................................................................................286
11.2 Fiber Doctor System................................................................................................................................................. 290
11.3 Automatic Commissioning of Optical Power...........................................................................................................293
11.4 Supervision and Communication Module................................................................................................................ 295
11.5 Service Package Configuration.................................................................................................................................296
11.6 Service Auto-adaption.............................................................................................................................................. 296
11.7 Intelligent Fiber.........................................................................................................................................................298
11.8 Cascading NEs..........................................................................................................................................................300
11.9 TP-Assist Solution.................................................................................................................................................... 301
11.9.1 Background............................................................................................................................................................301
11.9.2 TP-Assist O&M System and Functions.................................................................................................................302
11.10 MPLS-TP OAM......................................................................................................................................................306
11.11 ETH OAM.............................................................................................................................................................. 309
11.11.1 Ethernet Service OAM.........................................................................................................................................310
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

Platform
11.11.2 Ethernet Port OAM.............................................................................................................................................. 313

11.12 RMON.................................................................................................................................................................... 316
11.13 Port Mirroring......................................................................................................................................................... 318
11.14 PRBS Test(1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I Enhanced).......................................................................................320
11.15 PRBS Test(1800 I&II Compact).............................................................................................................................323
11.16 Loopback................................................................................................................................................................ 329
11.17 Hot Patches............................................................................................................................................................. 336
11.18 Software Package Loading..................................................................................................................................... 337
11.19 Automatically Customized Package Loading.........................................................................................................337
12 License Management.............................................................................................................. 339

12.1 Feature License.........................................................................................................................................................339
12.2 RTU.......................................................................................................................................................................... 341
13 Security Management............................................................................................................. 345

13.1 L1 Service Encryption.............................................................................................................................................. 347
14 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System..........................350

15 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System........................................................... 352
16 Power Saving and Environment Protection....................................................................... 353
16.1 Power Saving(1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I Enhanced)....................................................................................353
16.1.1 Static Power Saving...............................................................................................................................................353
16.1.2 Dynamic Power Saving......................................................................................................................................... 353
16.1.3 Control and Monitoring of Power Saving Status...................................................................................................357
16.2 Energy Saving(OSN 1800 I&II Compact) .............................................................................................................. 357
16.3 Environment Protection............................................................................................................................................ 358
17 Environment Requirement.................................................................................................... 359

17.1 Storage Environment................................................................................................................................................ 359
17.2 Transport Environment............................................................................................................................................. 361
17.3 Operation Environment............................................................................................................................................ 363
18 Complied Standards............................................................................................................... 368

18.1 ANSI Standards........................................................................................................................................................ 369
18.2 EMC Standards.........................................................................................................................................................369
18.3 Environment-Related Standards............................................................................................................................... 371
18.4 Fireproofing Standards............................................................................................................................................. 372
18.5 Grounding Standards................................................................................................................................................ 372
18.6 IEEE Standards.........................................................................................................................................................373
18.7 IETF Standards......................................................................................................................................................... 374
18.8 ITU-T Standards....................................................................................................................................................... 376
18.9 International Standards............................................................................................................................................. 383
18.10 Laser Safety Standards........................................................................................................................................... 383
18.11 MEF Standards....................................................................................................................................................... 384
18.12 Noise-related Standard........................................................................................................................................... 384
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Platform
18.13 Safety-related Standards......................................................................................................................................... 385
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................386
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

Platform
Product Description 1 Product Highlights and Specifications
1 Product Highlights and Specifications
About This Chapter
This topic describes product highlights and system specifications.
1.1 Product Highlights

This topic describes product highlights in terms of the architecture and technology.
1.2 Product Specifications(1800 V)
This topic describes the appearance and system specifications of the 1800 V enhanced packet
products.
1.3 Product Specifications(1800 I&II Compact)
This topic describes the appearance and specifications of the OptiX OSN 1800 compact multi-
service edge optical transport platform.
1.4 Product Specifications(1800 I Enhanced)
This topic describes the appearance and system specifications of the OSN 1800 I Enhanced
products.
1.5 Product Specifications(1800 II Enhanced)
This topic describes the appearance and system specifications of the OSN 1800 II Enhanced
products.
1.1 Product Highlights

This topic describes product highlights in terms of the architecture and technology.
Highlights of OptiX OSN 1800 V Packet Enhanced

l MS-OTN compliance and compact design (5 U high), supporting access of Any-rate
services
– A single chassis supports full-granularity cross-connections and multiplexing (only
Z-series cross-connections support ODU3). It allows for a maximum of 800 Gbit/s
OTN capacity, 700 Gbit/s packet capacity, 280 Gbit/s SDH higher-order and 40
Gbit/s SDH lower-order capacities, and supports ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, C2,
flex). This significantly improves line bandwidth usage.
Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

Platform
– The 1800 V supports universal line boards, allowing services after being scheduled
on the OTN, SDH, PKT service planes to hitlessly share line transmission
bandwidth.
– Being highly integrated, each 1800 V chassis is 5 U high and provides a maximum
of 15 service slots.
– Targeted for metro edge applications, the 1800 V can be deployed as a service
access or aggregation node, and supports uniform of full services (1.5 Mbit/s to 100
Gbit/s).
l Environment friendly, power saving, and easy to deploy and maintain
– Supports power saving and consumes low power in a typical configuration,
reducing OPEX for customers.
– Easy to deploy, supports installation in a 19-inch or ETSI cabinet and AC and DC
power supplies.
– Supports OTN inband management compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Distinguished architecture, high reliability, and secure data transmission
– Provides various network-level protection schemes for all-around service
protection.
– Provides equipment-level protection: power supply protection, fan protection, and
1+1 protection for system control, cross-connect, and clock integrated boards.
Highlights of OptiX OSN 1800 I/II Compact

l Transmission of all services over a single network
– Encapsulates all services, from low-rate services (such as FE services) to high-
bandwidth services, into OTN frames for transmission.
l Long-distance transmission
– The standard OTN interface supports the forward error correction (FEC) function.
After the OTN technology is applied to the traditional CWDM system, a
transmission distance of up to 120 km (33 dB) is supported, a great improvement
compared to the traditional 80 km limit.
– When an EDFA is added, the transmission can be further increased to 170 km, long
enough for metro transmission.
l Lower maintenance expenditure and operation expenditure
– The service processing and switching equipment, network management system
(NMS), and OSS are all configured at the central node in the system.
– Transport equipments deployed in unattended equipment rooms in remote areas for
wide coverage.
– ITU-T G.709-compliant OTN inband management is supported.
– SDH and WDM/OTN equipment are managed and maintained using the same
NMS.
l Hybrid networking of CWDM and DWDM
– This networking mode enables smooth upgrade from CWDM to DWDM.
l Environment-friendly with lower power consumption
– The "All over WDM/OTN" technology helps service equipment be deployed
centrally at large sites and directly connected to the client equipment using the
distance extension technology, reducing the number of end nodes by 30% to 90%.

Platform
– The OptiX OSN 1800 uses DC/AC power supplies, boasting high adaptability.
– The OptiX OSN 1800 has a box design and is highly integrated, facilitating flexible
deployment at any site.
Highlights of OSN 1800 II Enhanced

l MS-OTN compliance, supporting access of any-rate services over a single network
– A single chassis supports full-granularity cross-connections and multiplexing. It
allows for a maximum of 200 Gbit/s OTN capacity, 160Gbit/s packet capacity, 50
Gbit/s SDH higher-order and 20 Gbit/s SDH lower-order capacities, and supports
ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, C2, flex).
– The OSN 1800 II Enhanced supports universal line boards, allowing services after
being scheduled on the OTN, SDH, PKT service planes to hitlessly share line
transmission bandwidth.
– Encapsulates all services, from low-rate services (such as FE services) to high-
bandwidth services, into OTN frames for transmission.
l Environmentally Friendly, Power Saving, and Easy to Deploy and Maintain
– 2 U compact chassis: supports power saving and consumes low power in a typical
configuration, helping customers reduce their OPEX.
– Easy to deploy and supports a broad range of applications: 19-inch or ETSI rack
mounting and available in DC version.
– ITU-T G.709 compliant OTN inband management.
– Provides various network-level protection schemes for all-around service
protection.
– Provides equipment-level protection: power supply protection, fan protection, and
1+1 protection for system control, cross-connect, and clock integrated boards.
Highlights of OSN 1800 I Enhanced

l MS-OTN compliance, supporting access of any-rate services over a single network
– A single chassis supports a maximum of 40 Gbit/s OTN capacity, 120Gbit/s packet
capacity, 42.5 Gbit/s SDH higher-order and 5 Gbit/s SDH lower-order capacities.
l Environmentally Friendly, Power Saving, and Easy to Deploy and Maintain
– 1 U compact chassis: supports power saving and consumes low power in a typical
configuration, helping customers reduce their OPEX.
– Easy to deploy and supports a broad range of applications: 19-inch or ETSI rack
mounting and available in AC and DC power supplies.
– ITU-T G.709 compliant OTN inband management.
– Provides network-level protection.
– Provides equipment-level protection: fan protection.
1.2 Product Specifications(1800 V)

This topic describes the appearance and system specifications of the 1800 V enhanced packet
products.

Platform
Table 1-1 Product appearance and specifications

Specifications Description
Product appearance
Dimensions (H x D 221 mm x 224 mm x 442 mm (excluding handle)

x W)
Number of slots for l DC-powered chassis: 15

service boards l AC-powered chassis: 12
Optical switching 1 to 9-degree reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer

capability (ROADM)
Product OTN 700 Gbit/s

capacity
Packet 700 Gbit/s
service
TDM Higher order: 280 Gbit/s; lower order: 40 Gbit/s
Maximu DWDM 80 wavelengths

m
number CWDM 8 wavelengths
of
wavelen
gths
Center Wavelength DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (C Band, ITU-T G.694.1)

range CWDM: 1471 nm to 1611 nm (S+C+L Band, ITU-T G.694.2)
Maximum rate per 200 Gbit/s

channel
Service types SDH/SONET service, PDH service, OTN service, Ethernet service,
CPRI service, OBSAI service, SAN service, video service, and
others
Line rate 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 50Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s, 200 Gbit/s
Maximum total of 50
OSN 810 and OSN NOTE
850 devices The quantity depends on the number of C12X5&C15Xn boards and the
managed by each boards interconnected with the OSN 850 devices which are inserted in the
OSN 1800 NE OSN 1800 NE .
Pluggable optical/ l Optical module: SFP/eSFP, XFP, SFP+, QSFP+, TXFP, CFP,
electrical module CFP2, QSFP28
l Electrical module: GE SFP, FE SFP, STM-1 SFP

Platform
Topology Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring-with-chain, intersecting rings,

tangent rings , and mesh networking
Applications Pure packet networks, pure OTN networks, pure TDM networks,
MS-OTN networks (OTN+Packet+TDM), hybrid networks (Packet
+TDM), OTN+Packet networks, and OTN+TDM networks
Redunda Network Client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, ODUk SNCP,
ncy and level optical line protection, tributary SNCP, and LPT
Protectio protectio
n n (OTN)
Network Tunnel APS, PW APS/FPS, MC-PW APS, MC-LAG, LPT, LAG,

level ERPS, MRPS, LMSP, packet SNCP
protectio
n
(packet)
Network l SDH protection: SNCP, linear MSP, ring MSP, TPS

level l EoS protection: LAG, DLAG, LCAS, LPT, and STP/RSTP
protectio
n
(TDM)
Equipme l Control, cross-connect, and clock integrated board redundancy

nt level l Power supply redundancy
protectio
n l Fan redundancy
Optical power ALS, AGC, OPA, IPA

management
Mainten MPLS- Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, one-way LM, two-way DM, LCK,
ance TP TST, and CSF.
OAM
ETH l Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC),

OAM loopback (LB), linktrace (LT), alarm indication signal (AIS),
(packet) one-way loss measurement (LM), two-way delay measurement
(DM), and remote defect indication (RDI).
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, fault locating, remote loopback, and
self-loop detection.
ETH l Ethernet service OAM: supports CC, LB, LT, AIS, OAM_Ping,
OAM and Performance detection.
(EoS) l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, fault locating, remote loopback, and
self-loop detection.
Port Supports port mirroring that enables service analysis and fault
mirrorin diagnosis without affecting services.
g (EoS) l Supports mirroring at local ports.

Platform
Port Supports port mirroring that enables service analysis and fault
mirrorin diagnosis without affecting services.
g l Supports mirroring at local ports.
(packet)
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI ports.
Port Supports port traffic mirroring that enables service analysis and
traffic fault diagnosis without affecting services.
mirrorin l Supports mirroring at local ports.
g
(packet) l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction.
Loopbac Supports loopback that used to determine whether the board where
k the loopback is performed is faulty.
PRBS Supports PRBS that used to analyze whether service paths are
faulty.
LLDP Supports LLDP that used to diagnose faults quickly.
Easy O&M Optical Doctor System, Fiber Doctor System
Synchronization l Physical Clocks (OTN & Packet & SDH)

l IEEE 1588v2 (OTN & Packet)
l ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 (OTN & Packet)
DCN Outband Supports 225 outband DCN channels, which can be electric
DCN supervisory channels (ESCs) or optical supervisory channels
(OSCs).
Inband Supports 64 inband DCN channels. Channel bandwidth are

DCN configurable.
ASON OTN network: Electrical-Layer ASON (only Z-series cross-

connections support).
TP-Assist l Service configuration: supports end-to-end service configuration

and automatic deployment of alarm management with service
deployment.
l Service commissioning: supports one-click service connectivity
tests, meter-free automatic tests, and one-click service
performance tests.
l Routine maintenance: supports performance measurement and
monitoring, and E-Line and E-LAN service path visualization.
l Fault diagnosis: supports intelligent fault diagnosis, IP Ping
initiation and response, and service loopback detection.

Platform
Power supply DC power input

l Standard working voltage: -48V DC/-60V DC
l Working voltage range:
– -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
– -60V DC: -48V to -72V
AC power input
l Standard working voltage: 110V AC/220V AC
– TNF5APIU: 90V to 264V
– TNF6APIU: 90V to 290V
Mounting option l 19-inch cabinet

l ETSI 300mm deep cabinet, such as N63E, N63B, A63B
l Mini Shelter cabinet
NOTE
OSN 1800 can be installed horizontally or vertically in a 19-inch or an ETSI
cabinet.
Running Chassis l Long-term running: -5°C to +50°C

environ temperat
l Short-terma running: -10°C to +55°C
ment ure
Chassis l Long-term running: 5% to 85%

relative l Short-term running: 5% to 95%
humidity
ETSI ETSI Class 3.1

conform NOTE
ity ETSI standards define temperature and humidity environments, where
equipment is located.
Reliabilit System 0.9999965, which indicates that the annual operation cessation time
y availabil of the equipment is not more than two minutes
Specifica ity
tions
System Less than 1.5%
mean
annual
repair
rate
MTTR 4 hours
(system
mean
repair
time)

Platform
MTBF 129.63 years

(system
mean
fault
interval)
a: A short term refers to a maximum of 96 consecutive operating hours and the total time of
short-term operating in a year cannot exceed 15 days.
1.3 Product Specifications(1800 I&II Compact)

This topic describes the appearance and specifications of the OptiX OSN 1800 compact multi-
service edge optical transport platform.
Table 1-2 Appearance and specifications for OptiX OSN 1800

Specifications OptiX OSN 1800 I OptiX OSN 1800 II
Chassis Chassis
Product appearance
Dimensions (mm) 44 (H) x 220 (D) x 442 mm 88 (H) x 220 (D) x 442 mm
(excluding handle) (excluding handle)
Number of slots for service l DC-powered chassis: 3 l DC-powered chassis: 7

boards l AC-powered chassis: 1 l AC-powered chassis: 5
Optical 1 to 9-degree reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer

(ROADM)
l Inter-board cross-connections of Any services at a rate

Cross- lower than 1.25 Gbit/s and 10GE LAN services are
connec supported.
tion Electrical l Intra-board cross-connections of Any services at a rate
lower than 2.5 Gbit/s are supported, and intra-board cross-
connections of VC-4 or VC-12 and ODU0/ODU1/
ODUflex/ODU2/ODU4 services are supported.
Wavelength l DWDM: 80 wavelengths

l CWDM: 8 wavelengths

Platform

Chassis Chassis
Center Wavelength range The system splits wavelength into DWDM band and CWDM
band. Systems of different types use different bands.
l The OptiX OSN 1800 DWDM system adopts the C band
in the fiber communication window. The minimum
channel spacing is 0.4 nm. The number of available
wavelengths is 80. The operating wavelength range is
from 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz (1560.61 nm to 1529.16
nm).
l The OptiX OSN 1800 CWDM system adopts the channel
spacing of 20 nm. The number of available wavelengths is
8. The operating wavelength range is from 1471 nm to
1611 nm.
Max. rate per channel 200 Gbit/s
Service types supported SDH/SONET service, PDH service, OTN service, Ethernet
service, CPRI service, OBSAI service, SAN service, SONET
service, Video service and others
Line rate 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 50Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s, 200 Gbit/s
Maximum total of OSN 50

810 and OSN 850 devices NOTE
managed by each OSN The quantity depends on the number of C12X5&C15Xn boards and
1800 NE the boards interconnected with the OSN 850 devices which are
inserted in the OSN 1800 NE .
Pluggable optical/electrical l Optical module: SFP/eSFP, XFP, SFP+, QSFP+, TXFP,

module CFP, CFP2, QSFP28
l Electrical module: GE SFP, FE SFP
Topology Point to point, Chain, Star, Ring
Redun Equipment level Power Redundancy, Fan Redundancy

dancy protection
and
protect Network level Client 1+1 protection, Intra-Board 1+1 protection, ODUk
ion protection SNCP, optical line protection, SW SNCP, and LPT
(OTN)
Network level ERPS, LAG, LPT (service-based), MSTP, STP and RSTP,
protection VLAN SNCP
(Ethernet)
Optical power ALS, AGC, IF, OPA, IPA

management

Platform

Chassis Chassis
Mainte ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC),
nance loopback (LB), linktrace (LT), loss measurement (LM),
delay measurement (DM), and OAM_Ping.
fault detection, link performance monitoring, remote
loopback, and self-loop detection.
Loopback Supports loopback that used to determine whether the board

where the loopback is performed is faulty.
PRBS Supports PRBS that used to analyze whether service paths

are faulty.
Synchronization l Physical Clocks (OTN & SDH)

l IEEE 1588v2 (OTN)
l ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 (OTN)

– -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
– -60V DC: -48V to -72V
AC power input
l Working voltage range: 100V AC to 240V AC
Installation mode l 19-inch cabinet or 19-inch open rack

l F01S300 cabinet (only when working with F3SCC)
l Wall-mounted
NOTE
OptiX OSN 1800 can be installed horizontally or vertically in a 19-
inch or an ETSI cabinet.
Runnin Chassis For details, see Operation Environment and Temperature-

g temperature Hardened Feature.
enviro
nment Chassis relative l Long-term running: 5% to 85%
humidity l Short-term running: 5% to 95%
ETSI conformity ETSI Class 3.1

NOTE
The ETSI standards define the temperature and humidity
environment of the equipment.
MTTR 4 hours

Platform

Chassis Chassis
MTBF 61.44 years
1.4 Product Specifications(1800 I Enhanced)

This topic describes the appearance and system specifications of the OSN 1800 I Enhanced
products.

Product appearance
Dimensions (H x D x W) 44mm x 220mm x 442 mm (excluding handle)
Number of slots for service l DC-powered chassis: 2

boards l AC-powered chassis: 1
Product OTN 40 Gbit/s

capacity
Packet l 120 Gbit/s (128 Bytes)
service l Packet processing capacity: 126 Mpps (64 Bytes)
TDM Higher order: 42.5 Gbit/s; lower order: 5 Gbit/s
Maximum DWDM 80 wavelengths

number of
wavelengths CWDM 8 wavelengths
Center Wavelength range DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (C Band, ITU-T G.

694.1)
CWDM: 1471 nm to 1611 nm (S+C+L Band, ITU-T G.
694.2)
Maximum rate per channel 10 Gbit/s
Service types OTN service, SDH service, PDH service, Ethernet service
Line rate 2.5Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s
Pluggable optical/electrical l Optical module: SFP/eSFP

module l Electrical module: GE SFP, FE SFP, STM-1 SFP
Topology Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring-with-chain, intersecting

rings, and tangent rings

Platform
Applications Pure packet networks, pure OTN networks, pure TDM

networks, MS-OTN networks (OTN+Packet+TDM), and
OTN+TDM networks
Redundancy Network ODUk SNCP, LPT

and level
Protection protection
(OTN)
Network Tunnel APS, PW APS, LPT, LAG, ERPS, packet SNCP

level
protection
(packet)
Network l SDH protection: SNCP, linear MSP

level l EoS protection: LAG, DLAG, LCAS, LPT, and STP/
protection RSTP
(TDM)
Equipment Fan redundancy

level
protection
Optical power management ALS
Maintenance MPLS-TP Supports CC, RDI, LB, and LT.

OAM
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC),

(packet) one-way loss measurement (LM), two-way delay
measurement (DM), and remote defect indication (RDI).
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM: supports CC, LB, LT, AIS,
(EoS) OAM_Ping, and Performance detection.
performance monitoring, fault locating.
Port Supports port mirroring that enables service analysis and

mirroring fault diagnosis without affecting services.
(EoS) l Supports mirroring at local ports.


are faulty.
Synchronization Physical Clocks (OTN&Packet & SDH)

Platform
TP-Assist l Service configuration: supports end-to-end service

configuration and automatic deployment of alarm
management with service deployment.
l Service commissioning: supports one-click service
connectivity tests, meter-free automatic tests, and one-
click service performance tests.
l Routine maintenance: supports performance
measurement and monitoring, and E-Line and E-LAN
service path visualization.
l Fault diagnosis: supports intelligent fault diagnosis, IP
Ping initiation and response, and service loopback
detection.

– -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
– -60V DC: -48V to -72V
AC power input
l Working voltage range: 100V AC to 240V AC
Mounting option l 19-inch cabinet or 19-inch open rack

l Wall-mounted

environment temperatur
e

humidity
ETSI ETSI Class 3.1

conformity NOTE
ETSI standards define temperature and humidity environments,
where equipment is located.
Reliability System 0.9999965, which indicates that the annual operation

Specifications availability cessation time of the equipment is not more than two
minutes

mean
annual
repair rate

Platform
MTTR 4 hours
(system
mean
repair
time)
MTBF 129.63 years

(system
mean fault
interval)
1.5 Product Specifications(1800 II Enhanced)

This topic describes the appearance and system specifications of the OSN 1800 II Enhanced
products.

Product appearance
Dimensions (H x D x W) 88mm x 220mm x 442 mm (excluding handle)
Number of slots for service 6

boards
Optical switching capability 1 to 9-degree reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer

(ROADM)
OTN l OTN+PKT+SDH: 160 Gbit/s

l OTN+SDH: 200 Gbit/s
Product
Packet l 160 Gbit/s (128 Bytes)
capacity
service l Packet processing capacity: 150 Mpps (64 Bytes)
TDM Higher order: 50 Gbit/s; lower order: 20 Gbit/s
Maximum DWDM 80 wavelengths

number of
wavelengths CWDM 8 wavelengths

Platform
Center Wavelength range DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (C Band, ITU-T G.

694.1)
CWDM: 1471 nm to 1611 nm (S+C+L Band, ITU-T G.
694.2)
Maximum rate per channel 200Gbit/s
Service types SDH/SONET service, PDH service, OTN service, Ethernet

service, CPRI service, OBSAI service, SAN service, video
service, and others
Line rate 2.5Gbit/s, 10Gbit/s, 50Gbit/s, 100Gbit/s, 200Gbit/s
Maximum total of OSN 810 50

and OSN 850 devices NOTE
managed by each OSN The quantity depends on the number of C12X5&C15Xn boards and
1800 NE the boards interconnected with the OSN 850 devices which are
inserted in the OSN 1800 NE .
Pluggable optical/electrical l Optical module: SFP/eSFP, XFP, SFP+, QSFP+, TXFP,

module CFP, CFP2, QSFP28
l Electrical module: GE SFP, FE SFP, STM-1 SFP
Topology Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring-with-chain, intersecting

rings, and tangent rings
Applications Pure packet networks, pure OTN networks, pure TDM

networks, MS-OTN networks (OTN+Packet+TDM), and
OTN+TDM networks
Redundancy Network Client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, ODUk

and level SNCP, optical line protection, tributary SNCP, and LPT
Protection protection
(OTN)
Network Tunnel APS, PW APS/FPS, LPT, LAG, ERPS, LMSP,

level packet SNCP, MRPS
protection
(packet)
Network l SDH protection: SNCP, linear MSP, ring MSP

level l EoS protection: LAG, DLAG, LCAS, LPT, and STP/
protection RSTP
(TDM)
Equipment l Control, cross-connect, and clock integrated board

level redundancy
protection l Power supply redundancy
l Fan redundancy
Optical power management ALS, AGC, OPA, IPA

Platform
Maintenance MPLS-TP Supports CC, RDI, LB, LT, one-way LM, two-way DM.
OAM
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC),

(packet) one-way loss measurement (LM), two-way delay
measurement (DM), and remote defect indication (RDI).
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM: supports CC, LB, LT, AIS,
(EoS) OAM_Ping, and Performance detection.
Port Supports port mirroring that enables service analysis and

mirroring fault diagnosis without affecting services.
(EoS) l Supports mirroring at local ports.
Port traffic Supports port traffic mirroring that enables service analysis
mirroring and fault diagnosis without affecting services.
(packet) l Supports mirroring at local ports.
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction.


are faulty.
Synchronization l Physical Clocks (OTN & Packet & SDH)

l IEEE 1588v2 (OTN & Packet)
l ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 (OTN & Packet)
DCN Outband Supports 225 outband DCN channels, which can be electric
DCN supervisory channels (ESCs) or optical supervisory channels
(OSCs).
Inband Supports 64 inband DCN channels. Channel bandwidth are

DCN configurable.

Platform
TP-Assist l Service configuration: supports end-to-end service

configuration and automatic deployment of alarm
management with service deployment.
l Service commissioning: supports one-click service
connectivity tests, meter-free automatic tests, and one-
click service performance tests.
l Routine maintenance: supports performance
measurement and monitoring, and E-Line and E-LAN
service path visualization.
l Fault diagnosis: supports intelligent fault diagnosis, IP
Ping initiation and response, and service loopback
detection.

– -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
– -60V DC: -48V to -72V
Mounting option l 19-inch cabinet or 19-inch open rack

l F01S300 cabinet
NOTE
The equipment can be installed horizontally or vertically in a 19-
inch or an ETSI cabinet.

environment temperatur
e

humidity
ETSI ETSI Class 3.1

conformity NOTE
ETSI standards define temperature and humidity environments,
where equipment is located.
Reliability System 0.9999965, which indicates that the annual operation

Specifications availability cessation time of the equipment is not more than two
minutes

mean
annual
repair rate

Platform
MTTR 4 hours
(system
mean
repair
time)
MTBF 129.63 years

(system
mean fault
interval)

Platform
Product Description 2 Product Networking
2 Product Networking
The OSN 1800 is targeted for metro edge node applications. It supports OTN, packet, and
TDM services and can interconnect existing WDM equipment for the service extension
purpose.
OptiX OSN 1800 Product Portfolio

The OptiX OSN 1800 product portfolio includes OptiX OSN 1800 I/II Compact, OptiX OSN
1800 II Packet, OptiX OSN 1800 I Enhanced, OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced, and OptiX OSN
1800 V Packet Enhanced. Each OptiX OSN 1800 product can transmit and receive services of
a wide range of types, can be flexibly configured, is easy to install, and supports smooth
upgrades from legacy OTN equipment to MS-OTN equipment.
Table 2-1 OptiX OSN 1800 product portfolio

Prod Appearance Characteristic
uct
OptiX OptiX OSN 1800 I Compact: l Height: 1 U (OptiX OSN

OSN 1800 I Compact); 2 U
1800 (OptiX OSN 1800 II
I/II Compact)
Comp OptiX OSN 1800 II Compact: l OTN equipment
act supporting only OTN
services
l Applied at the
metropolitan access layer
OptiX l Height: 2 U
OSN l MS-OTN equipment
1800 supporting OTN, packet,
II and TDM services
Packe
t l Applied at the

Platform
Prod Appearance Characteristic

uct
OptiX l Height: 5 U
V and TDM services and a
Packe unified-switching
t architecture
Enha
nced l Applied at the
metropolitan access and
metropolitan
convergence layer
OptiX l Height: 1 U
I and TDM services and a
Enha unified-switching
nced architecture
l Applied at the
OptiX l Height: 2 U
II and TDM services and a
Enha unified-switching
nced architecture
l Applied at the
l Compared with the
OptiX OSN 1800 II
Packet, the OptiX OSN
1800 II Enhanced has a
larger service access
capacity.
Position of the OSN 1800 in the Network Hierarchy

Figure 2-1 illustrates the position of the OSN 1800 in the network hierarchy.

Platform
Figure 2-1 Position of the OSN 1800 in the network hierarchy

Platform
Product Description 3 Product Application
3 Product Application
About This Chapter
3.1 5G Transport Networks: WDM to Site, Maximizing Last-Mile Fiber Values

3.2 Premium Private Line: MS-OTN+TSDN, Premium Pipes for Private Lines
3.3 Video Bearer: OTN to CO, Ready for Premium Video Experience
3.4 SAN Bearer: Dual-Link Solution Guarantees Higher Reliability
The fiber channel (FC) storage services are widely used in the storage area network (SAN) of
the data center, especially in the finance industry.
3.1 5G Transport Networks: WDM to Site, Maximizing

Last-Mile Fiber Values

Platform

Platform

Platform
3.2 Premium Private Line: MS-OTN+TSDN, Premium

Pipes for Private Lines

Platform

Platform
3.3 Video Bearer: OTN to CO, Ready for Premium Video

Experience

Platform

Platform

Platform
3.4 SAN Bearer: Dual-Link Solution Guarantees Higher

Reliability
The fiber channel (FC) storage services are widely used in the storage area network (SAN) of
the data center, especially in the finance industry.
Application Scenario
Figure 3-1 is a typical data center interconnection scenario where devices at each layer of the
data center network are interconnected through WDM links. At the storage layer, FC services
are transmitted to WDM transmission devices through storage switches.

Platform
Figure 3-1 Data center interconnection scenario
Solution Introduction
On the SAN of the data center, two FC service transmission solutions are available: dual-link
solution and single-link solution. The dual-link solution is recommended.
l Dual-link solution (recommended)

The dual-link solution uses the dual-fiber architecture and dual-DWDM devices to
provide protection for customers. Two independent DWDM systems transmit data
through two independent optical fibers to ensure high reliability of service transmission.
The dual-link solution is further classified into the following two types: strict dual-link
solution and mixed dual-link solution, as shown in Figure 3-2. A specific solution needs
to be selected based on the networking plan and storage switch requirements.
Figure 3-2 Dual-link solution
l Single-link solution

Platform
The single-link solution is based on a single link and a single DWDM system and uses
DWDM equipment for optical-layer protection, as shown in Figure 3-3. If the customer
selects this solution, the impact on storage services and servers must be evaluated.
Figure 3-3 Single-link solution

Platform
Product Description 4 System Architecture
4 System Architecture
This topic describes the function units of the OSN 1800 and relationships between different
units.
The OSN 1800 uses a three-layer (Layer 0, Layer 1, and Layer 2) architecture. At Layer 2,
Ethernet/MPLS-TP switching is performed. At Layer 1, ODUk/VC switching is performed.
At Layer 0, wavelength-based switching is performed. For details, see Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 System architecture of the OSN 1800 series
l Optical layer boards include optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards, fixed optical add
and drop multiplexing boards, reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing board,

Platform
Product Description 4 System Architecture
optical amplifier (OA) boards, and optical protection boards. They process optical
services and provide wavelength-level service grooming.
l Optical transponder unit (OTU) boards, TDM boards, packet boards, universal line
boards, OTN tributary boards, and OTN line boards process service signals and perform
O-E-O conversion. The OSN 1800 V and OSN 1800 II Enhanced supports tributary/line
separated architecture. In this architecture, different granularities of services can be
cross-connected centrally by the cross-connect unit, achieving flexible grooming of
electrical signals.
l The packet boards, TDM boards, and universal line boards of the OSN 1800 V, OSN
1800 I Enhanced and OSN 1800 II Enhanced provide Layer 2 functions and can process
Ethernet private line and Ethernet private network services.
l The SCC board (only for OSN 1800 I/II Compact) is the center of the system. It
collaborates with the NMS to manage all boards of the system and implement inter-
equipment communication.
l The system control, switching, and timing board (only for OSN 1800 V, OSN 1800 I
Enhanced and OSN 1800 II Enhanced) supports the communication control, service
grooming, and clock processing functions. It collaborates with the NMS to manage all
boards of the system and provides system clock signals and frame header signals to all
service boards in an NE and synchronizes the NE time to the time of the upstream NE. In
this manner, it achieves clock/time synchronization for the NE.
l Power redundancy and fan redundancy are provided to ensure high system reliability.
OSN 1800 I Enhanced and OSN 1800 II Enhanced supports -48 V/-60 V DC power
input only.
l The auxiliary interface board (only for OSN 1800 V and OSN 1800 II Enhanced)
provides clock/time input/output ports and alarm input/output ports.
l Communication, service grooming, and clock synchronization between all boards are
achieved through backplane buses including control and communication buses, clock
buses, and power supply buses.

Platform
Product Description 5 Supported Services
5 Supported Services
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN equipment can receive/transmit synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
services, plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) services, optical transport network (OTN)
services, Ethernet services, common public radio interface (CPRI) services, storage area
network (SAN) services, video services, and others.
5.1 Supported Service Types(1800 V)

5.2 Supported Service Types(1800 I&II Compact)
5.3 Supported Service Types(1800 I Enhanced)
5.4 Supported Service Types(1800 II Enhanced)
5.5 Supported Service Capabilities(1800 V)
This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 V.
5.6 Supported Service Capabilities(1800 I&II Compact)
This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 I&II Compact.
5.7 Supported Service Capabilities (1800 I Enhanced)
This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 I Enhanced.
5.8 Supported Service Capabilities (1800 II Enhanced)
This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 II Enhanced.
5.9 Service Mapping
This topic describes how client signals are mapped into ODUk signals and how ODUk signals
are then mapped and multiplexed into OTUk signals.
5.1 Supported Service Types(1800 V)

Table 5-1 lists the types of the services that are supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.

Platform
Table 5-1 Types of services supported

Servic Service Rate Board Reference
e Standards
Categ Service
ory Type
SDH STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s OTN: LQM2, ITU-T G.707

ELOM, TOA, TTA, ITU-T G.691
TSP, C15Xn (n=5,
10) ITU-T G.957
TDM: SL1Q, ITU-T G.693

SLNO ITU-T G.783
Packet: CQ1 ITU-T G.825
STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s OTN: LQM2,

ELOM, TOA, TTA,
C15Xn (n=5, 10)
TDM: SL4D,
SLNO
STM-16 2.488 Gbit/s OTN: LQM2,

ELOM, TOA, TTA,
C15Xn (n=5, 10)
TDM: SLNO,
SL16Q
STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

ELOM, TQX,
TDX, LTX, LTXM,
LSX, TTA, LDCA
TDM: SL64D,
SL64S
SONE OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s OTN: ELOM, GR-253-CORE

T LQM2, TTA, TOA GR-1377-CORE
OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s OTN: ELOM, ANSI T1.105
LQM2, TTA, TOA
OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

LQM2, TTA, TOA
OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

ELOM, TQX,
TDX, LTX, LTXM,
LSX, TTA, LDCA
PDH E1 2.048 Mbit/s TDM: SP3D, DMS, ITU-T G.703

PD1, PL1 ITU-T G.823
Packet: MD1 ITU-T G.783
OTN: TSP ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.742

Platform

e Standards
Categ Service
ory Type
T1 1.544 Mbit/s TDM: SP3D, DMS, ITU-T G.703

PD1, PL1 ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.783
E3 34.368 Mbit/s TDM: PL3T ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
T3 44.736 Mbit/s TDM: PL3T ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.824
E4 139.264 Mbit/s TDM: PL4D ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.751
OTN OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s OTN: TOA, ITU-T G.709

ELOM, TTA ITU-T G.959.1
OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s OTN: LDX, TQX,
TDX, LTX, LTXM,
LSX, TTA, LDCA
OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s OTN: LDX, TQX,

TDX, LTX, LTXM,
LSX, TTA, LDCA
OTU4 111.81Gbit/s OTN: LSC, LSCG,

LSCM, TSC,
LDCA
Ethern FE (electrical Interface rate: 125 OTN: LQM2, IEEE 802.3u

et signal) Mbit/s ELOM, TOA, CE6,
Service rate: 100 TTA
Mbit/s Packet: EM20
TDM: EFS8
FE (optical Interface rate: 125 OTN: LQM2,

signal) Mbit/s ELOM, TOA, CE6,
Service rate: 100 TTA
Mbit/s Packet: EM20,
EG10
TDM: EGS4/
EGS4D

Platform

e Standards
Categ Service
ory Type
GE Interface rate: 1.25 OTN: LQM2, IEEE 802.3z

(electrical Gbit/s ELOM, TOA, CE6,
signal) Service rate: 1 TTA, C12X5,
Gbit/s C15Xn (n=5, 10)
Packet: EM20,
EG10
TDM: EGS4/
EGS4D
GE (optical Interface rate: 1.25 OTN: LQM2,

signal) Gbit/s ELOM, TOA,
Service rate: 1 C12X5, CE6, TTA,
Gbit/s C15Xn (n=5, 10)
Packet: EM20,
EG10
TDM: EGS4/
EGS4D
10GE LAN 10.31 Gbit/s OTN: LDX, IEEE 802.3ae

ELOM, TQX, CE6,
TDX, C12X5,
LTX, LTXM, LSX,
TTA, C15Xn (n=5,
10), LDCA
Packet: EM20, EX4
10GE WAN 9.95 Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

ELOM, TQX,
TDX, LTX, LTXM,
LSX, TTA, LDCA
40GE (QSFP 40Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX, IEEE 802.3ba

+) F3LTX
40GE (MPO 40Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX,

fiber jumper) F3LTX, LDCA
100GE 103.125Gbit/s OTN: LSC, LSCG,

LSCM, TSC, EC1,
LDCA
SAN FC100, 1.06 Gbit/s OTN: LQM2, ANSI X3.230

FICON ELOM, TOA, CE6, ANSI X3.296
(Fiber TTA
Connect) ANSI X3.303

Platform

e Standards
Categ Service
ory Type
FC200, 2.12 Gbit/s OTN: LQM2,

FICON ELOM, TOA, CE6,
Express TTA
ESCON 200 Mbit/s OTN: LQM2,

(Enterprise ELOM, TOA, TTA
Systems
Connection)
FC400, 4.25 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

FICON 4G TOA, CE6, TTA
FC800, 8.45 Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

FICON 8G ELOM, TQX,
TDX, LTX, LTXM,
F2LSX, CE6, TTA,
LDCA
FC1200, 10.51 Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

FICON 10G ELOM, TQX,
TDX, LTX, LTXM,
F2LSX, CE6, TTA,
LDCA
FC1600 14.025Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX,

F3LTX, LDCA

LDCA
FDDI 125 Mbit/s OTN: ELOM, TTA, ISO 9314

TOA
InfiniBand 2.5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, InfiniBandTM

2.5G F2LTX, F3LTX, Architecture
TTA, F6TOA, Release 1.2.1
LDCA
InfiniBand 5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

5G F2LDX, F2LTX,
F3LTX, CE6, TTA,
LDCA
InfiniBand 10 Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX,

10G F3LTX, TTA,
LDCA
ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, TTA, IBM GDPS

F6TOA (Geographically
Dispersed Parallel
Sysplex) Protocol

Platform

e Standards
Categ Service
ory Type
ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, TTA,

F6TOA
Distrib CPRI option 1.229 Gbit/s (2 x OTN: ELOM, CPRI Specification

uted 2 614.4 Mbit/s) LQM2, C12X5, V4.1
base C15Xn (n=5, 10),
station F2CP6
interfac
e CPRI option 2.458 Gbit/s (4 x OTN: ELOM,
service 3 614.4 Mbit/s) LQM2, C12X5,
C15Xn (n=5, 10),
F2CP6
CPRI option 3.072 Gbit/s (5 x OTN: C12X5,

4 614.4 Mbit/s) C15Xn (n=5, 10),
F2CP6
CPRI option 4.915 Gbit/s (8 x OTN: C12X5,

5 614.4 Mbit/s) C15Xn (n=5, 10),
F2CP6
CPRI option 6.144 Gbit/s (10 x OTN: ELOM,

6 614.4 Mbit/s) C12X5, C15Xn
(n=5, 10), F2CP6
CPRI option 9.83 Gbit/s (16 x OTN: ELOM,

7 614.4 Mbit/s) C12X5, C15Xn
(n=5, 10), F2CP6
CPRI option 10.138 Gbit/s (20 x OTN: C15Xn (n=5,

8 506.88 Mbit/s) 10)
Open OBSAI 4x 3.072 Gbit/s OTN: C12X5, OBSAI RP3

base C15Xn (n=5, 10), Specification_V4.2
station OBSAI 8x 6.144 Gbit/s F2CP6
interfac
e
service
Video DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s OTN: LQM2, EN 50083-9

and ELOM, TOA, TTA
audio
service SD-SDI 270 Mbit/s OTN: LQM2, SMPTE 259M
ELOM, TOA, TTA
HD-SDI 1.485 Gbit/s, OTN: LQM2, SMPTE 292M

1.4835 Gbit/sa ELOM, TOA, TTA
3G-SDI 2.97 Gbit/s, 2.96 OTN: ELOM, SMPTE 424M

Gbit/sa TOA, TTA

Platform

e Standards
Categ Service
ory Type
MADI 125 Mbit/s OTN: TOA, TTA AES10-2008
FE: Fast Ethernet

GE: Gigabit Ethernet
ESCON: Enterprise systems connection
FICON: Fiber connect
FC: Fiber channel
DVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface
SD-SDI: Serial digital interface, as specified in the SMPTE-259M, SD-SDI is also called
SDI.
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems
3G-SDI: 3G-serial digital interface
CPRI: Distributed base station interface
OBSAI: Open base station interface
a: The SMPTE 292M standard defines HD-SDI rates of 1.485 Gbit/s and 1.485/1.001
Gbit/s and 3G-SDI rates of 2.97 Gbit/s and 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s. The factor of 1/1.001 is
provided to be compatible with the existing National Television System Committee
(NTSC) system, which is an analog television system used in North America, parts of Latin
America, South Korea, Japan, and some Pacific island nations and territories.
5.2 Supported Service Types(1800 I&II Compact)


Servic Service Service Rate Board Reference
e Type Standards
Categ
ory
SDH STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2, ITU-T G.707
ELOM, TSP, ELQM, CP8, ITU-T G.691
C15Xn (n=5, 10)
ITU-T G.957
STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2, ITU-T G.693
ELOM, ELQM, CP8, ITU-T G.783
C15Xn (n=5, 10)
ITU-T G.825
STM-16 2.488 Gbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2,
ELOM, ELQM, C15Xn
(n=5, 10)

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s OTN: LSX, LDX, ELOM,

LTX, LTXM, LDCA
SONE OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, ELOM, GR-253-CORE

T LQM2 GR-1377-CORE
OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, ELOM, ANSI T1.105
LQM2
OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, ELOM,

LQM2
OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s OTN: LSX, LDX, ELOM,

LTX, LTXM, LDCA
PDH E1 2.048 Mbit/s OTN: TSP ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.742
T1 1.544 Mbit/s OTN: TSP ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.783
OTN OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s OTN: LWX2, ELOM ITU-T G.709
OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s ITU-T G.959.1

OTN: LSXa, LDX, LTX,
LTXM, LDCA
OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s
OTU4 111.81Gbit/s LSC, LSCG, LSCM, LDCA
Ethern FE Interface rate: OTN: LWX2, LDGF, LQM, IEEE 802.3u

et (electrical 125 Mbit/s LQM2, ELOM, LEM18,
signal) Service rate: 100 ELQM, CE6
Mbit/s
FE Interface rate: OTN: LWX2, LDGF, LQM,

(optical 125 Mbit/s LQM2, ELOM, LEM18,
signal) Service rate: 100 ELQM, CE6
Mbit/s
GE Interface rate: OTN: LWX2, LDE, LQM, IEEE 802.3ab

(electrical 1.25 Gbit/s LDGF, LDGF2, LQM2,
signal) Service rate: 1 LQG, LOE, LEM18,
Gbit/s ELOM, ELQM, CE6,
C12X5, C15Xn (n=5, 10)

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
GE Interface rate: OTN: LWX2, LDE, LQM, IEEE 802.3z

(optical 1.25 Gbit/s LDGF, LDGF2, LQM2,
signal) Service rate: 1 LQG, LOE, LEM18,
Gbit/s ELOM, ELQM, CE6, CP8,
C12X5, C15Xn (n=5, 10)
10GE 10.31 Gbit/s OTN: LSX, LDX, LEM18, IEEE 802.3ae

LAN ELOM, CE6, FC16Q, LTX,
LTXM, C12X5, C15Xn
(n=5, 10), LDCA
10GE 9.95 Gbit/s OTN: LSX, LDX, ELOM,

WAN LTX, LTXM, LDCA
40GE 40Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX, F3LTX IEEE 802.3ba

(QSFP+)
40GE 40Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX, F3LTX,

(MPO LDCA
fiber
jumper)
100GE 103.125 Gbit/s OTN: LSC, LSCG, LSCM
SAN FC100/ 1.06 Gbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2, ANSI X3.230
FICON ELOM, CE6 ANSI X3.296
FC200/ 2.12 Gbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2, ANSI X3.303
FICON ELOM, CE6
Express
ESCON 200 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2,

ELOM
FC400/ 4.25 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, CE6

FICON
4G
FC800/ 8.5 Gbit/s OTN: F2LSX, LDX,

FICON ELOM, CE6, LTX, LTXM,
8G LTX, FC16Q, LDCA
FC1200/ 10.51 Gbit/s OTN: F2LSX, LDX,

FICON ELOM, CE6, FC16Q, LTX,
10G LTXM, LTX, LDCA
FC1600 14.025 Gbit/s OTN: FC16Q, F2LTX,

F3LTX, LDCA
FC3200 28.05Gbit/s OTN: F3LTX, LDCA
FDDI 125 Mbit/s OTN: ELOM ISO 9314

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
InfiniBan 2.5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, F2LTX, InfiniBandTM

d 2.5G F3LTX, LDCA Architecture
Release 1.2.1
InfiniBan 5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, F2LTX,
d 5G F3LTX, F2LDX, CE6
(supported only when the
equipped system control
board is F3SCC), LDCA
InfiniBan 10 Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX, F3LTX,

d 10G LDCA
ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM (supported IBM GDPS

only when the equipped (Geographically
system control board is Dispersed
F3SCC) Parallel Sysplex)
Protocol
ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM (supported
only when the equipped
system control board is
F3SCC)
Distrib CPRI 614.4 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2 CPRI

uted option 1 Specification
base V4.1
station CPRI 1.229 Gbit/s (2 x OTN: LWX2, F2LQM,
interfac option 2 614.4 Mbit/s) F2LQM2, ELOM, F2CP6,
e CP8, C12X5, C15Xn (n=5,
service 10)
CPRI 2.458 Gbit/s (4 x OTN: LWX2, F2LQM,

option 3 614.4 Mbit/s) F2LQM2, ELOM, F2CP6,
CP8, C12X5, C15Xn (n=5,
10)
CPRI 3.072 Gbit/s (5 x OTN: C12X5, F2CP6,

option 4 614.4 Mbit/s) C15Xn (n=5, 10)
CPRI 4.915 Gbit/s (8 x OTN: CP6, C12X5, C15Xn

option 5 614.4 Mbit/s) (n=5, 10)
CPRI 6.144 Gbit/s (10 OTN: ELOM, F2CP6, CP8,

option 6 x 614.4 Mbit/s) C12X5, C15Xn (n=5, 10)
CPRI 9.83 Gbit/s (16 x OTN: ELOM, F2CP6, CP8,

option 7 614.4 Mbit/s) FC16Q, C12X5, C15Xn
(n=5, 10)
CPRI 10.138 Gbit/s OTN: C15Xn (n=5, 10)

option 8 (20 x 506.88
Mbit/s)

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
Open OBSAI 3.072 Gbit/s OTN: C12X5, F2CP6, OBSAI RP3

base 4x C15Xn (n=5, 10) Specification_V
station 4.2
interfac OBSAI 6.144 Gbit/s
e 8x
service
Video DVB- 270 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2, EN 50083-9

service ASI ELOM
SD-SDI 270 Mbit/s OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2, SMPTE 259M

ELOM
HD-SDI 1.485 Gbit/s or OTN: LWX2, LQM, LQM2, SMPTE 292M

1.4835 Gbit/s ELOM
3G-SDI 2.97 Gbit/s or OTN: ELOM SMPTE 424M

2.96 Gbit/s
FE: Fast Ethernet

FC: Fiber channel
SDI.
a: The preceding table applies to all PCB versions if no PCB version is specified. For
example, LSX includes F1LSX and F2LSX.
5.3 Supported Service Types(1800 I Enhanced)


Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
SDH STM-1 155.52Mbit/s SLNO, ITU-T G.707

A1UXCL(G12A), ITU-T G.691
CQ1
ITU-T G.957
STM-4 622.08Mbit/s SLNO, ITU-T G.693
A1UXCL(G12A) ITU-T G.783
STM-16 2.488Gbit/s SLNO, ITU-T G.825
A1UXCL(SLND),
A1UXCL(G12A)
STM-64 9.95Gbit/s A1UXCL(SLND),

A1UXCL(G12A)
PDH E1 2.048Mbit/s SP3D, MD1 ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.742
T1 1.544Mbit/s SP3D ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.783
E3 34.368Mbit/s PL3T ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
T3 44.736Mbit/s PL3T ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.824
Ethern FE (electrical Interface rate: 125 A1UXCL(G12A), IEEE 802.3u

et signal) Mbit/s EFS8
Service rate: 100
Mbit/s
FE (optical Interface rate: 125 EG10,

signal) Mbit/s A1UXCL(G12A),
Service rate: 100 EGS4
Mbit/s
GE Interface rate: 1.25 EG10, IEEE 802.3z

(electrical Gbit/s A1UXCL(G12A),
signal) Service rate: 1 EGS4
Gbit/s

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
GE (optical Interface rate: 1.25 EG10,

signal) Gbit/s A1UXCL(G12A),
Service rate: 1 EGS4
Gbit/s
10GE LAN 10.31Gbit/s A1UXCL(EX2), IEEE 802.3ae

A1UXCL(G12A)
10GE WAN 9.95Gbit/s A1UXCL(G12A)
FE: Fast Ethernet

5.4 Supported Service Types(1800 II Enhanced)


e Type Standards
Categ
ory
SDH STM-1 155.52Mbit/s OTN: F2LQM2, ITU-T G.707

ELOM, F6TOA, ITU-T G.691
F6TTA, TSP,
C15Xn (n=5, 10) ITU-T G.957
TDM: SL1Q, ITU-T G.693

SLNO, ITU-T G.783
UXCL(SLN) ITU-T G.825
Packet: CQ1
STM-4 622.08Mbit/s OTN: F2LQM2,

ELOM, F6TOA,
F6TTA, C15Xn
(n=5, 10)
TDM: SL4D,
SLNO,
UXCL(SLN)

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
STM-16 2.488Gbit/s OTN: F2LQM2,

ELOM, F6TOA,
F6TTA, C15Xn
(n=5, 10)
TDM: SLNO,
UXCL(SLN)
STM-64 9.95Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

ELOM, LTX,
LTXM, LSX,
F6TTA, LDCA
TDM:
UXCL(SL64)
SONE OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s OTN: ELOM, GR-253-CORE

T F2LQM2, F6TTA, GR-1377-CORE
F6TOA
ANSI T1.105
OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s OTN: ELOM,
F2LQM2, F6TTA,
F6TOA
OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

F2LQM2, F6TTA,
F6TOA
OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

ELOM, LTX,
LTXM, LSX,
F6TTA, LDCA
PDH E1 2.048Mbit/s TDM: SP3D ITU-T G.703

Packet: MD1 ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.742
T1 1.544Mbit/s TDM: SP3D ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.783
E3 34.368Mbit/s TDM: PL3T ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.823
T3 44.736Mbit/s TDM: PL3T ITU-T G.703

ITU-T G.824

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
OTN OTU1 2.67Gbit/s OTN: F6TOA, ITU-T G.709

ELOM, F6TTA ITU-T G.959.1
OTU2 10.71Gbit/s OTN: LDX, LTX,
LTXM, LSX,
F6TTA, LDCA
OTU2e 11.10Gbit/s OTN: LDX, LTX,

LTXM, LSX,
F6TTA, LDCA
OTU4 111.81Gbit/s OTN: LSC, LSCG,

LSCM, LDCA
Ethern FE (electrical Interface rate: 125 OTN: F2LQM2, IEEE 802.3u

et signal) Mbit/s ELOM, F6TOA,
Service rate: 100 CE6, F6TTA
Mbit/s TDM: EFS8
FE (optical Interface rate: 125 OTN: F2LQM2,

signal) Mbit/s ELOM, F6TOA,
Service rate: 100 CE6, F6TTA
Mbit/s Packet: EG10
TDM: EGS4
GE Interface rate: 1.25 OTN: F2LQM2, IEEE 802.3z

(electrical Gbit/s ELOM, F6TOA,
signal) Service rate: 1 CE6, F6TTA,
Gbit/s C12X5, C15Xn
(n=5, 10)
Packet: EG10,
EG4C
TDM: EGS4
GE (optical Interface rate: 1.25 OTN: F2LQM2,

signal) Gbit/s ELOM, F6TOA,
Service rate: 1 C12X5, CE6,
Gbit/s F6TTA, C15Xn
(n=5, 10)
Packet: EG10,
EG4C
TDM: EGS4

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
10GE LAN 10.31Gbit/s OTN: LDX, IEEE 802.3ae

ELOM, C12X5,
LTX, LTXM, LSX,
CE6, F6TTA,
C15Xn (n=5, 10),
LDCA
Packet: EX4,
UXCL(EX1)
10GE WAN 9.95Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

ELOM, LTX,
LTXM, LSX,
F6TTA, LDCA
40GE (QSFP 40Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX, IEEE 802.3ba

+) F3LTX
40GE (MPO 40Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX,

fiber jumper) F3LTX, LDCA
100GE 103.125Gbit/s LSC, LSCG,

LSCM, LDCA
SAN FC100/ 1.06Gbit/s OTN: F2LQM2, ANSI X3.230

FICON ELOM, F6TOA, ANSI X3.296
CE6, F6TTA
ANSI X3.303
FC200/ 2.12Gbit/s OTN: F2LQM2,
FICON ELOM, F6TOA,
Express CE6, F6TTA
ESCON 200Mbit/s OTN: F2LQM2,

ELOM, F6TOA,
F6TTA
FC400/ 4.25Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

FICON 4G F6TOA, CE6,
F6TTA
FC800/ 8.5Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

FICON 8G ELOM, LTX,
LTXM, F2LSX,
CE6, F6TTA,
LDCA
FC1200/ 10.51Gbit/s OTN: LDX,

FICON 10G ELOM, LTX,
LTXM, F2LSX,
CE6, F6TTA,
LDCA

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory

F3LTX, LDCA

LDCA
FDDI 125 Mbit/s OTN: ELOM, ISO 9314

F6TTA, F6TOA
InfiniBand 2.5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, InfiniBandTM

2.5G F2LTX, F3LTX, Architecture
F6TTA, F6TOA, Release 1.2.1
LDCA
InfiniBand 5 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

5G F2LDX, F2LTX,
F3LTX, CE6,
F6TTA, LDCA
InfiniBand 10 Gbit/s OTN: F2LTX,

10G F3LTX, F6TTA,
LDCA
ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, IBM GDPS

F6TTA, F6TOA (Geographically
Dispersed Parallel
ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, Sysplex) Protocol
F6TTA, F6TOA
Distrib CPRI option 1.229 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM, CPRI Specification

uted 2 F2LQM2, C12X5, V4.1
base C15Xn (n=5, 10),
station F2CP6
interfac
e CPRI option 2.458 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,
3 F2LQM2, C12X5,
C15Xn (n=5, 10),
F2CP6
CPRI option 3.072 Gbit/s OTN: C12X5,

4 C15Xn (n=5, 10),
F2CP6
CPRI option 4.915 Gbit/s OTN: C12X5,

5 C15Xn (n=5, 10),
F2CP6
CPRI option 6.144 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

6 C12X5, C15Xn
(n=5, 10), F2CP6

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
CPRI option 9.83 Gbit/s OTN: ELOM,

7 C12X5, C15Xn
(n=5, 10), F2CP6
CPRI option 10.138 Gbit/s OTN: C15Xn (n=5,

8 10)
Open OBSAI 4x 3.072Gbit/s OTN: C12X5, OBSAI RP3

base C15Xn (n=5, 10), Specification_V4.2
station OBSAI 8x 6.144Gbit/s F2CP6
interfac
e
service
Video DVB-ASI 270Mbit/s OTN: F2LQM2, EN 50083-9

service ELOM, F6TOA,
F6TTA
SD-SDI 270Mbit/s OTN: F2LQM2, SMPTE 259M

ELOM, F6TOA,
F6TTA
HD-SDI 1.485Gbit/s, OTN: F2LQM2, SMPTE 292M

1.4835Gbit/sa ELOM, F6TOA,
F6TTA
3G-SDI 2.97Gbit/s, OTN: ELOM, SMPTE 424M

2.96Gbit/sa F6TOA, F6TTA
MADI 125 Mbit/s OTN: TOA, TTA AES10-2008

Platform

e Type Standards
Categ
ory
FE: Fast Ethernet

FC: Fiber channel
SDI.
a: The SMPTE 292M standard defines HD-SDI rates of 1.485 Gbit/s and 1.485/1.001
Gbit/s and 3G-SDI rates of 2.97 Gbit/s and 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s. The factor of 1/1.001 is
provided to be compatible with the existing National Television System Committee
(NTSC) system, which is an analog television system used in North America, parts of Latin
America, South Korea, Japan, and some Pacific island nations and territories.
5.5 Supported Service Capabilities(1800 V)

This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 V.
Table 5-5 provides the service capabilities of the 1800 V.
Table 5-5 Service capabilities
Service Number of Services Supported by

Category Service Type Single Chassis
SDH STM-1 OTN: 140

TDM: 112
STM-4 OTN: 140

TDM: 112
STM-16 OTN: 140

TDM: 56
STM-64 OTN: 70
TDM: 28
SONET OC-3 120

Platform

OC-12 120
OC-48 120
OC-192 70
PDH E1 l 168 (1800 V old cross-connections)

l 252 (1800 V new cross-connections)
T1 l 168 (1800 V old cross-connections)

E3 l 12 (1800 V old cross-connections)

T3 l 12 (1800 V old cross-connections)

E4 28
OTN OTU1 140
OTU2 70
OTU2e 70
OTU4 14
Ethernet FE (electrical signal) OTN: 140

Packet: 140
TDM: 112
FE (optical signal) OTN: 140

Packet: 140
TDM: 56
GE (electrical signal) OTN: 140

Packet: 140
TDM: 48
GE (optical signal) OTN: 140

Packet: 140
TDM: 56
10GE LAN OTN: 70

Packet: 56
10GE WAN OTN: 70
40GE OTN: 12

Platform

100GE OTN: 14
Packet: 6
SAN FC100/FICON 140
FC200/FICON Express 140
ESCON 140
FC400/FICON 4G 112
FC800/FICON 8G 70
FC1200/FICON 10G 70
FC1600 42
FC3200 14
InfiniBand 2.5G 140
InfiniBand 5G 112
InfiniBand 10G 70
ISC 1G 140
ISC 2G 140
Distributed base CPRI option 1 —

station interface
service CPRI option 2 120
CPRI option 3 120
CPRI option 4 105
CPRI option 5 105
CPRI option 6 105
CPRI option 7 84
CPRI option 8 70
Open base OBSAI 4x 105

station interface
service OBSAI 8x 105
Video service DVB-ASI 140

and others
SD-SDI 140
HD-SDI 140
3G-SDI 140

Platform

MADI 140
5.6 Supported Service Capabilities(1800 I&II Compact)

This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 I&II Compact.
Table 5-6 provides the service capabilities of the 1800 I&II Compact.
Table 5-6 Ability of service access in the OptiX OSN 1800 series
Serv Service Maximum Number of Maximum Number of
ice Type Services Supported by an Services Supported by an
Cate OptiX OSN 1800 I Chassisc OptiX OSN 1800 II Chassisc
gory
Single Single Single Single
Chassisa Chassis + Chassisa Chassis +
OADM OADM
Frameb Frameb
SDH STM-1 16 24 48 48
STM-4 16 24 48 48
STM-16 16 24 40 48
STM-64 10 10 20 20
SON OC-3 16 24 48 48
ET
OC-12 16 24 48 48
OC-48 16 24 40 48
OC-192 10 10 20 20
PDH E1 42 63 126 126

c
T1 42 63 126 126
OTN OTU1 16 24 48 48
OTU2 10 10 20 20
OTU2e 10 10 20 20
OTU4 2 2 4 4
Ethe FE 16 24 48 48
rnet (electrical
signal)

Platform

gory
OADM OADM
Frameb Frameb
FE 16 24 48 48
(optical
signal)
GE 18 24 54 54
(electrical
signal)
GE 18 24 54 54
(optical
signal)
10GE 12 12 24 24
LAN
10GE 10 10 20 20
WAN
40GE 2 2 4 4
100GE 1 1 2 2
SAN FC100/ 16 24 48 48
FICON
FC200/ 16 24 40 48
FICON
Express
ESCON 16 24 48 48
FC400/ 8 12 20 24
FICON
4G
FC800/ 10 10 20 20
FICON
8G
FC1200/ 12 12 24 24
FICON
10G
FC1600 12 12 24 24
FC3200 2 2 4 4

Platform

gory
OADM OADM
Frameb Frameb
InfiniBand 24 24 48 48
2.5G
5G
10G
ISC 1G 24 24 48 48
ISC 2G 24 24 48 48
Distr CPRI 4 6 10 12
ibute option 1
d
base CPRI 16 24 48 48
stati option 2
on CPRI 16 24 40 48
inter option 3
face
servi CPRI 12 18 36 42
ce option 4
CPRI 15 15 30 30
option 5
CPRI 15 15 30 30
option 6
CPRI 12 12 24 24
option 7
CPRI 10 10 20 20
option 8
Ope OBSAI 4x 12 18 36 42
n
base OBSAI 8x 8 15 30 30
stati
on
inter
face
servi
ce

Platform

gory
OADM OADM
Frameb Frameb
Vide DVB-ASI 16 24 48 48
o
servi SD-SDI 16 24 48 48
ce HD-SDI 16 24 48 48
and
other 3G-SDI 8 12 20 24
s
a: Install both OTU and OADM boards in the single chassis.

b: Install OTU boards in the single chassis and OADM boards in the OADM frame.
c: This table provides the maximum number of services supported by an OptiX OSN 1800
I&II chassis that houses TNF1SCC or TNF3SCC boards. For the differences, see Version
Description.
5.7 Supported Service Capabilities (1800 I Enhanced)

This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 I Enhanced.
Table 5-7 provides the service capabilities of the 1800 I Enhanced.
Service Service Type Number of Services Supported by

Category Single Chassis
SDH STM-1 20
STM-4 20
STM-16 10
STM-64 4
PDH E1 84
T1 84
E3 6
T3 6
Ethernet FE (electrical signal) 20
FE (optical signal) 28

Platform

GE (electrical signal) 20
GE (optical signal) 28
10GE LAN 4
10GE WAN 2
5.8 Supported Service Capabilities (1800 II Enhanced)

This topic provides the service capabilities of the 1800 II Enhanced.
Table 5-8 provides the service capabilities of the 1800 II Enhanced.

SDH STM-1 OTN: 48

TDM: 50
STM-4 OTN: 48
TDM: 50
STM-16 OTN: 48
TDM: 26
STM-64 OTN: 20
TDM: 2
SONET OC-3 OTN: 48

TDM: 48
OC-12 OTN: 48
TDM: 48
OC-48 OTN: 48
TDM: 24
OC-192 OTN: 20
TDM: 2
PDH E1 252
T1 252
E3 18

Platform

T3 18
OTN OTU1 48
OTU2 20
OTU2e
OTU4 4
Ethernet FE (electrical signal) 60
FE (optical signal) 60
GE (electrical signal) 60
GE (optical signal) 60
10GE LAN 40
10GE WAN 40
40GE 4
100GE 4
SAN FC100/FICON 48
FC200/FICON Express 48
ESCON 48
FC400/FICON 4G 32
FC800/FICON 8G 20
FC1200/FICON 10G 20
FC1600 12
FC3200 4
InfiniBand 2.5G 48
InfiniBand 5G 32
InfiniBand 10G 20
ISC 1G 48
ISC 2G 48
Distributed base CPRI option 2 48

station interface
service CPRI option 3 48
CPRI option 4 36

Platform

CPRI option 5 30
CPRI option 6 30
CPRI option 7 24
CPRI option 8 20
Open base OBSAI 4x 36

station interface
service OBSAI 8x 30
Video service DVB-ASI 48
SD-SDI 48
HD-SDI 48
3G-SDI 48
MADI 40
5.9 Service Mapping

This topic describes how client signals are mapped into ODUk signals and how ODUk signals
are then mapped and multiplexed into OTUk signals.
The received client signals are first mapped into ODUk signals to implement signal mapping
and multiplexing. The mapped and multiplexed signals are then mapped into OTUk signals.
After the E/O conversion, the signals are sent to the WDM side.
Figure 5-1 shows the mapping between client services and OTUk signals. OSN 1800 uses
OTU boards to perform service mapping.
Figure 5-1 Service mapping
5.9.1 Mapping Client Services into ODUk Signals

This topic describes how OSN 1800 multiplexes and maps client services into ODUk signals.
The WDM equipment can map client signals into ODUk signals using timeslots or standard
mapping procedures. When using timeslots, the WDM equipment can aggregate multiple

Platform
services at rates lower than 2.5 Gbit/s into one ODU1 signal, enabling multiple services to
share the same ODU1 bandwidth. When using the standard mapping procedures, the WDM
equipment directly maps client signals into ODUk signals.
Mapping Client Services Using Timeslots

In this mapping mode, OSN 1800 divides an ODU1 signal into several timeslots, each with a
bandwidth of 155 Mbit/s. Client services are sliced into 155 Mbit/s signal segments, each
mapped into one timeslot of ODU1. OSN 1800 can map multiple low-rate client services into
one ODU1 signal, thereby improving bandwidth utilization.
When the rate of client services is below the ODU1 level (2.5 Gbit/s), the client services can
be mapped into ODU1 timeslots.
Figure 5-2 provides an example showing how GE, STM-1, and FC100 services are
aggregated into one ODU1.
Figure 5-2 Aggregating client services into one ODU1
Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots
required by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type Number of Service Type Number of

Timeslots Timeslots
Required Required
(Bandwidth: 155 (Bandwidth: 155
Mbit/s) Mbit/s)
GE(GFP_T)/ 7 FICON 6
GE(TTT-GMP)
STM-1/OC-3 1 FICON Express 12
STM-4/OC-12 4 ESCON 2
STM-16/OC-48 16 DVB-ASI 2
FC200 12 SDI 3

Platform

Timeslots Timeslots
Required Required
(Bandwidth: 155 (Bandwidth: 155
Mbit/s) Mbit/s)
FC100 6 HD-SDI 12
FE 1 OTU1 16
CPRI option 1 5 CPRI option 2 8
CPRI option 3 16 1800 V: - 1800 V: -

1800 I&II: 1800 I&II: 7
GE_SLICE
E3(1800 I&II) 1 InfiniBand 2.5G 16
FC100_SLICE(1800 8 FC200_SLICE 16
I&II)
FICON_SLICE(180 8 FICON_EXPRESS_ 16
0 I&II) SLICE
Mapping Client Services Using Standard Mapping Procedures

OSN 1800 can directly map client services into ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex) signals using
standard mapping procedures, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 Mapping client services into ODUk
Different types of client services occupy different number of timeslots when they are mapped
into ODUflex signals in standard mode. The number of timeslots occupied by each type of
service is listed below.

Timeslots Timeslots
Occupieda Occupieda
(Bandwidth: 1.25 (Bandwidth: 1.25
Gbit/s) Gbit/s)
FICON 4G 4 CPRI option 5 4
FICON 8G 7 CPRI option 6 5

Platform

Timeslots Timeslots
Occupieda Occupieda
(Bandwidth: 1.25 (Bandwidth: 1.25
Gbit/s) Gbit/s)
FC400 4 InfiniBand 2.5G 3
FC800 7 InfiniBand 5G 5
CPRI option 4 3 3G-SDI 3
OBSAI 4x 3 OBSAI 8x 5
ISC 1G 1 InfiniBand 10G 9
ISC 2G 2 10GE LAN Manually calculate

it based on the
service rate.
FC1600 12 CPRI option 7 8
FC3200 23 OTU2 9
CPRI option 8 9
NOTE
a: Number of timeslots occupied = Rate corresponding to a service type/Bandwidth of each timeslot (1.25
Gbit/s). If the result is not an integer, add 1 to the exact division result. Assume that an FC400 service is
received, (4.25 Gbit/s)/(1.25 Gbit/s) = 3.4. Then, the number of timeslots occupied = 3 + 1 = 4.
5.9.2 Multiplexing and Mapping ODUk Signals into OTUk

Signals
This topic describes how the OSN 1800 multiplexes and maps ODUk signals into OTUk
signals. The ODUk signals are mapped into OTUk signals. After the E/O conversion, the
signals are sent to the WDM side.
The OSN 1800 can multiplex and map client signals into ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, flex, 3, 4,
C2) signals and produce OTUk (k = 1, 2, 2e, 4, C2) signals on the WDM side for line
transmission. OTM Multiplexing and Mapping shows the ODUk multiplexing and mapping
structure supported by the OSN 1800.
5.9.3 Mapping and Multiplexing SDH Services

The SDH service mapping and multiplexing structure used by the OSN 1800 complies with
ITU-T Recommendations.
The OSN 1800 maps and multiplexes VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, and VC-4 concatenation services
into STM-N signals and sends the STM-N signals onto fibers for transmission. Figure 5-4
shows the mapping and multiplexing structure for various SDH services.

Platform
Figure 5-4 SDH mapping and multiplexing structure for SDH services

Platform
Product Description 6 Product Features
6 Product Features
About This Chapter
OptiX OSN equipment supports a wide range of features.
6.1 Line Rate

The OSN 1800 adopts the DWDM/CWDM technology to implement multi-service and fully
transparent transmission.
6.2 OTN Feature
The optical transport network (OTN) technology ensures flexible service cross-connections in
an end-to-end (E2E) manner, and enables services of different types to share bandwidth. With
the help of numerous OTN overheads and easy operations on the NMS, users can easily
maintain networks and locate faults.
6.3 Packet Feature
OSN 1800 supports Multiprotocol Label Switching Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) and pseudo
wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technologies, with which a pure PTN network, or
Hybrid network can be provisioned.
6.4 TDM Application
The OSN 1800 supports SDH, PDH, and Ethernet technologies. With these technologies, a
pure TDM network or Hybrid network can be provisioned.
6.5 ROADM Feature
6.6 OTN + ROADM Feature
The OTN + ROADM feature cross-connects a client service in any optical direction while
ensuring high bandwidth utilization.
6.7 MS-OTN
Provides information about the latest Multi-Service Optical Transport Network (MS-OTN)
technologies in the industry and describes how the technologies will evolve. It does not
necessarily mean that current Huawei products support these technologies.
6.8 Multi-Service Transmission over a Universal Line Board
OptiX OSN equipment supports switching of ODUk, packet, and VC granular services to
address the requirement on transmitting SDH, packet, and OTN services at the same time.
6.9 DWDM over CWDM Application

Platform
DWDM wavelengths can be transported in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm to

expand the CWDM system capacity.
6.10 Temperature-Hardened Feature(1800 I&II Compact)
Some boards intended for OptiX OSN 1800 can work properly at ultra-high and ultra-low
temperatures in specific configuration scenariosSome boards can also work properly at a
temperature ranging from -5°C to 65°C regardless of configuration scenarios..
6.11 Redundancy and Protection
OSN 1800 supports multiple types of network level and equipment level protection, which
ensures reliable data transmission.
6.12 Automatic Optical Power Management
With the functions, users can better monitor and maintain OSN 1800 NEs on a network.
6.13 Synchronization
When interconnecting with OTN series products, the OSN 1800 products support physical-
layer clock, IEEE 1588v2 clock, and synchronous Ethernet clock to achieve end-to-end clock
transmission.
6.14 ASON
The automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new generation of the optical
transport network and is all called ASON optical network. Compared with a traditional WDM
network, an ASON-empowered WDM network has advantages in service configuration,
bandwidth utilization, and protection.
6.1 Line Rate

The OSN 1800 adopts the DWDM/CWDM technology to implement multi-service and fully
transparent transmission.
The OSN 1800 can multiplex services of a maximum of 80 channels into the same fiber, that
is, to transport 80 signals carried over different wavelengths.
Transmission solutions of different line rates are as follows:
l 80 x 200/100/10 Gbit/s (DWDM)
l 40 x 200/100 Gbit/s (DWDM)
l 40 x 10 Gbit/s (DWDM)
l 40 x 2.5 Gbit/s (DWDM)
l 8 x 10 Gbit/s (CWDM)
l 8 x 2.5 Gbit/s (CWDM)
The OSN 1800 adopts two line rate applications:
l Multiplexing on the OTU board: If the system does not have a centralized cross-
connection unit, use the OTU board and optical add/drop multiplexer board for line
transmission.
l Multiplexing with cross-connect board: If the system uses the MS-OTN system for
centralized cross-connection, use the cross-connect board, OTN tributary board, and
OTN line board for line transmission.

Platform
DWDM Application
Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 show examples of the typical application of the 10/2.5 Gbit/s line
rate transmission solution with the 40-channel DWDM system. In the DWDM system, an
MUX/DMUX board multiplexes multi-wavelength signals from OTU boards, or from line
boards after cross-connection, into a fiber for transmission.
Figure 6-3 shows examples of the typical application of the 200/100 Gbit/s line rate
transmission solution with the 40-channel DWDM system. In the DWDM system, an MUX/
DMUX board multiplexes multi-wavelength signals into a fiber for transmission. Multiplexed
signals are directly multiplexed by OTU boards.
Figure 6-4 shows an example of the typical application of the 200/100/10 Gbit/s line rate
transmission solution with the 80-channel DWDM system.
Figure 6-1 Typical application of the 40-channel DWDM system (signals multiplexed from
OTU boards)
Figure 6-2 Typical application of the 40-channel DWDM system (signals multiplexed with
cross-connect boards)

Platform
Figure 6-3 Typical application of the 40-channel DWDM system
Figure 6-4 Typical application of the 80-channel DWDM system
CWDM Application
Figure 6-5 and Figure 6-6 show examples of the typical application of the 10/2.5 Gbit/s line
rate transmission solution with the 8-channel CWDM system. In the CWDM system, an
OADM board multiplexes multi-wavelength signals from OTU boards, or from line boards
after cross-connection, into a fiber for transmission.
Figure 6-5 Typical application of the 8-channel CWDM system (multiplexed from OTU
boards)

Platform
Figure 6-6 Typical application of the 8-channel CWDM system (signals multiplexed with
cross-connect boards)
6.2 OTN Feature

The optical transport network (OTN) technology ensures flexible service cross-connections in
an end-to-end (E2E) manner, and enables services of different types to share bandwidth. With
the help of numerous OTN overheads and easy operations on the NMS, users can easily
maintain networks and locate faults.
l OTN cross-connection
Any granular traffic can be aggregated into ODUk pipes. In addition, different types of
services from multiple sites can be aggregated into one ODUk pipe. This enables flexible
service grooming and improves bandwidth utilization.
l GE E2E transmission based on ODU0
Through end-to-end service grooming, cross-connections are directly configured on the
line side of intermediate sites and back-to-back physical fiber connections are not
needed. This helps quickly provision services because it greatly saves the time for
connecting fibers between intermediate sites while reducing potential faults and
maintenance workload.
l E2E service management based on OTN overheads
With the help of numerous OTN overheads defined in ITU-T G.709 as well as easy
operations on the NMS, services can be managed and monitored in an end-to-end
manner.
With the help of OTN overheads, an OTN network can transparently transmit client
services and provide powerful forward error correction (FEC) capabilities. The
overheads and NMS together enable easy end-to-end service monitoring and
management. They can easily locate faults.
l Flexible bandwidth utilization based on ODUflex
The OSN 1800 supports the optical data unit flexible (ODUflex) feature. This feature
enables the OSN 1800 to adapt itself to various services, such as video, storage, and data
services as well as future IP services.
l Multi-carrier channel monitoring
When networks from different carriers interconnect, the tandem connection monitoring
(TCM) bytes in the OTN overheads can be used to monitor the channel quality of

Platform
different carrier networks. Once a fault occurs on one of these networks, the TCM bytes
help easily demarcate the fault.
6.2.1 OTN Cross-Connection

With the help of OTN cross-connections, any granularity traffic can be aggregated into any
ODUk pipe and different types of services from multiple sites can be aggregated into one
ODUk pipe, enabling flexible service grooming and improving bandwidth usage.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports centralized ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex/ODU2/ODU2e
cross-connections and inter-board ODU2/ODU2e cross-connections. Figure 6-7 shows OTN
cross-connection application. The OTN network flexibly cross-connects any client service at
any rate and enables them to share bandwidth. Then these client services reach the IP/MPLS
backbone layer.
l Site A receives service1, service2, and service3. The services are encapsulated separately
but share bandwidth.
– At site A, service1 and service2 are encapsulated in one ODU1 pipe, which still has
idle bandwidth; service3 is encapsulated into an ODU0 pipe.
– After ODU0 and ODU1 are processed as OTU signals, they are transmitted to site
B.
l After the OTU signals reach site B, they are flexibly added or dropped, and encapsulated
in an ODUk pipe for further transmission to their destinations.
– At site B, service3 is terminated and service5 can use the ODU0 pipe that is
originally used by service3.
– Service4 is aggregated into the same ODU1 pipe as service1 and service2, using the
idle bandwidth.
– Then ODU0 and ODU1 are processed as OTU signals and are further transmitted to
site C.

Platform
Figure 6-7 OTN cross-connection application
6.2.2 E2E Service Management Based on OTN Overheads

With the help of numerous OTN overheads defined in ITU-T G.709 as well as easy operations
on the NMS, services can be managed and monitored in an E2E manner.
With the help of the OTN overheads, an OTN network transparently transmits client services
and provides powerful forward error correction (FEC) capabilities. The overheads and NMS
together enable easy E2E service monitoring and management. A fault, if any, can be easily
located. Figure 6-8 shows E2E service management based on OTN overheads.

Platform
Figure 6-8 OTN cross-connection application
SM: Section monitoring PM: Path monitoring
NOTE
The equipment does not support monitoring of optical-layer overheads.
6.2.3 Channel Monitoring over Different Operators' Networks

When different operators' networks are interconnected, the tandem connection monitoring
(TCM) in OTN overheads can be used to monitor the quality of the channels provided by
different operators. Once a fault occurs, the TCM overheads can help demarcate the fault.
Figure 6-9 shows how a network uses TCM overheads to monitor the quality of the channels
provided by different operators. According to ITU-G G.709, a maximum of six levels of TCM
overheads are supported. In this example, three levels of TCM overheads are used to monitor
different networks:
l The customer uses TCM1 to monitor the optical-layer UNI-UNI QoS.

l Operators use TCM2 to monitor the QoS of their networks.
l Operators A and B use TCM3 to monitor the intra- and inter-domain connections of their
own networks.
If a fault occurs, the specific position of the fault can be located based on the TCM1, TCM2,
and TCM3 status.

Platform
Figure 6-9 TCM functions
6.2.4 Flexible Bandwidth Utilization Based on ODUflex

The OSN 1800 supports the flexible optical data unit flexible (ODUflex) technology. Using
the ODUflex technology, the OSN 1800 can adapt itself to various services such as video,
storage, and data services, as well as future IP services.
ODUflex can be used to transmit constant bit rate (CBR) services on an optical transport
network (OTN). The services whose CBRs are higher than 2.48832 Gbit/s are mapped to an
ODUflex (CBR) container in bit synchronization mode. Functions such as end-to-end
performance monitoring and protection switching are feasible on the ODUflex (CBR)
container. The overheads and monitoring management modes of ODUflex are the same as
those of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2) services. For the application scenarios, see Figure 6-10 and
Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-10 shows how ODUflex is used to transport generic CBR signals. An FC400 service
occupies four TS sub-timeslots and is mapped to an ODUflex container; a 3G-SDI service
occupies three TS sub-timeslots and is mapped to an ODUflex container. The FC400 and 3G-
SDI services share the same OTU2 wavelength.
Figure 6-11 shows how ODU2 is used to transport generic CBR signals. The FC400 and 3G-
SDI services are mapped to different ODU2 containers, and they each occupy an OTU2
wavelength.
Figure 6-10 Transport of generic CBR signals (ODUflex)

Platform
Figure 6-11 Transport of generic CBR signals (ODU2)
6.2.5 Board-based ODUk ADM Grooming
Function Overview of ODUk ADM

In normal cases, services are transmitted between the client side and WDM side on the ELOM
board, as represented by blue lines with arrows in Figure 6-12. The ODUk ADM function
enables ODUk services to pass through between the east WDM side and west WDM side, as
represented by purple lines with arrows in Figure 6-12.
The ELOM board supports a 10 Gbit/s pass-through capability and a 20 Gbit/s service
grooming capability. The board supports pass-through of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex
services. The following figure shows the pass-through of ODU1 services.
Figure 6-12 Schematic diagram of the ODUk ADM function

Platform
Application Scenario 1
As shown in Figure 6-13, OptiX OSN 1800 OADM stations A, B, C, and D form a ring
network. An ELOM board is configured at each station. The following services are
configured:
l One STM-16 service is transmitted between stations A and B, between stations B and C,
between stations C and D, and between stations D and A each.
l Three GE services are transmitted from station A to stations B, C, and D each (the signal
transmission paths are respectively represented by red, yellow, and purple lines in the
following figure). The GE service to station C passes through the ELOM board at station
B (the signal transmission path is represented by yellow lines). The GE service to station
D passes through the ELOM boards at stations B and C (the service transmission path is
represented by purple lines).
The ODUk ADM function enables ODUk services to be added, be dropped, and pass through
on the ring.
Figure 6-13 Networking for application scenario 1
Application Scenario 2
OptiX OSN 1800 OADM stations A, B, C, and D form a ring network. An ELOM board is
configured at each station. The following services are configured:
l One STM-16 service is transmitted between stations A and B, and one ODU1 SNCP
protection group is configured for the service.
l Two GE services are transmitted between stations A and C, and two ODU0 SNCP
protection groups are configured for the services.

Platform
l One FC400 service is transmitted between stations A and D, and one ODUflex SNCP
protection group is configured for the service.
In normal cases, services between stations A, B, C, and D are carried on the working channel.
In Figure 6-14, the solid lines indicate the working channel and the dashed lines indicate the
protection channel.
Figure 6-14 Networking for application scenario 2 (normal)
When a line fault occurs between stations A and B, services at each station are switched to the
protection channel, as shown in the solid lines in Figure 6-15.

Platform
Figure 6-15 Networking for application scenario 2 (switching)
6.3 Packet Feature

OSN 1800 supports Multiprotocol Label Switching Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) and pseudo
wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technologies, with which a pure PTN network, or
Hybrid network can be provisioned.
OSN 1800 equipment adopts packet transport technologies and can receive/transmit FE, GE,
and 10GE services. It efficiently implements the statistical multiplexing of data services and
reduces the transport costs per bit. It also inherits the advantages of the SDH equipment, uses
the Native TDM solution to carry TDM services, and enables high-quality voice service
transmission.
6.3.1 Ethernet Services Model (Packet)

MEF, ITU-T, and IETF separately defined Ethernet service models at Layer 2.
In essence, the Ethernet service models defined by MEF, ITU-T, and IETF are similar
although they have different names. Table 6-1 lists all service models supported by OSN
1800, and the mappings between the service models, transport tunnels, and service
multiplexing methods.

Platform
Table 6-1 Ethernet service models
MEF Model ITU-T Model IETF Model Transport Service

Tunnel Multiplexing
(Network Method
Side) (Access Side)
E-Line EPL - Physically Physically

isolated isolated
EVPL - VLAN Physically

isolated
VPWS MPLS
- Physically VLAN
isolated
- VLAN
VPWS MPLS
E-LAN EPLAN - Physically Physically

isolated isolated
EVPLAN - Physically VLAN

isolated
- VLAN
VPLS MPLS
6.3.1.1 E-Line/E-LAN
MEF defines two types of Layer 2 Ethernet services: E-Line service using point-to-point
Ethernet virtual connection (EVC) and E-LAN service using multipoint-to-multipoint EVC.
Table 6-2 lists the E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the OSN 1800.
Table 6-2 E-Line and E-LAN services
Service Service Type
E-Line Native Ethernet Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service

services
VLAN-based E-Line services
QinQ-based E-Line services
ETH PWE3 E-Line services carried by PWs

services
E-LAN Native Ethernet E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges

services
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

Platform
Service Service Type
ETH PWE3 E-LAN services carried by PWs

services
E-Line Services
Any Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC shall be designated as an Ethernet
Line (E-Line) service type, as shown in Figure 6-16.
Figure 6-16 E-Line services
Table 6-3 shows different E-Line services and related bearer technologies.
Table 6-3 E-Line services

E-Line Service Bearer Schematic Diagram
Technol
ogy
Point-to-point Port
transparently bearing
transmitted E- (physical
Line services isolation)

Platform
E-Line Service Bearer Schematic Diagram

Technol
ogy
VLAN-based E- VLAN
Line services
QinQ-based E- VLAN
Line services
E-Line services MPLS

carried by PWs
E-LAN Services
Any Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC shall be designated as
an E-LAN service type, as shown in Figure 6-17.

Platform
Figure 6-17 E-LAN services
Table 6-4 shows the different E-LAN services and related bearer technologies.
Table 6-4 E-LAN services

E-LAN Bearer Schematic Diagram
Service Technolo
gy
E-LAN Port
services bearing
based on
IEEE
802.1d
bridges
E-LAN VLAN
services
based on
IEEE
802.1q
bridges

Platform
E-LAN Bearer Schematic Diagram

Service Technolo
gy
E-LAN VLAN
services
based on
IEEE
802.1ad
bridges
E-LAN MPLS
services
carried
by PWs
6.3.1.2 VPWS/VPLS
Layer 2 virtual private network (L2VPN) defined by IETF includes the virtual private wire
service (VPWS) and virtual private LAN service (VPLS). VPWS is used to provide point-to-
point services at Layer 2 and VPLS is used to simulate a local area network (LAN) in a wide
area network (WAN).
VPWS
VPWS is a Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) technology for point-to-point transmission.
It performs one-to-one mapping between a received attachment circuit (AC) and a pseudo
wire (PW). By binding ACs and PWs in the <AC, PW, AC> format to form a virtual circuit,
which is used to transparently transmit Layer 2 services between users. Figure 6-18 shows the
application of VPWS.

Platform
Figure 6-18 Application of VPWS
VPLS
VPLS is a Layer 2 VPN technology for simulating LANs. Using VPLS, each L2VPN
considers an NE as a virtual switching instance (VSI), and this VSI is used to achieve
mapping between multiple ACs and PWs, and connect multiple Ethernet LANs so that the
LANs work as if they are one LAN.
VPLS is an important technology for MANs. It can connect multiple Ethernet-powered
enterprise networks. As shown in Figure 6-19, VPLS provides LAN services across the WAN
for customer A.
Figure 6-19 Application of VPLS

Platform
6.3.2 CES Services

The CES helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber resources in the access ring
and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across the pure packet mode.
Emulation Mode
CES services support the following emulation modes:
l Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet (SAToP): In this mode, SAToP emulation is
performed for SDH VC-12 signals. Emulation services in this mode are also called CES
services.
l Structure-aware TDM Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network
(CESoPSN): In this mode, CESoPSN emulation is performed for SDH VC-12 signals.
Emulation services in this mode are also called CES services. Compared with the SAToP
mode, the CESoPSN mode is more bandwidth-efficient because it supports idle timeslot
compression.
Figure 6-20 describes the typical application of CES services. CES services are classified into
remote services (UNI-NNI) and local services (UNI-UNI).
l Remote service (UNI-NNI): The native TDM services between the NodeB and the RNC
are transmitted over a PSN. PE1 emulates the native TDM services from the NodeB into
CES services (CESoPSN mode is used as an example in the following figure). Then, the
CES services are transmitted to PE2 over the PSN. Finally, PE2 restores the CES
services to the native TDM services, which are then transmitted to the RNC.
l Local service (UNI-UNI): The NodeB and RNC are interconnected using PE1. PE1
receives native TDM services from NodeB and transparently transmits the services to the
RNC on the UNI side.
Figure 6-20 Typical application of CES services

Platform
6.3.3 Service Bearer Solutions and Technologies

This section describes the packet service bearer solutions and technologies that the equipment
provides.
6.3.3.1 Service Transmission Solutions

In addition to transparently transmitting Ethernet services, the OptiX OSN equipment
supports Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data packets, provides packet service protection, QoS,
and OAM functions. It provides a series of flexible data service transmission solutions.
Table 6-5 describes the packet service transmission solutions.
Table 6-5 Transmission solutions for packet services
Packet Service Main Feature Supported Packet

Transmission Solution Services
Packet transmission l Supports end-to-end E-Line

MPLS-TP packet l Native ETH
transmission.
l PWE3 ETH (VPWS)
l Supports end-to-end
flexible tunnels, E-LAN
providing bandwidth at l Native ETH
any rate. l PWE3 ETH (VPLS)
l Uses the centralized
packet service grooming
algorithm to achieve
directionless grooming
between boards and
ports.
6.3.3.2 Service Bearer Technologies

The OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet service bearer technologies, such as VLAN,
and multi-protocol label switching (MPLS). The VLAN technology includes QinQ
technology. This section describes the MPLS and QinQ technologies, which are more
complex.
MPLS
MPLS is a type of transmission technology and it is used to transparently transmit data
packets between users. MPLS bearer technologies include pseudo wire edge to edge
emulation (PWE3) and MPLS tunnel technology.
l MPLS tunnel
The MPLS tunnel is defined by the MPLS protocol. Independent from services, the
MPLS tunnel implements end-to-end transmission and carries PWs that contain services.
Figure 6-21 shows how the MPLS tunnel is used to transmit services.

Platform
Figure 6-21 Application of the MPLS tunnel
l PWE3
PWE3 is a type of L2VPN protocol. In a packet switched network (PSN), PWE3
provides tunnels and emulates various services, for example, Ethernet services. PWE3
carries services that are received over different mediums on one MPLS network,
eliminating the need for constructing multiple networks and therefore reducing the
OPEX.
PWE3 creates point-to-point tunnels, which are separated from each other. Layer 2
packets from users are transparently transmitted in PWs.
Figure 6-22 Application of PWE3
QinQ
Services from the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple
VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport
network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. The QinQ
technology is a VLAN stacking and nesting technology. Using the QinQ technology, data
packets carry two layers of VLAN tags for the identification purpose. This removes the limit
of the original solution in which only one layer of VLAN tag is used, extending the VLAN
IDs. Figure 6-23 shows the application of the QinQ technology.

Platform
Figure 6-23 Application of the QinQ technology
6.3.4 Saving Tunnel Resources at Aggregation Nodes Using MS-

PWs
An MS-PW provides an edge-to-edge virtual connection by setting up static PW segments.
The S-PE at the tangent point of the access ring and the convergence ring swaps PW labels
and aggregates PWs. The number of tunnels on the convergence ring is reduced.
Definition
An MS-PW is set up between two PW terminating provider edges (T-PEs) and travels through
the PW switching provider edge (S-PE). At the S-PE, PW labels are swapped and then the
MS-PW is divided into two or more segments.
An MS-PW consists of multiple adjacent PW segments, and each PW segment is a point-to-
point PW.
Purpose
If the equipment does not support MS-PW, Ethernet services can be transmitted over a PSN
by static tunnels.
l At the ingress node, PW and tunnel labels are put on Ethernet packets.
l At the transit node, the tunnel labels are swapped.
l At the egress node, the PW and tunnel labels are stripped off.
In this service model, only the tunnel labels can be swapped at the transit node. Therefore, as
shown in Figure 6-24, users must configure edge-to-edge tunnels from the NodeB to the
RNC. The number of tunnels on the convergence ring PSN2 increases sharply as the number
of NodeBs increases.

Platform
Figure 6-24 Single-segment PW networking diagram
As shown in Figure 6-25, the S-PE at the tangent point of the access ring and the convergence
ring terminates the tunnels on the access rings. All the PWs on the access rings are aggregated
into one tunnel. Therefore, the number of tunnels on the convergence ring is reduced.

Platform
Figure 6-25 MS-PW networking diagram
6.3.5 Multicast Applications based on IGMP Snooping

By snooping the IGMP packet of Layer 3, the IGMP Snooping function creates and maintains
the Layer 2 multicast function and thus prevents the multicast packets from being broadcast
among the Layer 2 equipment.
The IGMP protocol is a multicast management protocol used between routers and hosts (such
as switches and DSLAMs) to manage the addition and deletion of a group member.
Figure 6-26 compares the process for transmitting multicast packets when the IGMP
Snooping function is enabled and the process for transmitting multicast packets when the
IGMP Snooping function is disabled.
l When the IGMP Snooping function is disabled, the equipment broadcasts the received
packets to each host.
l When the IGMP Snooping function is enabled, after receiving a multicast packet, the
equipment queries the multicast table in which the source port functions as the router
port. If the multicast group that matches the multicast address exists in the multicast
table, the equipment forwards the packet to this multicast group. If the multicast group
that matches the multicast address does not exist in the multicast table, the equipment
discards the packet or broadcasts the packet.

Platform
Figure 6-26 Application of the IGMP Snooping function in a network
The advantages of the IGMP Snooping application are as follows:

l Less network bandwidth is required.
l Packets are forwarded within the range of each VLAN. Therefore, the information
security is enhanced.
6.3.6 Flexibly Planning VLANs based on QinQ

This topic provides the definition of QinQ and its purpose.
Definition
QinQ is a Layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1q encapsulation. The QinQ technology
encapsulates a private virtual local area network (VLAN) tag into a carrier VLAN tag.
Therefore, the packets with two layers of VLAN tags can be transmitted on the backbone
network of a carrier. In this manner, QinQ provides Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN)
tunnels.
Figure 6-27 shows the application of QinQ.

Platform
Figure 6-27 Application of QinQ in E-Line services
Purpose
QinQ provides a Layer 2 VPN solution that is much cheaper and easier than multi-protocol
label switch (MPLS). By using the VLAN QinQ technology, data packets carry two layers of
VLAN tags to distinguish different services. This changes the limitation that only one VLAN
tag is used to mark the data packets, and increases the number of VLAN IDs. The inner
VLAN tag is called C-VLAN and used as the customer VLAN. The outer VLAN is called S-
VLAN and used as the service provider VLAN.
The major functions of the QinQ technology are as follows:
l With the application of the QinQ technology, the number of VLAN IDs can reach 4094 x
4094. This meets the increasing requirements for VLAN IDs.
l Customers and operators can plan VLAN resources independently and flexibly.
Therefore, network configuration and maintenance is simplified.
l The QinQ technology replaces the MPLS technology to provide a cheaper and simpler
Layer 2 VPN solution.
l The QinQ technology achieves the expansion of Ethernet services from local area
networks (LANs) to wide area networks (WANs).
6.3.7 Service Quality Guarantee based on QoS

On legacy IP networks, all packets are processed in first in first out (FIFO) queues by
adopting the best effort strategy. This method cannot meet the stringent requirements of
emerging services for the bandwidth, delay, and delay jitter. Therefore, the QoS technology is
developed. QoS provides differentiated service guarantees for different services, such as
voice, video, and data.
QoS has the following characteristics:
l Provides a specific user or service with a dedicated bandwidth.
l Avoids and manages network congestion.
l Lowers the packet loss ratio.
l Leverages the network traffic and improves bandwidth utilization.
Figure 6-28 illustrates QoS processing of Ethernet services on the equipment.

Platform
Figure 6-28 QoS processing
6.3.8 Hierarchical Traffic Control based on HQoS

Hierarchical quality of service (HQoS) is a QoS technique that controls traffic based on
hierarchical service models. HQoS helps operators provide bandwidth guarantees for multiple
users to access multiple services.
Traditional QoS schedules traffic based on port. The service flows with the same priority on
one physical port share the same priority queue. As a result, the service flows contend for
resources in the same priority queue, and thus users and services cannot be differentiated. To
resolve this issue, the HQoS technique appears.
HQoS implements QoS at different levels such as port, V-UNI, and PW, providing refined and
differentiated services for the customers.
Multiple Services of a Single User Sharing Bandwidth

As shown in the following figure, the user accesses the network through an Ethernet private
line and is allocated with a bandwidth of 16 Mbit/s for three types of services: voice, video,
and data. The voice and video services have a fixed bandwidth (CIR is equal to PIR).
Specifically, the bandwidth for the voice service is 2 Mbit/s and that for the video service is 6
Mbit/s. For the data service, the CIR is 512 kbit/s and PIR can reach 16 Mbit/s when idle
bandwidth resources are available.
To meet the preceding requirements, different service classes are configured for voice, video,
and data services, and bandwidth is configured for service flows with different service classes.
The total bandwidth for a user can be configured on the V-UNI.

Platform
Multiple Service Access Points of a Single User Sharing Bandwidth

As shown in the following figure, two local branches (A and B) of a company access the
network through an Ethernet private line. The CIR and PIR (the total bandwidth) that the
company has applied for are 16 Mbit/s and 32 Mbit/s, respectively. In addition, CIRs 10
Mbit/s and 6 Mbit/s are allocated for A and B respectively. When idle bandwidth resources
are available, the PIR for A or B can reach 32 Mbit/s.
To meet the preceding requirements, the CIR and PIR can be configured for A and B on their
V-UNIs. Then the two V-UNIs can be bound as one V-UNI group and the total bandwidth that
the company has applied for can be configured for the V-UNI group.
Multiple Users Sharing Bandwidth

As shown in the following figure, users in the building access the network through optical
fibers and the total bandwidth that has been applied for is 50 Mbit/s. There are three
companies in the building: A, B, and C. A and B access the network through an Ethernet
private line and C accesses the network through an Ethernet private network. Each company
is allocated a unique CIR and can preempt idle bandwidth resources on links. In addition,
each service of each company has its own QoS requirements.
To meet the preceding requirements, the CIR and PIR can be configured for A, B, and C on
their V-UNIs separately. Then the three V-UNI s can be bound as one V-UNI group and the
total bandwidth that the building has applied for can be configured for the V-UNI group. In
addition, to meet the QoS requirements of each service of each company, a unique service
class can be configured for each service and V-UNI ingress policies can be configured to set
the bandwidth for service flows with different service classes separately.
6.4 TDM Application

The OSN 1800 supports SDH, PDH, and Ethernet technologies. With these technologies, a
pure TDM network or Hybrid network can be provisioned.

Platform
The OSN 1800 supports access of E1/T1, E3/T3, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, FE, and
GE services and grooms services of different granularities, satisfying various network
requirements.
6.4.1 SDH Services Application

The OSN 1800 has a large capacity and supports flexible networking modes, such as chain,
ring, and ring-with-chain networks. It also supports networking of STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/
STM-1 services, which satisfies various network requirements.
The OSN 1800 supports full-granular service grooming and aggregation, including the
processing of VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-4-4C, VC-4-16C, and VC-4-64C services.OSN 1800
can either form a network independently or with DWDM equipment.

Platform
Figure 6-29 Networking configuration of the OSN 1800 performing multi-granularity service
grooming and service convergence
6.4.2 Ethernet Services Application (EoS)

OptiX OSN equipment, whose SDH transmission platform also provides access for Ethernet
services, can simultaneously transmit voice and data services.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l EPL service
l EVPL service
l EPLAN service

Platform
l EVPLAN service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As
shown in Figure 6-30, Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination
node through their respective VCTRUNKs. This ensures secure and reliable transmission of
services.
Figure 6-30 EPL service based on port
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l Port-shared EVPL services. Services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 6-31, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet services
according to VLAN ID, to distinguish VLANs from different departments of Company A.
The two services are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Figure 6-31 Port-shared EVPL services

Platform
l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the following
ways to implement EVPL services.
– EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 6-32.
– EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 6-33.
Figure 6-32 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
Figure 6-33 EVPL service based on QinQ
EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a
bandwidth. The OptiX OSN equipment adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2
switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access
control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets
are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK based on the destination MAC address, as
shown in Figure 6-34.

Platform
Figure 6-34 EPLAN service
EVPLAN Service
EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same
VLAN are isolated from each other. When two data services with the same VLAN ID are
accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can
meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 6-35, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN equipment adopt
VB+C-VLAN or VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.

Platform
Figure 6-35 EVPLAN service
6.4.3 Existing SDH Network Carrying Ethernet Services

The Ethernet over SDH (EoS) technology enables existing SDH networks to carry Ethernet
services, with the goal of reducing operators' CAPEX and improving network reliability.
The EoS technology enables existing SDH networks to carry Ethernet services, so that
operators can deploy 3G services even when they do not have packet networks.
Using the encapsulation/mapping protocol, EoS encapsulates and maps Ethernet services to
one or multiple VCs, which are then carried on SDH networks. EoS involves the following
key techniques:
l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
l Virtual concatenation (VCAT)
l Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
Figure 6-36 illustrates a typical scenario in which EoS is applied on MS-OTN equipment.

Platform
Figure 6-36 Application scenario of EoS
6.5 ROADM Feature

Using the ROADM technology, the OptiX OSN equipment supports flexible optical-layer
grooming in one to nine degrees. The ROADM solution realizes reconfiguration of
wavelengths by blocking or cross-connecting wavelengths. This ensures that the static
distribution of wavelength resources becomes flexible and dynamic. The ROADM technology
cooperating with the U2000 can remotely and dynamically adjust the status of wavelength
adding/dropping and pass-through. A maximum of 80 wavelengths can be adjusted, and up to
9-degree flexible optical-layer grooming is supported.
6.5.1 Basic Concepts

ROADM application scenarios include colored & directioned, colored & directionless, and
colorless & directionless. For concepts about colored, colorless, directioned, and directionless,
see Table 6-6.

Platform
Table 6-6 Basic concepts

Concept Description Application
Colored The X40 boards are used to add and drop Colored add/drop ports (fixed wavelength)
wavelengths. Each add port or drop port can add have the advantages of lower insertion loss
or drop fixed wavelengths only. and lower cost. If new wavelengths need to
replace the existing wavelengths, a site visit
is required to adjust the fiber connection
between the line board/OTU colored and the
matching add/drop port.
Colorless The DWSS9 boards are used to add and drop Colorless add/drop ports(tunable) allow
wavelengths. Any wavelengths can be added to remote reconfiguration of ROADM. Ensure
or dropped from any port on the ROADM board. that the OTU/line boards required for
provisioning new services have been installed
in the subrack; otherwise, a site visit is
required to install the required boards.
Directione A local wavelength carrying services can be In a directioned scenario, the current path
d transmitted to a specific direction. cannot be adjusted flexibly. If the current path
must be adjusted, a site visit is required to
adjust the fiber connections for the network.

Platform
Concept Description Application
Directionle A local wavelength carrying services can be The current path cannot be automatically
ss transmitted to any directions. adjusted in the directionless scenario. When
services are adjusted or the protection path is
used in case of a fault on the working path,
manually configure optical cross-connections
to achieve flexible service grooming.
6.5.2 1-Degree ROADM

This configuration generally applies to a terminal node. Services are not interrupted during
expansion.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the DWSS9.
The WSMD4 board supports only 40-channel systems, and the DWSS9 board supports 80-channel
systems.
Figure 6-37 1-degree ROADM application

On a 2-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in two directions. To smoothly
upgrade a network to one with over two degrees, configure a ROADM board.

Platform
NOTE
systems.
Colored & Directioned Scenario

This topic uses the west service as an example to describe the signal flow.
Local services are added to the west WSMD4 board through the AM1 port and then
transmitted to the west through the OUT port. Services from the east pass through the AM4
port on the west WSMD4 board and head west.
In a colored & directioned scenario, to ensure that local services of NE1 can be transmitted in
optical directions west and east, one group of X40+X40 must be configured for each optical
direction.
Figure 6-38 Colored & directioned scenario of the 2-degree ROADM application
Colored & Directionless Scenario

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west or east.
To adjust the current path (for example, when services are adjusted or the protection path is
used in case of a fault on the working path), manually configure optical cross-connections to
achieve flexible service grooming.
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in directions west and east, only one
group of X40+X40 is required.

Platform
Figure 6-39 Colored & directionless scenario of the 2-degree ROADM application

On a 3-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in three directions. To smoothly
upgrade a network to one with over three degrees, configure a ROADM board.
NOTE
systems.

Local services are added to the WSMD4 through the AM4 port and then transmitted to the
south through the OUT port. Services from the west and east pass through the AM1 and AM3
ports on the WSMD4 and head south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, south, and east, three
groups of X40+X40 must be configured. In each optical direction, the WSMD4 board
connects to one group of X40+X40.

Platform

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west, north, or east, only
one group of X40+X40 is required.

Platform
Colorless & Directionless Scenario

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.
l To adjust the current path (for example, when services are adjusted or the protection path
is used in case of a fault on the working path), manually configure optical cross-
connections to achieve flexible service grooming.
l If wavelength-tunable OTU or line boards are used in a colorless scenario, wavelengths
can be flexibly changed for service grooming to prevent congestion.
A DWSS9+DWSS9 combination can be used for colorless scenarios, as shown in Figure
6-42.

Platform
Figure 6-42 Colorless & directionless scenario of the 3-degree ROADM application

On a 4-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in four directions.
NOTE
systems.

Local services are added to the WSMD4 board through the AM4 port and then transmitted to
the south through the OUT port. Services from the west, north, and east pass through the
AM1, AM2, and AM3 ports on the WSMD4 board, heading for the south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, north, east, and south,
four groups of X40+X40 must be configured. In each direction, one group of X40+X40 must
be configured.

Platform

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in directions west, north, east, and
south, only one group of X40+X40 is required.

Platform
Colorless & Directioned Scenario

Local services are added to the WSMD4 board through the AM4 port and then transmitted to
the south through the OUT port. Services from the west, north, and east pass through the
AM1, AM2, and AM3 ports on the WSMD4 board, heading for the south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, north, east, and south,
four groups of X40+X40 must be configured. In each direction, one group of X40+X40 must
be configured.
6-45.

Platform
Figure 6-45 Colorless & directioned scenario of the 4-degree ROADM application

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or south.
l To adjust the current path (for example, when services are adjusted or the protection path
is used in case of a fault on the working path), manually configure optical cross-
connections to achieve flexible service grooming.
l If a wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in the colorless scenario, service
wavelengths can be flexibly converted to avoid a wavelength congestion.
6-46.

Platform
Figure 6-46 Colorless & directionless scenario of the 4-degree ROADM application

On a 9-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in nine directions. Each node
must use DWSS9 boards or WSMD9XF. Take DWSS9 as an example.
NOTE
The WSMD9XF board is equipped with XFIU modules. It can be used in common ROADM scenarios,
and the configured XFIU module can multiplex and demultiplex the main channel signals and OSC
signals to meet the requirements of single-OSC configuration, dual-OSC configuration, and single-fiber
bidirectional transmission scenarios. For details, see Application of WSMD9XF.

Local services are added to the DWSS9 board through the AM9 port and then transmitted to
D9 through the OUT port. Services from the west, north, and east pass through the AM1,
AM2, AM2, AM3, AM4, AM5, AM6, AM7 and AM8 ports on the DWSS9 board, heading
for D9.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7,
D8, and D9, nine groups of EX40+EX40 (in an 80-wavelength system, an EX40 is composed
of EX4001 and EX4002) must be configured. In each direction, one group of EX40+EX40
must be configured.

Platform
NOTE
In the 80-wavelength system, EX4001 and EX4002 occupy two AM/DM ports. Therefore, only 8-dimension
ROADM can be implemented. To implement 9-dimension ROADM, the board can be cascaded with a
DWSS9 board.
Colorless & Directioned Scenario

Local services are added to the DWSS9 board through the AM9 port and then transmitted to
D9 through the OUT port. Services from the west, north, and east pass through the AM1,
AM2, AM2, AM3, AM4, AM5, AM6, AM7 and AM8 ports on the DWSS9 board, heading
for D9.
6-48.
NOTE
When WSMD9XF boards are used for colorless scenarios, it is need to use together with the coherent
OTU boards or the optical demultiplexer board and optical multiplexer board.

Platform
Figure 6-48 Colorless & directioned scenario of the 9-degree ROADM application

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in nine directions, only one group of
EX40+EX40 is required.

Platform
Figure 6-49 Colored & Directionless scenario of the 9-degree ROADM application

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.
Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions. To adjust the current path
(for example, when services are adjusted or the protection path is used in case of a fault on the
working path), manually configure optical cross-connections to achieve flexible service
grooming.
6-50.

Platform
Figure 6-50 Colorless & Directionless scenario of the 9-degree ROADM application
6.6 OTN + ROADM Feature

The OTN + ROADM feature cross-connects a client service in any optical direction while
ensuring high bandwidth utilization.
Figure 6-51 illustrates how the OTN + ROADM feature helps effectively transmit client
services.
l A tributary board receives client services at any bit rate. After OTN mapping and ODUk
cross-connection are complete, the client signals are flexibly cross-connected on the
electrical layer and share bandwidth. A line board then outputs the signals over different
wavelengths.
l Along the optical cross-connections on the ROADM board, the signals over different
wavelengths can be transmitted in any optical direction.
l If the signals in an optical direction do not need to be locally added/dropped, they can be
directly transmitted to another optical direction through the optical cross-connections on
the ROADM board.

Platform
Figure 6-51 OTN + ROADM application
6.7 MS-OTN
Provides information about the latest Multi-Service Optical Transport Network (MS-OTN)
technologies in the industry and describes how the technologies will evolve. It does not
necessarily mean that current Huawei products support these technologies.

Platform
6.8 Multi-Service Transmission over a Universal Line

Board
OptiX OSN equipment supports switching of ODUk, packet, and VC granular services to
address the requirement on transmitting SDH, packet, and OTN services at the same time.
With the development of UMTS/LTE wireless broadband and xDSL/FTTx fixed broadband
markets, the bandwidth requirements of metropolitan area networks (MANs) increase greatly,
posing multi-service transmission challenges. The universal line board solution of OptiX OSN
equipment overcomes the challenges by providing the following benefits:
l ODUk, packet, and VC granular services are carried over the same OTU pipe to provide
efficient mixed transmission of small granular services.
l Service adjustment is convenient. A universal line board supports both traditional SDH
services and packet services, allowing for smooth evolution from TDM to packet. For
example, a 20 Gbit/s SDH service and a 20 Gbit/s packet service can be easily evolved to
a 40 Gbit/s packet service through service adjustment, with no need for board
replacement.

Platform
Figure 6-52 Application of universal line boards
TM: traffic management FIC: fabric interface chip
6.9 DWDM over CWDM Application

DWDM wavelengths can be transported in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm to
expand the CWDM system capacity.
Figure 6-53 shows the expansion of wavelength allocation. With this expansion scheme, a
CWDM system can transmit a maximum of 26 DWDM wavelengths at 100 GHz channel
spacing.

Platform
Figure 6-53 DWDM wavelength expansion and allocation in the CWDM system
Figure 6-54 shows the equipment configuration in which DWDM wavelengths are
transported in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm. The DWDM wavelengths need to
pass through the DWDM MUX/DEMUX and CWDM MUX/DEMUX. Therefore, the optical
amplifier unit needs to be configured in between.

Platform
Figure 6-54 Application of the DWDM wavelength in the CWDM system
6.10 Temperature-Hardened Feature(1800 I&II Compact)

Some boards intended for OptiX OSN 1800 can work properly at ultra-high and ultra-low
temperatures in specific configuration scenariosSome boards can also work properly at a
temperature ranging from -5°C to 65°C regardless of configuration scenarios..
NOTE
The OSN 1800 I&II compact chassis can work properly at ultra-low temperatures only when they are
installed in an outdoor cabinet and an AC heater is available.
Configurations for Temperature in the Range of -40°C (-40°F) to +60°C (+140°F)

With the configurations listed in Table 6-7, an OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis can work properly
at temperature in the range of -40°C (-40°F) to +60°C (+140°F).
Table 6-7 Configurations for temperature in the range of -40°C (-40°F) to +60°C (+140°F)
Configuration Boards Involved Slot
4 x Any 1 x F1SCC + 1 x LQM + 1 x MR1 + Figure 6-55 (A)

(optional) 1 x MR1
4 x ANY + 21 x 1 x F1SCC + 1 x LQM + 1 x TSP + 1 Figure 6-55 (B)

E1/T1 + 2 x STM-1 x DMD1S
42 x E1/T1 + 4 x 1 x F1SCC + 2 x TSP Figure 6-55 (C)

STM-1
Figure 6-55 shows the slot layout. Note that the slot layout cannot be changed; otherwise, the
chassis may malfunction at a temperature of 60°C.

Platform
Figure 6-55 Slot layout for temperature in the range of -40°C (-40°F) to +60°C (+140°F)
Configurations for Temperature in the Range of -40°C (-40°F) to +65°C (+149°F)

With the configurations listed in Table 6-8, an OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis can work properly
at a temperature ranging from -40°C (-40°F) to +65°C (+149°F).
Table 6-8 Configurations for temperature in the range of -40°C (-40°F) to +65°C (+149°F)
4 x GE + 4 x FE 1 x F1SCC + 2 x LDGF + 1 x DMD2 Figure 6-56 (A)

(electrical port)
2 x GE + 2 x FE 1 x F1SCC + 1 x LDGF + 1 x MR1 + Figure 6-56 (B)

(electrical port) (optional) 1 x MR1
21 x E1/T1 + 2 x 1 x F1SCC + 1 x TSP Figure 6-56 (C)

STM-1

Platform
21 x E1/T1 + 2 x 1 x F1SCC + 1 x TSP + 1 x LDGF Figure 6-56 (D)

STM-1 + 2 x GE + 1 x DMD1S
+ 2 x FE (electrical
port)
Figure 6-56 shows the slot layout. Note that the slot layout cannot be changed; otherwise, the
chassis may malfunction at a temperature of 65°C.
Figure 6-56 Slot layout for temperature in the range of -40°C (-40°F) to +65°C (+149°F)
Boards for Temperature in the Range of -5°C (23°F) to +65°C (+149°F)

The following boards intended for OptiX OSN 1800 I and II can work properly at a
temperature in the range of -5°C (23°F) to +65°C (+149°F), regardless of configuration
scenarios.
l Optical transponder boards: ELOM, TNF2LSX and LDX
l All optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards: DFIU, DSFIU, FIU, X40 and EX40
l All optical add and drop multiplexing boards: DMD1, DMD1S, DMD2, DMD2S,
EMR2, EMR4, EMR8, MD8, MD8S, MD8M, MD16M, MR1, MR1S, MR2, MR2S,
MR4, MR4S, MR8, SBM1, SBM2, SBM4, SBM8, MB1, WSMD4 and DWSS9
l All optical amplifier boards: OBU, OPU and BAS1
l System control and communication boards: CTL, TNF1SCC and TNF3SCC
l Spectrum analyzer board: OPM8
l Power supply access board: PIU
l Heat dissipation board: FAN
NOTE
The ELOM, LDX, and TNF2LSX boards can work at a temperature ranging from -5°C (23°F) to +65°C
(+149°F) only when housing industrial-level optical modules.
If the OBU/OPU boards work at temperature of +65°C (+149°F), they must be installed in left-side slots
(physical slots 1 and 3) of an OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis or left-side slots (physical slots 1 and 3 or 3 and 5) of
an OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis.
When the TNF1SCC and TNF3SCC boards work at a temperature ranging from 55°C to 65°C, the TM1/RM1
and TM2/RM2 optical ports are unavailable.

Platform
6.11 Redundancy and Protection

OSN 1800 supports multiple types of network level and equipment level protection, which
ensures reliable data transmission.
6.11.1 Network Level Protection

OptiX OSN equipment provides various types of network-level protection for OTN, packet,
and TDM networks.
Table 6-9 Network level protection (OTN)

Protection Description
Optical Line It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP board
Protection to protect line fibers between adjacent stations by using diverse
routing.
Intra-Board 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OTU/OLP
Protection board to protect the OCh fibers by using diverse routing.
LPT Link-state pass through (LPT) can detect a fault that occurs on a
service access device or an intermediate network, and then instruct
data communication equipment, such as routers, to immediately start a
backup network for communication. LPT ensures normal transmission
of important data.
Client 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP/SCS
Protection board to protect the OTU and the OCh fibers.
ODUk SNCP It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of electrical cross-
connections to protect the line board and the OCh fibers. The cross-
connect granularity is ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, flex) signals.
Tributary SNCP It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of electrical cross-
connections to protect client SDH/SONET or ONT services. OptiX
OSN equipment supports protection of ODUk (k = 0, 1) cross-
connection signals.
SW SNCP It protects the OTU board with convergence and cross-connection

protection function that can configure cross-connection and protection for
individual client-side services.

Platform
Table 6-10 Network level protection (packet)

Tunnel APS Supports MPLS-TP tunnel APS. In the case of tunnel APS, a tunnel is
set to protect the working tunnel. In this case, when the working tunnel
fails, services are switched to the protection tunnel for transmission
and therefore to realize the service protection. OptiX OSN equipment
supports 1:1 tunnel APS protection.
PW APS/PW FPS Supports MPLS-TP PW APS/PW FPS.

PW APS/PW FPS is a function that protects PWs. When the working
PW is faulty, PW APS/PW FPS switches services to a preconfigured
protection PW.
MC-PW APS Multi-chassis pseudo wire automatic protection switching (MC-PW

APS) supports configuration of the working and protection PWs on
different devices to implement cross-device PW protection.
LAG The LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that
is at a higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent
equipment. Therefore, link aggregation is not related to the
architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port
aggregation because each link corresponds to a port on an Ethernet.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is a protocol for Ethernet

link protection. This protocol is running in an Ethernet ring and
protects links that carry Ethernet services on the ring, improving the
availability of Ethernet services.
MC-LAG Multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG) enables inter-device

link aggregation and provides dual-homing protection for Ethernet
services.
LPT With LPT enabled, service protection can be provided regardless of

whether faults occur on a service access node, a service network, or
both on a service access node and on a service network.
MRPS MPLS-TP ring protection switching (MRPS) protects packet services

on ring networks. When the working channel in the forward direction
is faulty, MRPS switches services on the channel to the protection
channel in the reverse direction.
LMSP The packet-based linear MSP scheme is applicable to a point-to-point

physical network, providing MS-layer protection for the service
between two points.
Packet SNCP Packet SNCP protection is configured on universal line boards, and
ODUk SNCP protection is configured on the peer NE. When detecting
a fault, a universal line board or line board triggers protection
switching to protect packet services.

Platform
Table 6-11 Network Level Protection (EoS)

LAG The LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link at a
higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment
and is independent of the network topology. Link aggregation is also
called port aggregation because each link corresponds to one port in
Ethernet transmission.
LCAS The LCAS function can be used to dynamically adjust the bandwidth
and protect virtual concatenation, whereby making the network more
robust and flexible.
LPT As a protection scheme based on links, LPT enables the pass-through

of the states of the point-to-point link and point-to-multipoint link. In
this manner, LPT realizes the network level protection for the
transmission of point-to-point private line services and for the
transmission of the point-to-multipoint convergence services.
STP/RSTP The STP and RSTP are used in the loop network. The two protocols
realize routing redundancy by adopting certain algorithms and break
the loop network into a loop-free tree network, preventing packets
from increasing and cycling in an endless manner in the loop network.
In this manner, the application of the two protocols can prevent the
occurrence of the broadcast storm and MAC address table flapping.
The RSTP is an optimized version of the STP and implements all the
functions of the STP. With the application of the RSTP, the network
convergence is quicker. In addition, in the case of a link failure, the
blocked ports can be enabled to restore services quickly.
DLAG The Distributed Link Aggregation Group (DLAG) is a protection

group that aggregates two corresponding ports on two identical boards.
The DLAG provides 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
Table 6-12 Network Level Protection (SDH)

LMSP The Linear Multiplex Section Protection (LMSP) scheme is applicable

to a point-to-point physical network, providing MS-layer protection
for the service between two points. OptiX OSN equipment supports
1+1 and 1:N LMSP.
RMSP The Ring Multiplex Section Protection (RMSP) scheme provides MS-
level protection for services between nodes on a ring network. OptiX
OSN equipment supports two-fiber bidirectional MSP.
SNCP The SNCP scheme protects the service that is across subnets. The
SNCP is based on the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. The
subnet can be a chain, a ring, or a more complex network.

Platform
TPS Tributary protection switching (TPS) enhances service reliability in a

TPS protection group. When TPS detects a faulty working service
board, it rapidly switches services to the protection service board.
Table 6-13 Network Level Protection (EoW) of the OSN 1800 I&II Compact
Protection Type Application Scenario
ERPS This protection type is based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism

and uses the ring network automatic protection switching (R-APS)
protocol to achieve quick protection switching in the Ethernet ring
network.
LAG In this protection mode, multiple links between two nodes are
bundled together to get higher bandwidth and improve link reliability.
MSTP In the case of the Ethernet user network where loops exist, the MSTP
generates the tree topology according to VLAN IDs of the Ethernet
packets. Therefore, the broadcast storm is avoided and the network
traffic is balanced according to the VLAN IDs of the Ethernet
packets.
VLAN SNCP Uses the dual-fed selective receiving function of a L2 module to

protection protect Ethernet services. The protection granularity is the service
with VLAN.
STP and RSTP When the STP or RSTP is running, it modifies the logical network
topology to avoid a broadcast storm. The RSTP can achieve link
protection by restructuring the network topology.
Service-based LPT Applies to the service access points at both ends of a service network.
It tracks the state of a link that carries important services so that the
service access points promptly respond to the link state changes. If a
fault occurs on the link that carries important services, the LPT
function ensures that the services are promptly switched to the
backup network.
6.11.2 Equipment-Level Protection

The OptiX OSN equipment provides equipment-level protection, including UXCM 1+1
redundancy, secondary power supply module on the board, power redundancy, and fan
redundancy.

Platform
Table 6-14 Equipment-level protection

Protection Equipment Description Legend
supported
l OptiX OSN OptiX OSN The UXCM board integrates l OptiX OSN 1800 V:
1800 V: 1800 V with a system control and
UXCM 1+1 OptiX OSN communication (SCC), a cross-
redundancy 1800 II connect (XCS) unit, and a
l OptiX OSN Enhanced timing unit. UXCM 1+1
1800 II redundancy implements 1+1
Enhanced: protection for the SCC unit, l OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced:
UXCL 1+1 cross-connect unit, and timing
redundancy unit at the same time. The
active and standby cross-
connect units connect to service
board slots through the
backplane bus to protect cross-
connection services.
Switching is triggered by any of
the following conditions:
l Execution of a manual
switching command
l Hardware fault on the clock
or power supply unit
l Removal of or cold reset on
the cross-connect board
l Cold/Warm reset on the
system control board in the
binding mode
l Fault on the cross-connect
bus
NOTE
The SCC switching and XCS
switching are independent from
each other. By default, they are
associated. In other words, an SCC
switching triggers an XCS
switching, and an XCS switching
also triggers an SCC switching.
Secondary power l OptiX OSN l Automatic shutdown in case -

supply module on 1800 I/II of DC power input
the board Compact overvoltage or undervoltage
l OptiX OSN l Automatic shutdown in case
1800 V of output overcurrent
l Automatic shutdown in case
of excessively high internal
temperature

Platform

supported
Power redundancy l OptiX OSN Two PIU/APIU boards adopt l DC power supplies in backup
1800 I/II the hot backup mode to supply mode of OptiX OSN 1800 V:
Compact power for the system. When one
l OptiX OSN of the PIU/APIU board
1800 V becomes faulty, the subrack can
still function properly.
l OptiX OSN
1800 II
Enhanced
l AC power supplies in backup

mode of OptiX OSN 1800 V:
l DC power supplies in backup

mode of OptiX OSN 1800 II
Compact:

Compact:

mode of OptiX OSN 1800 I
Compact:
l DC power supplies in backup

Enhanced:

Platform

supported
Fan redundancy l OptiX OSN The equipment consists of -

1800 I/II several fans for heat dissipation.
Compact When any one of the fans fails,
l OptiX OSN other fans are not affected, and
1800 V the system can run for 96 hours
at the temperature of –5°C to
l OptiX OSN 40°C.
1800 II
Enhanced l The FAN board on the
OptiX OSN 1800 I Compact
l OptiX OSN is equipped with three fans.
1800 I
Enhanced l The FAN board on the
OptiX OSN 1800 II
Compact is equipped with
six fans.
l The FAN board on the
OptiX OSN 1800 V is
equipped with four fans.
OptiX OSN 1800 II
Enhanced is equipped with
three fans.
OptiX OSN 1800 I
Enhanced is equipped with
three fans.
6.12 Automatic Optical Power Management

With the functions, users can better monitor and maintain OSN 1800 NEs on a network.
Table 6-15 Automatic optical power management functions

Functio Description
n
AGC The automatic gain control (AGC) function ensures that channel gain is not
affected when wavelengths are added or dropped or when there is optical power
fluctuation in the WDM system. This function guarantees normal service
running in the WDM system.

Platform
Functio Description
n
ALS l After the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function is enabled on an OTU or
an OTN tributary board, the board disables the laser in the transmit direction
when it receives no optical signals from the upstream board and re-enables
the laser after it receives optical signals. The ALS function prevents human
injuries and prolongs the life of a laser by decreasing the working time of
the laser.
l ALS on SDH board: When the fiber between two optical interfaces
disconnects, an R_LOS alarm is reported by the local optical interface. If
the alarm persists for 500 ms, the corresponding laser on the transmit port at
the local end is automatically shut down. After the fiber connection
recovers, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse
generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the
opposite end is turned on and then continuously launches laser beams. After
receiving the laser beam launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local
end is also turned on. As a result, the communication between the two
interfaces recovers and the R_LOS alarm is cleared.
NOTE
The OTU board client-side ALS is irrelevant from the ALS defined in ITU-T G.664.
IPA OAs have high output optical power. If the fiber connected to an OA breaks, the
OA will still emit light if the laser on the OA is not shut down. The intense
light will cause injury to maintenance personnel during fiber maintenance. To
prevent the light from causing bodily injury, the product provides the IPA
function to shut down the laser on the affected OA as early as possible when a
fiber breaks
Intellige The OTU board of the product provides the intelligent fiber (IF) function. With
nt Fiber the IF function, the OTU board can automatically insert maintenance code
(only for streams to the client-side optical ports on the downstream board in the case of
OptiX an input fault on the client or WDM side of the upstream board. Then the fault
OSN information can transfer to the client side of the downstream board.
1800
I/II)
OPA The optical power adjust (OPA) function is used during the creation of an
optical service. Users can specify the power adjustment mode on the NMS
when configuring optical cross-connections. If the auto mode is selected during
deployment, the OPA function adjusts the attenuation of each EVOA on cross-
connect paths to make services available. In practical applications, however, the
OPA function should be used together with manual or tool adjustment to ensure
that the input optical power of optical amplifier (OA) and OTU boards meets
the anticipated system requirements.
6.12.1 AGC
The automatic gain control (AGC) function ensures that channel gain is not affected by
wavelength adding or dropping or optical power fluctuation of the WDM system, and
therefore guarantees normal service running in the WDM system.

Platform
The AGC function locks the gain of a single channel using forward and backward feedback
control loops. When an optical amplifier (OA) works in gain locking mode and the input
optical power fluctuates, the AGC function automatically starts without requiring
configuration on the NMS. In this manner, the output optical power of the OA changes
according to the input optical power and channel gain remains the same. Figure 6-57 shows
how the AGC function works during optical power fluctuation.
Figure 6-57 AGC function during optical power fluctuation
The AGC function can also ensure that the gain of existing channels remains the same during
wavelength adding or dropping, as shown in Figure 6-58.
Figure 6-58 AGC function during wavelength adding or dropping

Platform
6.12.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown (1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I

Enhanced)
When a client-side or WDM-side fault occurs during the transmission of non-OTN services,
the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function, if being enabled, shuts down the laser(s) on the
associated transmit ports. It turns on the laser(s) on the transmit port(s) again when the fault
has been eliminated. With ALS being enabled, fault information about the WDM equipment
can be transmitted to client equipment, allowing the client equipment to know the link status.
NOTE
ALS supported by equipment is different from ITU-T G.664-compliant ALS. The latter applies to an
SDH system and shuts down a line-side laser upon a fiber cut, protecting maintenance personnel from
laser radiation.
ALS Application Scenarios
Table 6-16 ALS application scenarios

Applicable Board Fault Auxiliary ALS Application
Transmission Trigger Condition Scenario Example
l 1800 V: Forward FW_Defect, l ALS

TOA, LQM2, FW_OPUk_CSF, Implementation
LDX, ELOM, FW_ODUk_SD upon a Client-
TQX, TDX, Side Fault
LSC, C12X5, Backward BW_Client_R_LOS, During
C15Xn, LSCM, BW_WDM_Defect Interconnection
LSCG, LTXM, Between
LTX, TSC, TTA, Tributary
LDCA Boards, Line
l 1800 II Boards, or OTU
Enhanced: Boards
TOA, LQM2, l ALS
LDX, ELOM, Implementation
LSC, C12X5, upon a WDM-
C15Xn, LSCM, Side Fault
LSCG, LTXM, During
LTX, TTA, Interconnection
LDCA Between
l 1800 I Enhanced: Tributary
A1UXCL(G12A) Boards, Line
Boards, or OTU
Boards
NOTE
l OPUk_CSF can serve as an ALS trigger condition only when the auxiliary ALS trigger condition
FW_OPUk_CSF is enabled.
l Line boards and OTU boards do not support ALS on the WDM side. The WDM-side lasers on these
boards are turned on by default.
l Bidirectional fault transmission is supported when both forward and backward auxiliary ALS trigger
conditions are enabled.
l The C12X5, C15Xn board does not support the FW_OPUk_CSF auxiliary ALS trigger condition.

Platform
ALS Implementation upon a Client-Side Fault During Interconnection Between

Tributary Boards, Line Boards, or OTU Boards
ALS is enabled by default for client-side optical ports on tributary boards. As illustrated in
Figure 6-59, when ALS is enabled (The auxiliary ALS trigger condition FW_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF and FW_ODUk_SD are enabled for client-side port A, and the auxiliary
ALS trigger condition BW_Client_R_LOS is enabled for client-side port D):
1. Client-side port E in the upstream direction detects an R_LOS alarm.
2. ALS is triggered for port A in the downstream direction, and the laser on port A is shut
down.
3. ALS is triggered for port D in the transmit direction, and the laser on port D is shut
down.
Figure 6-59 ALS implementation upon a client-side fault during interconnection between
tributary boards, line boards, or OTU boards
ALS Implementation upon a WDM-Side Fault During Interconnection Between

Tributary Boards, Line Boards, or OTU Boards
As illustrated in Figure 6-60, when ALS is enabled (The auxiliary ALS trigger condition
FW_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF and FW_ODUk_SD are enabled for client-side ports A, and the
auxiliary ALS trigger condition BW_WDM_Defect is enabled for client-side ports D):
1. WDM-side port B in the upstream direction detects a fault.
2. ALS is triggered for ports A, and the lasers on ports A are shut down.
3. Port B sends a lower order ODUk_PM_BDI alarm signal to port C.
4. ALS is triggered for ports D, and the lasers on ports D are shut down.

Platform
Figure 6-60 ALS implementation upon a WDM-side fault during interconnection between
tributary boards, line boards, or OTU boards
6.12.3 Automatic Laser Shutdown (1800 I&II Compact)

When a client-side or WDM-side fault occurs during the transmission of non-OTN services,
the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function, if being enabled, shuts down the lasers on the
associated transmit ports. It turns on the lasers on the transmit ports again when the fault has
been eliminated. With ALS being enabled, fault information about the WDM equipment can
be transmitted to client equipment.
NOTE
The ALS function provided by wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) equipment is different from
the ALS defined in ITU-T G.664. The latter applies to SDH systems to turn off line-side lasers on SDH
boards upon a fiber cut, protecting maintenance personnel against laser radiation.
ALS Application Scenario
Table 6-17 ALS applications
Board Supporting ALS Application Auxiliary ALS Example

ALS Scenario Trigger Condition
F1LDE, F1LOE, Forward None Scenario 1: OTU

F1LQG, F1LQM2, board
F1FC16Q interconnection
(ALS supported
only on the client
side)
F1LSX, F2LSX, Forward FW_Defect, Scenario 2

F1LDX, F1LDGF, FW_OPUk_CSF, (bidirectional fault
F1LDGF2, FW_ODUk_SD transmission):
F2LDGF2, F1LQM, OTU board

Platform
Board Supporting ALS Application Auxiliary ALS Example

ALS Scenario Trigger Condition
F2ELOM, F2LQM, Backward BW_Client_R_LOS, interconnection

F2LQM2, BW_WDM_Defect (ALS supported
F1ELQM, F1CP6, only on the client
F1CE6, F2CP6, side)
F1CP8, F2LDX,
F1C12X5,
F1LSCM, F1LSCG,
F1LSC, F1LTXM,
LTX, F1C15Xn,
LDCA
F1LWX2 Forward None Scenario 3: LWX2

board
NOTE
For FW_OPUk_CSF:
l When FW_OPUk_CSF is specified as an auxiliary ALS trigger condition, a WDM-side OPUk_CSF
fault in the forward direction serves as an ALS trigger condition.
l Boards that support the FW_OPUk_CSF auxiliary ALS trigger condition includes
F2ELOM(STND), F2LSX(STND), F2LQM(STND), F2LQM2(STND), F1LDX(STND), F2LDX,
F1LSCM, F1LSCG, F1LSC, F1LTXM, LTX, F2LDGF2(STND) and LDCA.
l If protection is configured at any station on an E2E trail and FW_OPUk_CSF is set as the ALS
trigger condition, the ALS hold-off time must be set to 100 ms or longer; otherwise, the protection
switching time may be longer than 50 ms.
Scenario 1: OTU board interconnection (ALS supported only on the client side)
For OTU boards, client-side lasers default to the OFF state while WDM-side lasers default to
the ON state. By default, the ALS function is disabled for the ports where the default service
type is OTN and enabled for other ports.
As shown in Figure 6-61 and Figure 6-62, when ALS is enabled:
l If a fault occurs on the client side of an upstream board, the laser at the corresponding
client-side optical port on the downstream board is disabled.
Figure 6-61 Scenario 1: ALS implementation upon a client-side fault in an OTU board
interconnection scenario

Platform
l If a fault occurs on the WDM side of a board, the lasers at all client-side optical ports on
the board are disabled.
Figure 6-62 Scenario 1: ALS implementation upon a WDM-side fault in an OTU board
NOTE
l When the TIM detection is enabled, the OTUk_TIM and ODUk_PM_TIM alarms trigger the ALS
function.
l The ODUk_LOFLOM alarms trigger the ALS function only for F2ELOM, F2LDGF2, F2LQM and
F2LQM2 boards.
l The R_LOS alarms trigger the ALS function only for F1LOE, F1LQG, F1LQPL, F1LQPU, F1LSPL
and F1LSPU boards.
Scenario 2 (bidirectional fault transmission): OTU board interconnection (ALS

supported only on the client side)
For OTU boards, client-side lasers default to the OFF state while WDM-side lasers default to
the ON state. By default, the ALS function is disabled for the ports where the default service
type is OTN and enabled for other ports.
As shown in Figure 6-63, when ALS is enabled:
l If the FW_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF and FW_ODUk_SD auxiliary ALS trigger

conditions are enabled for port A and R_LOS is detected on upstream port E, ALS is
triggered for client-side port A on the downstream board to turn off the laser on port A.
NOTE
When only FW_Defect is enabled, its usage is similar to that in Scenario 1: OTU board
interconnection (ALS supported only on the client side) in which auxiliary ALS trigger
conditions are not supported.
l If the BW_Client_R_LOS auxiliary ALS trigger condition is also enabled for port D,
ALS is triggered for port D to turn off the laser on port D.

Platform
Figure 6-63 Scenario 2: ALS implementation upon a client-side fault in an OTU board
As shown in Figure 6-64, when ALS is enabled:

l If the FW_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF and FW_ODUk_SD auxiliary ALS trigger
conditions are enabled for port A and a fault is detected on WDM-side port B, ALS is
triggered for client-side port A on the downstream board to turn off the laser on port A.
l If the BW_WDM_Defect auxiliary ALS trigger condition is also enabled for port D, a
lower order (LO) ODUk_PM_BDI alarm signal is inserted to port C, triggering ALS for
port D and subsequently causing the laser on port D to be turned off.
Figure 6-64 Scenario 2: ALS implementation upon a WDM-side fault in an OTU board
NOTE
l When the TIM detection is enabled, the OTUk_TIM and ODUk_PM_TIM alarms trigger the ALS
function.
l The ODUk_LOFLOM alarms trigger the ALS function only for F2ELOM, F2LDGF2, F2LQM and
F2LQM2 boards.
l OPUk_CSF can serve as an ALS trigger condition only when the FW_OPUk_CSF auxiliary ALS
trigger condition is enabled.

Platform
Scenario 3: LWX2 board

For the LWX2 board, after the ALS function is enabled, a WDM-side fault on the board will
cause the lasers on the corresponding client-side optical ports on the board to be turned off.
Figure 6-65 ALS function application of the LWX2 board
6.12.4 Intelligent Power Adjustment

OAs have high output optical power. If the fiber connected to an OA breaks, the OA will still
emit light if the laser on the OA is not shut down. The intense light will cause injury to
maintenance personnel during fiber maintenance. To prevent the light from causing bodily
injury, the product provides the IPA function to shut down the laser on the affected OA as
early as possible when a fiber breaks.
If OA boards with maximum output optical power of over 21.3 dBm are configured in a
system, the IPA function must be configured; otherwise, safety cannot be ensured and injuries
may result.
l Without IPA: As shown in Figure 6-66, the OAs still emit light during fiber maintenance
if the IPA function is not configured. The laser radiation from the exposed fiber will
cause injury to the human body.

Platform
Figure 6-66 Scenario without IPA configured
l With IPA: As shown in Figure 6-67, lasers on the OAs are shut down during fiber
maintenance if the IPA function is configured and enabled. No laser radiation comes
from the exposed fiber, and therefore human safety is ensured.
Figure 6-67 Scenario with IPA configured
6.12.5 Intelligent Fiber

OTU boards on the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment provide the intelligent fiber (IF) function.
With the IF function, an OTU board can automatically insert maintenance code streams to the
client-side optical ports on the downstream board in case of an input fault on the client or
WDM side of the upstream board. In this manner, the fault information can be transferred to
the client side of the downstream board.
6.12.6 OPA
The optical power adjust (OPA) function is used during the creation of an optical service.

Platform
Users can specify the power adjustment mode on the NMS when configuring optical cross-
connections. If the auto mode is selected during deployment, the OPA function adjusts the
attenuation of each EVOA on cross-connect paths to make services available. In practical
applications, however, the OPA function should be used together with manual or tool
adjustment to ensure that the input optical power of optical amplifier (OA) and OTU boards
meets the anticipated system requirements.
Overview
For an ROADM site as shown in Figure 6-68, an OPA adjustment area includes power
adjustment points and power reference points. Each OPA adjustment area can have one or
multiple power adjustment points. The OPA function automatically adjusts the attenuation of
each EVOA inside each OPA adjustment area based on the optical power at the output and
input power reference points.
l Power reference point: the rated input/output power of the OA board, and the input
power threshold and output power of the OTU board.
l Power adjustment point: EVOA-equipped boards inside an OPA adjustment area,
including ROADM boards, OA boards.
l OPA adjustment area: the area made up of power adjustment and reference points.
NOTE
The ROADM board must be configured in the OPA function.

For an extended intra-board 1+1 protection scenario, you are advised to set OPA Mode to Manual.
The OPA function does not adjust the attenuation of an EVOA that is out of the OPA
adjustment area. Instead users have to manually adjust the attenuation of the EVOA, if
required. For example, the VA1 board in Figure 6-68 is a such EVOA.
Figure 6-68 Schematic diagram of the OPA function

Platform
Implementation Principle
The implementation principles of the OPA function are similar in different application
scenarios. The following uses the "OA > DWSS9 > DWSS9 > OA" application scenario as an
example to describe the implementation principle.
Figure 6-69 Schematic diagram of the OPA function
The optical power is adjusted based on the following formula: EVOA1 + EVOA2 + EVOA3
= Pout - Pin - Wadd - Wdrop. The attenuation computed using the formula is allocated to
three adjustment points by average. The system control board issues a command to the
ROADM and OA boards to change the attenuation of the built-in EVOA and therefore adjust
the optical power. If the power adjustment fails, an OPA_FAIL_INDI alarm will be reported.
NOTE
l If the attenuation of the OA board has never been adjusted, the attenuation of both the ROADM and
OA boards will be adjusted. If the attenuation of the OA board has been adjusted, only the
attenuation of the ROADM board will be adjusted.
l The optical-layer boards must reside on the same NE.
l The formula should contain the insertion loss of all the boards in the power adjustment areas.
Multi-Section Power Adjustment by OPA

In a multi-section application, the OPA function divides the optical cross-connect path on an
NE into multiple OPA adjustment areas along the signal flow on the line. Each OPA
adjustment area starts from an output power reference point and terminates at an input power
reference point.
For example, on the optical cross-connect path shown in Figure 6-70, the OPA function
performs power adjustment for the first section prior to the second section. If the adjustment
for the first section fails, it terminates the power adjustment and will not perform power
adjustment for the second section.

Platform
Figure 6-70 Multi-section power adjustment by OPA
Typical Application Scenarios
Table 6-18 Typical application scenarios of OPA

Add Direction Drop Direction Pass-through Direction
l OTU>EX40/ l OA>WSMD4/DWSS9/ l OA>WSMD4>WSMD4

X40>WSMD4/DWSS9/ WSMD9XF>EX40/ >OA
WSMD9XF>OA X40>OTU l OA>DWSS9>DWSS9>
l OTU>EMRX/ l OA>WSMD4/DWSS9/ OA
MRX>WSMD4/ WSMD9XF>EMRX/ l OA>WSMD9XF>WSM
DWSS9/ MRX>OTU D9XF>OA
WSMD9XF>OA
The automatic adjustment is The automatic adjustment is The automatic adjustment is

based on the following based on the following based on the following
formula: Total attenuation to formula: Total attenuation to formula: Total attenuation to
be adjusted = Output optical be adjusted = Nominal be adjusted = Nominal
power of the OTU board - output optical power of the output optical power of the
Insertion loss of EX40/X40 OA board - Wavelength - OA board - Wavelength-
(EMRX/MRX) - drop insertion loss of the drop insertion loss of the
Wavelength-add insertion ROADM board - Insertion ROADM board -
loss of the ROADM board - loss of EX40/X40 (EMRX/ Wavelength-add insertion
Nominal input optical power MRX) - Average value of loss of the ROADM board -
of the OA board the upper and lower input Nominal input optical power
optical power thresholds of of the OA board
the OTU board
6.13 Synchronization
When interconnecting with OTN series products, the OSN 1800 products support physical-
layer clock, IEEE 1588v2 clock, and synchronous Ethernet clock to achieve end-to-end clock
transmission.

Platform
6.13.1 Why Does the WDM/OTN Network Need Clock

Synchronization?
To provide a synchronous clock source for mobile base stations, the entire WDM/OTN
transport network must support clock synchronization.
Mobile Backhaul Network Requires the WDM/OTN Network to Implement

Clock Synchronization
In a mobile backhaul network, clock synchronization must be strictly implemented between
base stations. Currently, there are multiple clock synchronization solutions in the industry,
such as GPS and IEEE 1588v2.
l Traditional GPS clock synchronization:
– High cost: Each base station must be configured with a GPS system.
– High failure rate: Each base station is configured with only one satellite card
(receiving GPS signals), which is not protected.
– Poor maintainability: If the GPS fails, you must replace the hardware onsite, and
remote maintenance cannot be performed.
l IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization:
– Low cost: Only two GPS devices need to be configured to implement clock
synchronization on the entire network. The GPS system is not required for each
base station.
– High reliability: End-to-end clock protection can be configured.
– High maintainability: There is no construction restriction, deployment is simple,
and unified management is implemented using the NMS.
However, IEEE 1588v2 requires that all devices on a network support the IEEE 1588v2
protocol. Otherwise, the clock performance may not meet the high-precision clock
requirements of a wireless network if only simple transparent transmission of time is
implemented.
The WDM/OTN network itself does not need to implement clock synchronization. To provide
clock signals for a PTN/SDH network, the WDM/OTN network needs to obtain the active and
standby clock sources from the building integrated timing supply (BITS) system to implement
clock synchronization on the entire network.
The PTN/SDH network needs only to use the clock source of the WDM/OTN network to
implement clock synchronization, and then provides the clock source for base stations to
achieve synchronization.
SDH Modernization Requires the WDM/OTN Network to Implement Clock

Synchronization
With the advent of 4K video, LTE/LTE-A, and cloud era, the demand for high bandwidth is
strong. The network bandwidth of existing SDH devices is low and cannot satisfy the
development requirements of new services. In addition, SDH devices are old and have high
power consumption and OPEX. Therefore, carriers are in urgent need of reconstructing
networks to improve customer experience.
Huawei's MS-OTN solution inherits all SDH capabilities and implements unified transmission
of TDM/OTN/PKT services. It also features ultra-high bandwidth, simplified O&M, and
future-oriented smooth evolution. It is the best solution for SDH modernization.

Platform
The SDH network is a synchronous network. Therefore, when a WDM/OTN network is used
to replace the SDH network, SDH services are directly processed as a part of the SDH
network. Therefore, the WDM/OTN network must support clock synchronization.
Architecture of a WDM/OTN Clock Synchronous Network

A complete clock synchronous network consists of clock sources, transmission network, and
base stations. Huawei WDM/OTN devices are located in the transmission network.
l Clock source: Generally, master and slave clock/time source devices are configured on a
clock synchronous network. The clock sources are configured with different clock
quality and priorities to implement backup.
l Transmission network: Common topologies of a transmission network are ring, tree,
chain, and mesh. Ring topologies are recommended for transmission networks because a
synchronous network requires network protection. At the edge of the network, chain
topologies can be used.
l Base station: A radio transceiver station transmits information between a Node B and a
mobile terminal through a mobile communication center.
Figure 6-71 Architecture of the clock synchronous network
6.13.2 Clock Synchronization Requirements of Service Networks

Clock synchronization includes both frequency synchronization and phase synchronization.
Frequency synchronization is the basis of phase synchronization. That is, the frequencies of
devices with synchronized phases are also synchronized.
l Frequency Synchronization: Frequency synchronization means that different signals
have the same number of pulses within the same time interval, so that all devices on the
communication network run at the same rate.

Platform
l Phase Synchronization: Phase synchronization means that not only signals have the same
number of pulses within the same time interval, but also the start time and end time of
each pulse are the same.
Figure 6-72 Frequency synchronization and Phase Synchronization
With the development of wireless networks such as LTE TDD and LTE FDD, service
networks, especially radio access networks (RANs), have strict requirements on clock
synchronization.
Table 6-19 Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks
Wireless Required Required Recommended Synchronization Mode

Access Frequency Phase
Mode Synchroniz Synchron
ation ization
Precision Precision
GSM 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clocks

synchroniz
ation is not
required.
WCDMA 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clocks

synchroniz
ation is not
required.
TD-SCDMA 0.05 ppm ±1.5 µs Physical clocks+IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

8275.1/G.8273.2
CDMA2000 0.05 ppm ±3 µs Physical clocks+IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

8275.1/G.8273.2
WiMax FDD 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clocks

synchroniz
ation is not
required.

Platform
Wireless Required Required Recommended Synchronization Mode

Access Frequency Phase
Mode Synchroniz Synchron
ation ization
Precision Precision
WiMax TDD 0.011 ppm/ ±1 µs Physical clocks+IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

3.5G, 7 8275.1/G.8273.2
carrier wave
LTE FDD 0.05 ppm Phase Physical clocks

synchroniz
ation is not
required.
LTE TDD 0.05 ppm ±1.5 µs Physical clocks+IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

8275.1/G.8273.2
In addition to the communication network, billing systems and network management systems
also require phase synchronization. Table 6-20 lists the requirements of some common
systems on phase synchronization.
Table 6-20 Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems

System Required Phase Recommended
Synchronization Synchronization Mode
Precision
Billing system 500 ms IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

8275.1/G.8273.2
Communication network 500 ms IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

management system 8275.1/G.8273.2
Signaling system No.7 1 ms IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

8275.1/G.8273.2
Positioning system 1 µs (equivalent to a IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.

positioning precision of 300 8275.1/G.8273.2
m)
6.13.3 Frequency Synchronization Solutions

This topic describes the implementation modes and typical application scenarios of frequency
synchronization.
Solution Comparison
WDM devices support the following frequency synchronization solutions. You are advised to
use the same solution on an entire WDM/OTN network.

Platform
l (Recommended) Physical clocks: Devices directly restore clock frequency signals from
physical signals. This mode requires the device hardware to support clock extraction. In
other words, the frequency can be synchronized on the entire network only when all
nodes on the network support physical clocks.
l IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2: Frequency synchronization is implemented
based on the timestamp information of Sync messages. This mode involves frequency
prediction and correction, whose synchronization precision is lower than physical clocks.
In addition, the synchronization is implemented hop by hop, which requires that each
node in the synchronization network must support the IEEE 1588v2/ITU-T G.8275.1/G.
8273.2 function.
Table 6-21 frequency synchronization

Solution Description
Physical clock l The technology is mature and easy to implement.

l The performance is stable and reliable, and is not affected by
network load changes.
l Maintainability is good.
IEEE 1588v2 l The synchronization precision reaches the sub-microsecond level,

and the application scope is wide.
l Reliability is high, and cost is low.
l Maintainability is good.
ITU-T G.8275.1 l The advantages of IEEE 1588v2 are inherited.

l The scenario applies only to the telecommunications field.
l A new BMCA algorithm is defined to trace the shortest path and
prevent the clock from being traced reversely. The performance is
high.
ITU-T G.8273.2 l The advantages of G.8275.1 are inherited.

l The time synchronization performance of a single device is defined
systematically, including time deviation, noise margin, noise
transfer.
Frequency Source Input/Output

The WDM/OTN device is interconnected with the BITS or PTN device in the following ways
to implement frequency source input/output:
l (Recommended) 2M external clock interface: When the frequency source needs to be
obtained from the BITS or the clocks of the master and slave subracks need to be
cascaded, the frequency source can be obtained through the 2M external clock port.
l Ethernet interface: When the WDM/OTN device is interconnected with a PTN device, an
SDH device, or a router, you are advised to use an Ethernet interface to obtain the
frequency source.

Platform
Internal Frequency Synchronization of the WDM/OTN Network

l (Recommended) OSC mode: The optical supervisory channel (OSC) board is used to
transmit frequency information.
l ESC mode: The OTU board, tributary/line board, or packet service board is used to
transmit frequency information.
Typical Scenario
The following figure uses physical clocks as an example to describe the typical scenario of
frequency synchronization. In this scenario, all devices on the WDM/OTN network must
support physical clocks.
Figure 6-73 Networking of a typical scenario
6.13.4 Phase Synchronization Solutions

This topic describes the implementation methods and typical application scenarios of phase
synchronization.
Solution Comparison
WDM devices support the following phase synchronization solutions. You are advised to use
the same solution on an entire WDM/OTN network.
Frequency synchronization is the basis of phase synchronization. That is, the frequencies of
devices with synchronized phases are also synchronized.
Table 6-22 phase synchronization
(Recommended) Physical The synchronization precision is high, and the bandwidth

clock frequency usage is low.
synchronization+IEEE
1588v2 phase
synchronization

Platform
IEEE 1588v2 frequency This scenario features easy deployment and simple O&M.
and phase synchronization Compared with typical scenario (Physical clock frequency
synchronization+IEEE 1588v2 phase synchronization), the
scenario provides lower synchronization precision but
requires higher bandwidth usage.
Physical clock frequency The scenario applies only to the telecommunication field.
synchronization+ITU-T G. Compared with typical scenario (Physical clock frequency
8275.1/G.8273.2 phase synchronization+IEEE 1588v2 phase synchronization) Using
synchronization the BMCA algorithm, the Grandmaster that has the shortest
path can be traces, therefore providing higher synchronization
precision and preventing reverse tracing.
ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 The BMCA algorithm is used to prevent reverse tracing.

frequency and phase
synchronization
Phase Source Input/Output

The WDM/OTN device is interconnected with the BITS or PTN device in the following ways
to implement phase source input/output:
l (Recommended) 1PPS+TOD external time interface: When the phase source needs to be
obtained from the BITS or the master and slave time subracks need to be cascaded, the
1PPS+TOD external time port can be used to obtain the phase source.
l Ethernet interface: When the WDM/OTN device is interconnected with a PTN device, an
SDH device, or a router, you are advised to use an Ethernet interface to obtain the phase
source.
Internal Phase Synchronization of the WDM/OTN Network

l (Recommended) OSC mode: The optical supervisory channel (OSC) board is used to
transmit phase information.
l ESC mode: The OTU board, tributary/line board, or packet service board is used to
transmit phase information.
Typical Scenario
The following figure uses physical clocks + IEEE 1588v2 as an example to describe the
typical scenario of phase synchronization. In this scenario, all devices on the WDM/OTN
network must support IEEE 1588v2.

Platform
Figure 6-74 Networking of a typical scenario
6.13.5 E2E WDM/OTN Clock Solution

The following figure shows an example of the end-to-end (E2E) clock solution from the
access layer to the backbone layer.
Figure 6-75 E2E clock networking diagram
6.13.6 Introduction of Physical Clocks (OTN & Packet & SDH)

WDM/OTN devices support physical-layer clocks to implement frequency synchronization.
To implement phase synchronization, physical clocks must work with other features.
Description
In physical clock synchronization mode, WDM devices restore frequency signals from
physical signals such as Ethernet links, packet links, and SDH links to achieve frequency
synchronization of the upstream and downstream devices. Physical clocks require the device

Platform
hardware to support clock extraction. Therefore, each node must support physical-layer clocks
to achieve frequency synchronization on the entire network.
Physical clocks can be used in the following scenarios:
l Physical clock (OTN): Supports synchronous Ethernet processing and synchronous
Ethernet transparent transmission to implement frequency synchronization.
– Synchronous Ethernet processing: The system clock performs frequency
synchronization for upstream NEs one by one. Synchronous Ethernet processing
can be used with IEEE 1588v2 to implement phase synchronization.
– Synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission: It only transmits the clock to the
destination node to guarantee clock quality. Internal free-run on the NE is
implemented, and frequency is not synchronized with the upstream NE.
Synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission cannot work with IEEE 1588v2 to
implement phase synchronization.
l Physical clock (packet): On a packet network, packet boards can be used to implement
frequency synchronization.
l Physical clock (SDH): In an SDH modernization scenario where the SDH network must
be synchronized, SDH boards can be used to implement frequency synchronization and
provide synchronization for base stations.
Figure 6-76 Physical clock scenarios
For more detail information, see the following link.

Platform
l Carrier users: WDM&OTN Clock Feature Guide.

l Enterprise users: WDM&OTN Clock Feature Guide.
6.13.7 Introduction of IEEE 1588v2 (OTN & Packet)

WDM/OTN devices support IEEE 1588v2 to implement frequency and phase
synchronization.
Description
Traditional GPS signals can satisfy time synchronization requirements but feature high
installation and maintenance costs. In addition, GPS signals depend on satellites, which may
bring security risks. As a remedy, the IEEE organization defines the IEEE 1588v2 standard,
which enables precise clock synchronization between distributed and standalone devices in
measurement and control systems through the precision time protocol (PTP). The phase
synchronization precision reaches nanosecond level.
Different from physical clocks that recover clock information from service bit streams, IEEE
1588v2 implements frequency and phase synchronization through PTP packet exchanges, as
shown in the following figure. The synchronization is implemented hop by hop, which
requires that all devices in the synchronization network must support the IEEE 1588v2
function.
Figure 6-77 IEEE 1588v2 application scenario

6.13.8 Introduction of ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 (OTN & Packet)

WDM/OTN devices support ITU-T G.8275.1 and ITU-T G.8273.2 to implement clock and
time synchronization.

Platform
ITU-T G.8275.1 Introduction

Defined by ITU-T, the ITU-T G.8275.1 standard is a precise time synchronization
telecommunications standard based on IEEE 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP).
Compared with IEEE 1588v2, ITU-T G.8275.1:
l Simplifies NE models and source selection algorithms, making the standard more
suitable for the telecommunications field.
l Defines packets more specifically, facilitating interconnection and interworking.
The following figure shows the values of the ITU-T G.8275.1 standard.
Figure 6-78 ITU-T G.8275.1 values
ITU-T G.8275.1 Application Scenario

Different from physical clocks that recover clock information from service bit streams, ITU-T
G.8275.1 implements frequency and phase synchronization through PTP packet exchanges, as
shown in the following figure. The synchronization is implemented hop by hop, which
requires that all devices in the synchronization network must support the ITU-T G.8275.1
function.

Platform
Figure 6-79 ITU-T G.8275.1 application scenario
ITU-T G.8273.2 Introduction

IEEE 1588v2 defines only the time synchronization protocol methods, but does not define the
synchronization performance. ITU-T G.8273.2 clearly defines the time synchronization
performance of each single device from the following aspects: time error, noise tolerance,
noise transfer, transient phase response, and holdover.
WDM devices comply with the ITU-T G.8275.1 and G.8273.2 standards and satisfy the
carrier-level time synchronization precision requirements.
The ITU-T G.8273.2 application scenario is the same as the ITU-T G.8275.1. To use ITU-T
G.8273.2, you must configure it with ITU-T G.8275.1.
6.14 ASON
The automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new generation of the optical
transport network and is all called ASON optical network. Compared with a traditional WDM
network, an ASON-empowered WDM network has advantages in service configuration,
bandwidth utilization, and protection.
Challenges of the Traditional Transport Network

In the traditional transmission network, the WDM transmission equipment functions as fibers.
Currently, the WDM transmission equipment also carries services, posing more requirements
on the operability of the WDM equipment. The traditional network faces the following
challenges:
l Service configurations are complex, and it is time-consuming to expand system capacity
and provision services.
l Bandwidth utilization is low and inefficient. For example, on a ring network, half of the
bandwidth is always vacant.

Platform
l Limited protection modes are applicable, among which the self-healing protection has
poor performance.
Benefits of Huawei ASON Solution

To address these challenges, Huawei provides the ASON solution. ASON enhances the
network connection management and fault recovery capabilities by introducing signaling to
the traditional transmission network and providing a control plane.
Compared with the traditional WDM network, the ASON has the following features:
l Configures end-to-end services automatically.
l Discovers the topology automatically.
l Provides mesh networking that enhances the survivability of the network.
l Supports different services that are provided with different levels of protection based on
service levels at the client layer.
l Provides traffic engineering and dynamically adjusts logical network topologies in real
time to optimize the configuration of network resources based on service demands at the
client layer.
ASON User Guide describes the functions, working principles, alarms of ASON equipment.
In addition, this manual describes how to plan, commission, configure, maintain, and
troubleshoot ASON equipment.
ASON User Guide:
l Carrier:
OSN 1800 ASON User Guide
l Enterprise:
OSN 1800 ASON User Guide

Platform
Product Description 7 Board Category
7 Board Category
This topic lists boards when these NEs house different system control boards.
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the corresponding board is supported. "N" indicates that the corresponding board is
not supported.
Table 7-1 Optical transponder boards

Nam Desc OptiX OSN Opti Opti OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 1800 V
e ripti 1800 I&II X X 1800 II Packet Enhanced
on Compact OSN OSN Enhanced
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et
TNF TNF TM TNF TNZ TNZ TNF TNF TNZ

1SC 3SC A1U 1UX 1UX 2UX 5UX 5XC 5UX
C C XCL C/ CL CL CM/ H CMS
TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 12- N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
C12X Port
5 CPRI
Multi
plexi
ng
Boar
d

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
C15X Port
5 CPRI
Multi
plexi
ng
Boar
d
C15X Port
10 CPRI
Multi
plexi
ng
Boar
d
TNF1 6- Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
CE6 port
encry
pted
multi
plexi
ng
optic
al
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 6- Y N N N N N N N N
CP6 port
CPRI
multi
plexi
ng
optic
al
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
CP6 port
CPRI
multi
plexi
ng
optic
al
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Enha Y N N N N N N N N
CP8 nced
8x
Multi
-rate
Ports
Wave
lengt
h
Conv
ersio
n
Boar
d
TNF2 Enha Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
ELO nced
Ma 8x
multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Enha Y N N N N N N N N
ELQ nced
M 4x
multi
-rate
ports
multi
plexi
ng
optic
al
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
TNF1 Doub Y N N N N N N N N
LDE le
port
EPO
N/GE
acces
s
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
LDG le GE
F servic
es &
doubl
e FE
servic
es
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
with
FEC
LDG le 2 x
F2 GE
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
LDG le 2 x
F2 GE
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 2x Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
LDX 10
Gbit/
s
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
TNF2 2x Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
LDX 10
Gbit/
s
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
TNF1 16 x Y N N N N N N N N
LEG GE
16 Ether
net
switc
h
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 16 x Y N N N N N N N N
LEM GE
18 +2x
10GE
LAN
+2x
OTU
2
Ether
net
switc
h
board
TNF1 8 port Y N N N N N N N N
LOE EPO
N&
GE
acces
s
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
TNF1 4x Y N N N N N N N N
LQG GE
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
LQM multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
LQM multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
LQM le 4 x
2 multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF2 Doub Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
LQM le 4 x
2a multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
TNF1 10 Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
LSX Gbit/
s
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
TNF2 10 Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
LSX Gbit/
s
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
LWX le
2 arbitr
ary
bit
rate
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
TSP chann
el
E1/T
1 and
2-
chann
el
STM-
1
servic
e
conve
rgenc
e and
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 10 x N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
LTX multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
LTX multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
LTX multi
-rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
LTX multi
M -rate
ports
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 1 port N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
LSC/ 100G
TNF1 E/
LSC OTU
M/ 4
TNF1 acces
LSC s
G wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board
FC16 FC16
Q 00
low
latenc
y
servic
e
wavel
ength
conve
rsion
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 2x N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
LDC 100G
A bit/s
Or 10
x
10Gb
it/s
Multi
-rate
Ports
Wave
lengt
h
Conv
ersio
n
Boar
d
a: The board supports various logical boards, and the system control board supported by
each logical board varies. For details, see the specific board hardware description.

Platform
Table 7-2 OTN tributary boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF5 8 N N N N N N Y Y N
TOA any-
rate
ports
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNF6 8 N N N N Y Y Y Y Y
TOA any-
rate
ports
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNF5 4x N N N N N N Y Y N
TQX 10G
tribut
ary
servic
e
proce
ssing
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TDX 10G
tribut
ary
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNF6 10 x N N N N Y Y Y Y Y
TTA multi
-rate
ports
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNF7 10 x N N N N Y Y Y Y Y
TTA multi
-rate
ports
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNZ 1x N N N N N N N N Y
5TSC 100G
tribut
ary
servic
e
proce
ssing
board

Platform
Table 7-3 OTN line boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
ND2 10G
line
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
NS4 100G
line
servic
e
proce
ssing
board

Platform
Table 7-4 Universal line boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF5 Univ N N N N N N Y N N
HUN ersal
Q2 4x
10G
unive
rsal
line
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNF5 Univ N N N N N N Y Y N
HSN ersal
Q2 4x
10G
unive
rsal
line
servic
e
proce
ssing
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF6 Univ N N N N Y Y Y Y Y
HSN ersal
Q2 4x
10G
unive
rsal
line
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNZ Univ N N N N Y Y N N Y
5UN ersal
Q2 4x
10G
unive
rsal
line
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNZ 1x N N N N N N N N Y
5UN 100G
S4 Univ
ersal
Line
Servi
ce
Proce
ssing
Boar
d

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
HSN 100G
S4 Univ
ersal
Line
Servi
ce
Proce
ssing
Boar
d

Platform
Table 7-5 Packet boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF5 8x10 N N N N N N Y N N
EM2 GE
0 +12x
GE
or
20xG
E/FE
Ether
net
switc
hing
proce
ssing
board
TNF1 8xFE N N N Y N N N N N
EF8F proce
ssing
board
TNZ 10xG N N Y N Y Y N N Y
5EG1 E
0 Ether
net
Proce
ssing
Boar
d
TNZ 10xG N N Y N Y Y N N Y
7EG1 E
0 Ether
net
Proce
ssing
Boar
d

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 FE/G N N N Y N N N N N
EM6 E
F proce
ssing
board
TNF1 4xGE N N N Y Y Y N N N
EG4 proce
C ssing
board
TNF1 1x10 N N N Y N N N N N
EX1 GE
Ether
net
proce
ssing
board
TNZ 4x10 N N N N Y Y N N Y
5EX4 GE
Ether
net
proce
ssing
board
TNF1 4- N N Y Y Y Y N N Y
CQ1 port
chann
elized
STM-
1
proce
ssing
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 32xC N N Y Y Y Y N N Y
MD1 ES
E1
servic
e
proce
ssing
board
TNZ 1x10 N N N N N N N N Y
5EC1 0GE
Ether
net
proce
ssing
board

Platform
Table 7-6 SDH boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 4x N N N Y Y Y Y N Y
SL1Q STM-
1
optic
al
interf
ace
board
TNF1 2x N N N Y Y Y Y N Y
SL4D STM-
4
optic
al
interf
ace
board
TNW 4x N N N N N N N N Y
1SL1 STM-
6Q 16
line
board
TNF5 4- N N Y N Y Y Y N Y
SLN port
O STM-
16/8-
port
STM-
4/8-
port
STM-
1 line
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF5 2x N N N N N N Y N Y
SL64 STM-
D 64
optic
al
interf
ace
board
TNW 1x N N N N N N N N Y
1SL6 STM-
4S 64
line
board

Platform
Table 7-7 PDH boards
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNW 16 x N N N N N N N N Y
1PL1 E1
electr
ical
interf
ace
board
TNF1 3x N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y
PL3T E3/T
3
electr
ical
interf
ace
board
TNF1 2x N N N N N N N N Y
PL4D E4
proce
ssing
board
TNF1 42 x N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y
SP3D E1/T
1
electr
ical
interf
ace
board
TNF1 32 x N N N N N N N N Y
DMS E1/T
1
switc
hing
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 32 x N N N N N N N N Y
PD1 E1/T
1
proce
ssing
board
Table 7-8 EoS boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 8x N N Y Y Y Y N N Y
EFS8 FE
switc
hing
and
proce
ssing
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 4x N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y
EGS4 GE
switc
hing
and
proce
ssing
board

Platform
Table 7-9 Optical add and drop multiplexing boards

Nam Descrip OptiX OSN Opti Opti OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 1800 V
e tion 1800 I&II X X 1800 II Packet Enhanced
Compact OS OS Enhanced
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

C C XCL C/ CL CL CM/ H CM
TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
TNF1 Bidirecti Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
DMD onal
1 single
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
DMD onal
1S single
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
with
OSC
DMD onal
2 double
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board

Platform
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
DMD onal
2S double
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
with
OSC
TNF1 Enhance Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
EMR d double
2 channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
er board
TNF1 Enhance Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
EMR d four
4 channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
er board
TNF1 Enhance Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
EMR d eight
8 channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
er board

Platform
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
TNF1 8 Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MD8 channel
multiplex
ing and
demultipl
exing
board
TNF1 Bandpass Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
MB1 filter 1-
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
TNF1 8 Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MD8 channel
S multiplex
ing and
demultipl
exing
board
with
OSC
MD8 channel
M multiplex
ing/
demultipl
exing
board
with
MON
ports

Platform
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
MD1 channel
6M multiplex
ing/
demultipl
exing
board
with
MON
ports
TNF1 Single Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MR1 channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
MR1 channel
S optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
with
OSC
TNF1 Double Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MR2 channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board

Platform
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
TNF1 Double Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MR2 channel
S optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
with
OSC
TNF1 Four Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MR4 channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
TNF1 Four Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MR4 channel
S optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board
with
OSC
TNF1 Eight Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
MR8 channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing board

Platform
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
SBM fiber
1 bidirectio
nal
single
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing
configura
tion
board
SBM fiber
2 bidirectio
nal
double
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing
configura
tion
board

Platform
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
SBM fiber
4 bidirectio
nal four
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing
configura
tion
board
SBM fiber
8 bidirectio
nal eight
channel
optical
add/drop
multiplex
ing
configura
tion
board

Platform
N N
1800 1800
I II
Enh Pack
ance et
d

TNF TNF S
1UX 5UX
CL CM
E
TNF1 9-Port N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
WSM Wavelen
D9XF gth
selective
multiplex
ing and
Demultip
lexing
board
integrate
d with
OSC
multiplex
ing and
Demultip
lexing

Platform
Table 7-10 Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF6 Dual N N N N N N Y Y Y
DWS 9-
S9 Port
Wave
lengt
h
Selec
tive
Switc
hing
Boar
d

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
WSM Port
D9X Wave
F lengt
h
select
ive
multi
plexi
ng
and
demu
ltiple
xing
board
integr
ated
with
OSC
multi
plexi
ng
and
Dem
ultipl
exing

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
WSM Port
D4 Wave
lengt
h
select
ive
multi
plexi
ng
and
Dem
ultipl
exing
board

Platform
Table 7-11 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Both Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
DFIU east
01/ &
TNF1 west
DFIU direct
03 ional
fiber
interf
ace
board
(dual
FIU
subca
rd)
TNF1 Fiber Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
DFIU interf
02/ ace
TNF1 board
DFIU (singl
04 e FIU
subca
rd)

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Both Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
DSFI east
U01 &
west
direct
ional
fiber
interf
ace
board
for
sync
timin
g
(dual
SFIU
subca
rd)
TNF1 Fiber Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
DSFI interf
U02 ace
board
for
sync
timin
g
(singl
e
SFIU
subca
rd)
FIU port
unit

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
FIU port
unit
X40 chann
el
multi
plexi
ng or
demu
ltiple
xing
board
TNF1 Enha N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
EX40 nced
40-
chann
el
multi
plexi
ng or
demu
ltiple
xing
board
TNF1 interl N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
ITL eaver
board

Platform
Table 7-12 Optical amplifying boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 C- N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
BAS Band
1 optic
al
boost
er
and
ampli
fying
unit
with
optic
al
super
visor
y
chann
el
board
TNF1 Optic Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
OBU al
boost
er
board
OBU al
boost
er
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Optic Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
OPU al
prea
mplif
ier
unit
TNF1 C- N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
DAP band
optic
al
ampli
fier
base
board
with
2
plugg
able
ports
Table 7-13 System control, switching, and timing boards

Name Descripti OptiX OptiX OptiX OptiX OptiX
on OSN OSN OSN OSN OSN
1800 I&II 1800 I 1800 II 1800 II 1800 V
Compact Enhance Packet Enhance Packet
d d Enhance
d
TNF1UX System N N Y N N
C control,
cross-
connect,
and timing
board

Platform

1800 I&II 1800 I 1800 II 1800 II 1800 V
d d Enhance
d
TNF1UX System N N Y N N
CL control,
cross-
connect,
timing,
and line
board
TNF5UX System N N N N Y
CM control,
cross-
connect
and clock
board
TNF5UX System N N N N Y
CME control,
cross-
connect
and clock
board that
supports
20 Gbit/s
lower
order
cross-
connectio
ns
TNZ5UX system N N N N Y
CMS control,
cross-
connect
and clock
board that
supports
40 Gbit/s
lower
order
cross-
connectio
ns.

Platform

1800 I&II 1800 I 1800 II 1800 II 1800 V
d d Enhance
d
TNF5XC OTN N N N N Y
H system
control,
cross-
connect
and clock
board
TNF1CTL OADM Y N N N N
control
board
TNF1SCC System Y N N N N
control &
communic
ation
board with
OSC
TNF3SCC System Y N N N N
control &
communic
ation
board with
OSC
TNZ1UX Universal N N N Y N
CL Cross
Connect,
System
Control,
and Clock
Processing
Board
TNZ2UX Universal N N N Y N
CL Cross
Connect,
System
Control,
and Clock
Processing
Board

Platform

1800 I&II 1800 I 1800 II 1800 II 1800 V
d d Enhance
d
TMA1UX System N Y N N N
CL control,
cross-
connect,
timing,
and line
board
Table 7-14 Optical supervisory channel boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Bidir Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
ST2 ectio
nal
optic
al
super
visor
y
chann
el and
timin
g
trans
missi
on
unit

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Four- N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y
AST4 direct
ional
optic
al
super
visor
y
chann
el and
timin
g
trans
missi
on
unit,
with
Adva
nced
OTD
R.

Platform
Table 7-15 Auxiliary boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Auxil N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y
AUX iary
interf
ace
board
Table 7-16 Optical protection boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
OLP al
line
prote
ction
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF1 Sync Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y
SCS optic
al
chann
el
separ
ator
board
Table 7-17 Spectrum Analyzer Board

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
OPM chann
8 el
optic
al
powe
r
monit
or
board

Platform
Table 7-18 Fan and power boards

1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TMA Fan N N Y N N N N N N
1FA board
N
TNF1 Fan Y Y N N N N N N N
FAN board
TNF5 Fan N N N N N N Y Y Y
FAN board
TNZ Fan N N N N Y Y N N N
1FA board
N
TNC DC Y Y Y N N N N N N
1PIU powe
r
board
TND DC Y Y N Y N N N N N
1PIU powe
r
board
TNF5 DC N N N N N N Y Y Y
PIU0 powe
2 r
board
ANK DC N N N N Y Y N N N
1PIU powe
r
board
TNF1 AC Y Y N Y N N N N N
APIU powe
r
board

Platform
1800 1800
I II
Enha Pack
nced et

TNF TNF
1UX 5UX
CL CME
TNF5 AC N N N N N N Y Y Y
APIU powe
/ r
TNF6 board
APIU

Platform
Product Description 8 Hardware Architecture
8 Hardware Architecture
About This Chapter
8.1 Introduction to Cabinets

This section describes the types of cabinets supported by the OptiX OSN 1800.
8.2 OSN 1800 V Chassis
All boards in the chassis are installed horizontally at the front of the chassis.
8.3 OSN 1800 I Compact Chassis
All boards in the chassis are installed horizontally in the front of the chassis.
8.4 OSN 1800 I Enhanced Chassis
Boards are inserted horizontally in the slots of the chassis. All types of boards are inserted and
removed in the front of the chassis.
8.5 OSN 1800 II Compact Chassis
8.6 OSN 1800 II Enhanced Chassis
The OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis uses horizontal slot layout. All boards are inserted
and removed from the front side of the chassis.
8.7 OSN 1800 OADM Frame
8.1 Introduction to Cabinets

This section describes the types of cabinets supported by the OptiX OSN 1800.

Platform
Table 8-1 Types, appearances, and specifications of the cabinets supported by OptiX OSN
equipment
Item N63E/N63B 19-Inch Cabinet 19-Inch Open A63B Cabinet
Cabinet Rack
Appe
aranc
e
NOTE
N63E cabinets use
front columns
while N63B
cabinets use
middle columns.
Equip OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800
ment I&II Compact I&II Compact I&II Compact I&II Compact
suppo OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800
rted I Enhanced I Enhanced I Enhanced I Enhanced
OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800
II Enhanced II Enhanced II Enhanced II Enhanced
OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 1800
V V V
Weig N63E cabinet: 45 72 kg (158.7 lb.) 2200 mm-high 61 kg (134.5 lb.)

ht kg (99.2 lb.) cabinet: 25 kg
NOT N63B cabinet: 60 (55.1 lb.)
E kg (132.3 lb.) 2000 mm-high
The
cabinet: 22 kg
data
refe (48.5 lb.)
rs to
the
wei
ght
of
the
cabi
net
only
,
excl
udin
g
devi
ces.

Platform

Cabinet Rack
Dime 2200 mm x 600 2200 mm x 600 2200 mm x 600 2200 mm x 600

nsion mm x 300 mm mm x 600 mm mm x 600 mm mm x 300 mm
s (H (86.6 in. x 23.6 in. (86.6 in. x 23.6 in. (86.6 in. x 23.6 in. (86.6 in. x 23.6 in.
xW x 11.8 in.) x 23.6 in.) x 23.6 in.) x 11.8 in.)
x D) (footprint)
2000 mm x 600
mm x 600 mm
(78.7 in. x 23.6 in.
x 23.6 in.)
(footprint)
Avail 46 U 45 U 2200 mm (height): 47 U

able 45 U
space 2000 mm (height):
40 U

Platform

Cabinet Rack
Fiber N63E: l Fiber (2 mm): l Fiber (2 mm): A63B:

capac l Fiber (2 mm): 430 PCS 800 PCS l Fiber (2 mm):
itya 120 PCS l Network cable l Network cable 360 PCS
(5.2 mm): 72 (5.2 mm): 115 l Network cable
l Network cable
PCS PCS (5.2 mm): 60
(5.2 mm): 24
PCS l Shielded l Shielded PCS
network cable network cable l Shielded
l Shielded
(6.8 mm): 60 (6.8 mm): 68 network cable
network cable
PCS PCS (6.8 mm): 50
(6.8 mm): 20
PCS l 21E1 cable l 21E1 cable PCS
(13.4 mm): 12 (13.4 mm): 20 l 21E1 cable
l 21E1 cable PCS PCS
(13.4 mm): 4 (13.4 mm): 10
PCS l Trunk cable l Trunk cable PCS
(5.8 mm): 54 (5.8 mm): 95 l Trunk cable
l Trunk cable PCS PCS
(5.8 mm): 18 (5.8 mm): 45
PCS l Trunk cable l Trunk cable PCS
(3.9 mm): 120 (3.9 mm): 210 l Trunk cable
l Trunk cable PCS PCS (3.9 mm): 100
(3.9 mm): 40
PCS
PCS
A63B+Fiber
N63B:
management
l Fiber (2 mm): cabinetb:
360 PCS
l Fiber (2 mm):
l Network cable 1360 PCS
(5.2 mm): 60 l Network cable
PCS (5.2 mm): 420
l Shielded PCS
network cable l Shielded
(6.8 mm): 50 network cable
PCS (6.8 mm): 350
l 21E1 cable PCS
(13.4 mm): 10 l 21E1 cable
PCS (13.4 mm): 72
l Trunk cable PCS
(5.8 mm): 45 l Trunk cable
PCS (5.8 mm): 315
l Trunk cable PCS
(3.9 mm): 100 l Trunk cable
PCS (3.9 mm): 700
N63B+Fiber PCS
management
cabinetb:
l Fiber (2 mm):
1360 PCS

Platform

Cabinet Rack
l Network cable
(5.2 mm): 420
PCS
l Shielded
network cable
(6.8 mm): 350
PCS
l 21E1 cable
(13.4 mm): 72
PCS
l Trunk cable
(5.8 mm): 315
PCS
l Trunk cable
(3.9 mm): 700
PCS
Space l Ordinary OptiX 1800 I Compact chassis: 1 U

requir l OptiX OSN 1800 I Enhanced chassis: 1 U
ed by
the l Ordinary OptiX OSN 1800 II Compact chassis: 2 U
hard l Ordinary OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis: 2 U
warec l Ordinary OptiX OSN 1800 V chassis: 5 U
l DC power distribution unit (PDU): 3 U
l FMT: 1 U
l Dispersion compensation module (DCM) frame: 1 U
NOTE
The above OSN chassis are all common chassis, whose height does not include the height of
an FMT. The height of an OSN chassis integrated with an FMT is the sum of the height of the
common chassis and that of the FMT.

Platform

Cabinet Rack
Confi The rules for configuring fiber management trays (FMTs) are as follows:
gurati l Configure one FMT for every two OptiX OSN 1800 I Compact chassis.
on
princi l Configure one FMT for each OptiX OSN 1800 I Enhanced chassis.
ples l Configure one FMT for each OptiX OSN 1800 II Compact chassis.
l Configure one FMT for each OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis.
l Configure one FMT for each OptiX OSN 1800 V chassis.
l No space needs to be reserved between chassis and the FMTs configured for
the chassis.
The rules for configuring chassis are as follows:
l Configure a maximum of 12 OptiX OSN 1800 I Compact chassis in one
cabinet (ensure that the temperature in the equipment room is within the range
from -5°C to +40°C).
l Configure a maximum of 12 OptiX OSN 1800 I Enhanced chassis in one
l Configure a maximum of eight OptiX OSN 1800 II Compact chassis in one
l Configure a maximum of six OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis in one
l An N63B or A63B cabinet can house a maximum of four OptiX OSN 1800 V
chassis. The long-term temperature at the air intake vent of an OptiX OSN
1800 V chassis must not exceed 50°C, while the short-term temperature must
not exceed 55°C.
l For an N63E cabinet, keep a minimum distance of 37 mm between two
adjacent OptiX OSN 1800 II Compact or 1800 II Enhancedchassis, and a
minimum distance of 32 mm between two adjacent OptiX OSN 1800 I
Compact or 1800 I Enhanced chassis, to facilitate fiber routing.
l No space needs to be reserved between devices in an N63B cabinet, an A63B
cabinet, or a 19-inch cabinet because fibers can be routed through the space
between the column and a side panel of the cabinet.
l Cabinet doors can be equipped with air filters or not. If devices are installed in
partially controlled and half-sealed environments, use cabinet doors equipped
with air filters.
NOTE
l The maximum number of chassis that a cabinet can house depends on actual situations.
For the maximum number of chassis that a specific cabinet can house, contact local
Huawei office.
l When multiple chassis are stacked, no clearance should be reserved but air deflectors are
required.

Platform

Cabinet Rack
Powe OptiX OSN 1800 I&II Compact: The power consumed by an N63E cabinet, an
r N63B cabinet, an A63B cabinet, a 19-inch cabinet, or a 19-inch open rack must
consu not exceed 1500 W.
mptio OptiX OSN 1800 I Enhanced: The power consumed by an N63E cabinet, an N63B
n of cabinet, an A63B cabinet, a 19-inch cabinet, or a 19-inch open rack must not
the exceed 1500 W.
entire
cabin OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced: The power consumed by an N63E cabinet, an
et N63B cabinet, an A63B cabinet, a 19-inch cabinet, or a 19-inch open rack must
not exceed 2500 W.
OptiX OSN 1800 V: The power consumed by an N63E cabinet, an N63B cabinet,
an A63B cabinet, or a 19-inch cabinet must not exceed 2500 W.
NOTE
a: Fiber capacity indicates the maximum number of fibers (of the same type) that can be routed in a
cabinet. If cables of multiple types need to be routed in the cabinet, you need to perform conversion.
When selecting a cabinet model, you need to consider the maximum fiber routing capacity upon
expansion.
b: The calculation assumes that one fiber management cabinet is configured at the right side of the
N63B cabinet.
c: 1 U = 44.45 mm
8.2 OSN 1800 V Chassis

All boards in the chassis are installed horizontally at the front of the chassis.
An OptiX OSN 1800 V chassis provides a maximum of 15 board slots.
l Slots 1-14 are used to house optical transponder unit (OTU) boards, optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM) boards, optical amplifier boards, optical multiplexer/demultiplexer
boards, optical protection boards, optical supervisory channel boards, packet boards,
OTN tributary boards, OTN line boards, universal line boards, TDM boards, and
auxiliary interface boards.
l Slots 15 and 16 are dedicated for housing the control/cross-connect/clock integrated
boards.
l Slots 17 and 18 are dedicated for housing the PIU boards when the chassis is DC
powered. Slots 17 and 19 are dedicated for housing the APIU board when the chassis is
AC powered. Slot 19 can also be used to house an OTU board, OADM board, optical
amplifier board, optical multiplexer/demultiplexer board, optical protection board,
optical supervisory channel board, or auxiliary interface board when the chassis is DC
powered.
l Slot 20 is dedicated for housing the FAN board.
NOTE
Slot 19 cannot be used to house a packet processing board, tributary board, or line board because this
slot does not have a cross-connect bus.
If a board supporting electrical ports is installed on an 1800 V chassis, the maximum number
of electrical ports that can be used by the board has the following limitations due to the
limitations on routing cables on the chassis:

Platform
l If unshielded network cables are used, a maximum of six network cables can be
connected to each layer of the chassis, and each layer can provide a maximum of six
electrical ports.
l If shielded network cables are used, a maximum of four network cables can be connected
to each layer of the chassis, and each layer can provide a maximum of four electrical
ports.
l If 21 x E1 cables are used, it is advised to connect a maximum of three cables at each
layer of the chassis.
For example, if a dual-slot EM20 board is installed on an OptiX OSN 1800 V chassis, the
board occupies a two-layer height. If unshielded network cables are used, the EM20 board can
use a maximum of 12 electrical modules. If shielded network cables are used, the EM20 board
can use a maximum of 8 electrical modules.
NOTE
If the number of electrical ports exceeds the specified maximum number, the cabling tray may be unavailable
to hold the cables, and even the cabinet door may fail to be closed. If the number of electrical ports at each
layer of the subrack must exceed the maximum number, contact Huawei engineers to customize a gibbous
front door.
The cables/network cables on the boards on the left side of the subrack have impact on maintenance of boards
on the right side. Therefore, the boards providing electrical ports must be inserted into right slots of the
subrack preferentially. Do not insert boards providing electrical ports in both right and left slots if possible.
Figure 8-1 Slot layout of the chassis (DC powered)

Platform
Figure 8-2 Slot layout of the chassis (AC powered)
NOTE
The rear connectors of the APIU board are designed to connect to the backplane through the lower slot
of the slots that hold the APIU board. The slot ID displayed on the NMS is the ID of the lower left one
of the slots.
l If the board is installed in slot 17, it occupies slots 1, 17, and 18, and the slot ID displayed on the
NMS is the ID of slot 17.
l If the board is installed in slot 19, it occupies slots 8 and 19, and the slot ID displayed on the NMS
is the ID of slot 19.
8.3 OSN 1800 I Compact Chassis

The OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis provides six slots for boards.
l Slots 1, 3 and 4 can be configured with optical transponder (OTU) boards, optical add/
drop multiplexer (OADM) boards, optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards, optical
amplifier boards, and protection boards.
l Slot 2 is fixed to house the SCC board.
l Slot 5 is fixed to house the PIU board.
l An APIU board occupies two slots. Since the pins are at the upper part of the board, the
board is inserted into the upper slot. On the NMS, the slot ID of the APIU board is
therefore that of the upper slot. If the board is inserted into slot 3, occupying slots 1 and
3, the slot ID of the board displayed on the NMS is slot 3.
l Slot 6 is fixed to house the FAN board.
If a board supporting electrical ports is installed on an OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis, the
maximum number of electrical ports that can be used by the board has the following
limitations due to the limitations on routing cables on the chassis:
electrical ports.

Platform
ports.
layer of the chassis to facilitate maintenance and cable routing.
For example, if a dual-slot LEM18 board is installed on an OptiX OSN 1800 I, the board
occupies a two-layer height. If unshielded network cables are used, the LEM18 board can use
a maximum of 12 electrical modules. If shielded network cables are used, the LEM18 board
NOTE
front door.
Figure 8-3 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis
l Service paired slots: a pair of slots where overhead bytes can be transmitted through
backplane buses. Such slots support distributed service grooming.
l Regeneration paired slots: When line boards or OTU boards are used as regeneration
boards, ESC signals need to pass through them. Therefore, the two line boards or OTU
boards must be configured in regeneration paired slots. When each board occupies one
slot, the boards are configured in the regeneration paired slots (single-slot). When each
board occupies two slots, the boards are configured in the regeneration paired slots (two-
slot).
For details about the support for paired slots, see the description of board valid slots.
8.4 OSN 1800 I Enhanced Chassis

Boards are inserted horizontally in the slots of the chassis. All types of boards are inserted and
removed in the front of the chassis.
The OSN 1800 I Enhanced chassis provides five slots for boards.
l Slot 1: fixed to house a TMA1UXCL board

l Slots 3 and 4: available for packet boards, APIU boards and TDM boards
l Slot 5: fixed to house a PIU board
l Slot 6: fixed to house a FAN board

Platform
When a board that supports electrical ports is inserted into the OSN 1800 I Enhanced chassis,
as the electrical ports are restricted by the cabling of the chassis, the maximum number of
available electrical ports must meet the following requirements:
l When unshielded network cables are used, it is recommended that no more than six
network cables be connected at each layer of the chassis. A single layer can contain a
maximum of six electrical module ports.
l When shielded network cables are used, it is recommended that no more than four
network cables be connected at each layer of the chassis. A single layer can contain a
maximum of four electrical module ports.
l When 21xE1 cables are used, it is recommended that no more than three cables be
connected at each layer of the chassis.
NOTE
If the number of electrical ports exceeds the upper limit, the cable tray may not accommodate all cables, and
the cabinet door may not be closed. If the number of single-layer electrical ports on the subrack must exceed
the upper limit, contact Huawei engineers to customize a convex front door.
The network cables or electrical cables on the left of the subrack adversely affect the maintenance of the
boards on the right. Therefore, the boards that support electrical ports are preferentially installed in the right
slots of the subrack. Avoid inserting boards equipped with electrical ports into left and right slots at the same
time.
Figure 8-4 Slot layout of the OSN 1800 I Enhanced chassis
8.5 OSN 1800 II Compact Chassis

The OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis provides eight slots for boards.
l Slots 1 through 6 can be used to house the optical transponder (OTU) boards, optical
add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards, optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards, optical
amplifier boards, and protection boards.
l Slot 7 is used to house the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards, optical
multiplexer/demultiplexer boards, or SCS board.
l Slot 8 is fixed to house the SCC board.
l Slots 9 and 10 are fixed to house the PIU board.
l An APIU board occupies two slots. Since the pins are at the upper part of the board, the
board is inserted into the upper slot. On the NMS, the slot ID of the APIU board is
therefore that of the upper slot.
– If the board is inserted into slot 4, occupying slots 2 and 4, the slot ID of the board
displayed on the NMS is slot 4.
– If the board is inserted into slot 6, occupying slots 4 and 6, the slot ID of the board
displayed on the NMS is slot 6.

Platform
l Slot 11 is fixed to house the FAN board.

If a board supporting electrical ports is installed on an OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis, the
maximum number of electrical ports that can be used by the board has the following
limitations due to the limitations on routing cables on the chassis:
electrical ports.
ports.
For example, if a dual-slot LEM18 board is installed on an OptiX OSN 1800 II, the board
occupies a two-layer height. If unshielded network cables are used, the LEM18 board can use
a maximum of 12 electrical modules. If shielded network cables are used, the LEM18 board
NOTE
front door.
Figure 8-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis
l Service paired slots: a pair of slots where overhead bytes can be transmitted through
backplane buses. Such slots support distributed service grooming.
l Regeneration paired slots: When line boards or OTU boards are used as regeneration
boards, ESC signals need to pass through them. Therefore, the two line boards or OTU
boards must be configured in regeneration paired slots. When each board occupies one
slot, the boards are configured in the regeneration paired slots (single-slot). When each
board occupies two slots, the boards are configured in the regeneration paired slots (two-
slot).
For details about the support for paired slots, see the description of board valid slots.

Platform
8.6 OSN 1800 II Enhanced Chassis

The OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis uses horizontal slot layout. All boards are inserted
and removed from the front side of the chassis.
One OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis provides eight board slots.
l Slots 1 to 6 can house OTU boards, OADM boards, optical multiplexer/demultiplexer
boards, OA boards, optical protection boards, OSC boards, packet boards, OTN tributary
boards, universal line boards, TDM boards, and auxiliary boards.
NOTE
When configuring boards in an OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis, note that no more than four TNF6TOA
and TNF6TTA boards can be configured in the same chassis. Also, no more than four TNF6TOA and
TNF7TTA boards can be configured in the same chassis.
l Slots 7 and 8 house UXCL boards only.
l Slots 9 and 10 house PIU boards only.
l Slot 11 house a FAN board only.
When a board that supports electrical ports is inserted into an OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced
chassis, the maximum number of available electrical ports on the boards is as follows due to
cabling restrictions on the chassis:
l If unshielded network cables are used, you are advised to connect at most six network
cables at one layer on the chassis, and at most six electrical module ports can be
provided at one layer.
l If shielded network cables are used, you are advised to connect at most four network
cables at one layer on the chassis, and at most four electrical module ports can be
provided at one layer.
layer of the chassis.
For example, a TTA board occupies one slot and a one-layer height of the OptiX OSN 1800 II
Enhanced chassis. If unshielded network cables are used, the TTA board can house at most six
electrical modules. If shielded network cables are used, the TTA board can house at most four
electrical modules.
NOTE
If the number of electrical ports exceeds the preceding upper limit, the cable tray may not house the network
cables, and the cabinet door may fail to be closed. If the number of electrical ports at one layer of the chassis
must exceed the upper limit, contact Huawei engineers to customize a convex front door.
The cables or network cables on boards at the left side of the chassis affect maintenance of boards on the right
side. Therefore, the boards supporting electrical ports must be inserted into the right slots preferentially. Do
not configure electrical ports on boards at both left and right sides.
Figure 8-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1800 II Enhanced chassis

Platform
8.7 OSN 1800 OADM Frame

The OptiX OSN 1800 I OADM frame, whose height is 1 U, provides six slots for boards.
l Slots 1 through 4 are fixed to house the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards,
optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards, or SCS board.
l Slots 5 and 6 are fixed to house the CTL board.
Figure 8-7 Slot layout of the OADM extended frame
l Slots 5 and 6 are not displayed on the U2000, Web LCT, or command line.
l If the OptiX OSN 1800 OADM frame works with the OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis, the
slot number displayed on the U2000, Web LCT, or the command line is a digit from 7 to
10.
l If the OptiX OSN 1800 OADM frame works with the OptiX OSN 1800 II compact
chassis, the slot number displayed on the U2000, Web LCT, or the command line is a
digit from 12 to 15.

Platform
Product Description 9 Node Configuration
9 Node Configuration
About This Chapter
OptiX OSN equipment can function as different sites with different board configurations.
9.1 OTM
The OTM consists of optical transponder boards and optical add/drop multiplexer boards.
When different types of optical transponder boards and optical add/drop multiplexer boards
are used, the product is applicable to the DWDM system or CWDM system.
9.2 FOADM
The FOADM consists of optical transponder boards and optical add/drop multiplexer boards.
9.3 1 Degree ROADM
The 1-degree ROADM consists of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing boards.
The product is applicable to the DWDM system.
9.4 2 Degree ROADM
9.5 3 Degree ROADM
9.6 4 Degree ROADM
9.7 9 Degree ROADM
9.8 OLA
The OLA consists of optical amplifier boards. The product is applicable to the DWDM
system.
9.9 Regeneration Station (REG)

Platform
A WDM span is limited due to factors such as chromatic dispersion (CD), polarization mode
dispersion (PMD), optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and non-linear effect (NLE), which
affect system transmission performance. To prolong a WDM span, REG stations can be
deployed. Through reshaping, retiming, and regenerating (3R), an REG station regenerates
electrical signals and improves signal transmission quality.
9.10 CWDM
9.1 OTM
The OTM consists of optical transponder boards and optical add/drop multiplexer boards.
9.1.1 Signal Flow

The signal flow at the OTM station involves the transmit and receive directions.
l In the transmit direction, the optical transponder board converges or converts the various
accessed signals to standard WDM wavelengths, which comply with ITU-T G.694.1, or
to standard CWDM wavelengths, which comply with ITU-T G.694.2, and then the
optical add/drop multiplexer board multiplexes these signals to main path signals
containing multiple wavelengths. Then, the main path signals and optical supervisory
signals are multiplexed and sent to the line for transmission.
l In the receive direction, the optical supervisory signals and main path signals are
extracted from the received line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the
system control, supervisory, and communication board for processing. The main path
signals are demultiplexed to signals containing multiple wavelengths by the optical add/
drop multiplexer board. Then, after the optical transponder board converts or divides
these signals, these signals are sent to the corresponding client-side equipment.
Figure 9-1 shows the functional modules of the OTM.
Figure 9-1 Functional modules of the OTM with OADM boards

Platform
9.1.2 Chassis Layout

This topic describes the typical configuration for a 40-channel optical terminal multiplexer
(OTM) site.
When an OSN 1800 is configured as an OTM, it consists of the following functional units:
l Optical transponder unit (OTU) boards

l All types of optical add/drop multiplexer boards (OADM unit)
l Optical amplifier board (OA)
l Protection boards (optional)
Typical Configuration
Figure 9-2 shows the typical configuration for a 40-channel OTM site in ESC communication
mode. The site uses three OSN 1800 Vs at the electrical layer and two compact OptiX OSN
1800 IIs at the optical layer. OSN 1800 V and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II communicate
using extended ECCs, and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II communicates with the equipment at
another site using optical supervisory channels (OSCs).
Figure 9-2 Typical configuration for a 40-channel OTM site (OSN 1800 uses the ESC
communication mode)
Figure 9-3 shows the typical configuration for a 40-channel OTM site in OSC
communication mode. The site uses three OSN 1800 Vs at the electrical layer and two
compact OptiX OSN 1800 IIs at the optical layer. OSN 1800 V and compact OptiX OSN
1800 II communicate using extended ECCs, and OSN 1800 communicates with the
equipment at another site using OSCs.

Platform
Figure 9-3 Typical configuration for a 40-channel OTM site (OSN 1800 uses the OSC
communication mode)
Fiber Connection Diagram

The west and east optical-layer chassis are compact OptiX OSN 1800 IIs. The following
figure illustrates the optical-layer fiber connections of a west compact OptiX OSN 1800 II
chassis at a 40-channel OTM site.
Figure 9-4 Fiber connections of a west compact OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis at a 40-channel
OTM site (OSN 1800 uses the ESC communication mode)

Platform
Figure 9-5 Fiber connections of a west compact OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis at a 40-channel
OTM site (OSN 1800 uses the OSC communication mode)
9.2 FOADM
The FOADM consists of optical transponder boards and optical add/drop multiplexer boards.
9.2.1 Signal Flow

The signal flow at the FOADM station involves the transmit and receive directions.
The optical supervisory signals and main path signals are extracted from the received line
signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the system control, supervisory, and
communication board for processing. The main path signals are sent to the optical add/drop
multiplexing board, where certain wavelengths are dropped, and then the signals enter the
optical transponder board. Then, the signals are sent to the local client-side equipment. Other
wavelengths are not locally added/dropped. Instead, these wavelengths pass through the

Platform
optical add/drop multiplexing board, and then are multiplexed with the wavelengths locally
added. After that, these wavelengths are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
signal, and then are sent to the line for transmission.
Figure 9-6 shows the functional modules of a serial FOADM station.
Figure 9-6 Functional modules of a serial FOADM station with FOADM boards
Figure 9-7 shows the functional modules of a parallel FOADM station.

Platform
Figure 9-7 Functional modules of a parallel FOADM station with FOADM boards

When the OSN 1800 is configured as an FOADM, it consists of the following functional
units:
l Optical transponder boards (OTU)
l Optical add/drop multiplexer board (FOADM unit)
l (Optional) Protection boards
9.2.2.1 Networking with OSN 1800 Only

This section describes the typical configuration for a 4-channel FOADM site where only OSN
1800 equipment is deployed.
Figure 9-8 shows the typical configuration for a 4-channel FOADM site in ESC
communication mode where only OSN 1800 equipment is deployed. At this site, an OSN
1800 implements both electrical layer and optical layer functions.

Platform
Figure 9-8 Typical configuration for a 4-channel FOADM site where only OSN 1800
equipment is deployed (OSN 1800 uses the ESC communication mode)
Figure 9-8 shows the typical configuration for a 4-channel FOADM site in OSC
communication mode where only OSN 1800 equipment is deployed. At this site, an OSN
1800 implements both electrical layer and optical layer functions.
Figure 9-9 Typical configuration for a 4-channel FOADM site where only OSN 1800
equipment is deployed (OSN 1800 uses the OSC communication mode)

The following figure illustrates the optical-layer fiber connections of a west chassis at a 4-
channel FOADM site where only OSN 1800 equipment is deployed.

Platform
Figure 9-10 Fiber connections of a west chassis at a 4-channel FOADM site where only OSN
1800 equipment is deployed (OSN 1800 uses the ESC communication mode)
Figure 9-11 Fiber connections of a west chassis at a 4-channel FOADM site where only OSN
1800 equipment is deployed (OSN 1800 uses the OSC communication mode)

Platform
9.2.2.2 Networking with OSN 1800 and Compact OptiX OSN 1800 II (2 U Chassis)
This section describes the typical configuration for an 8-channel FOADM site where OSN
1800 equipment and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II (2 U chassis) equipment are deployed.
Figure 9-12 shows the typical configuration for an 8-channel FOADM site in ESC
communication mode where OSN 1800 equipment and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II
equipment are deployed. This site uses one OSN 1800 at the electrical layer and one compact
OptiX OSN 1800 II at the optical layer. OSN 1800 and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II
communicate using extended ECCs, and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II communicates with the
equipment at another site using optical supervisory channels (OSCs).
Figure 9-12 Typical configuration for an 8-channel FOADM site where OSN 1800 and
compact OptiX OSN 1800 II are deployed (OSN 1800 uses the ESC communication mode)
Figure 9-13 shows the typical configuration for an 8-channel FOADM site in OSC
communication mode where OSN 1800 equipment and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II
equipment are deployed. This site uses one OSN 1800 at the electrical layer and one compact
OptiX OSN 1800 II at the optical layer. OSN 1800 and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II
communicate using extended ECCs, and OSN 1800 communicates with the equipment at
another site using OSCs.

Platform
Figure 9-13 Typical configuration for an 8-channel FOADM site where OSN 1800 and
compact OptiX OSN 1800 II are deployed (OSN 1800 uses the OSC communication mode)

The following figure illustrates the optical-layer fiber connections of a west compact OptiX
OSN 1800 II chassis at an 8-channel FOADM site.
Figure 9-14 Fiber connections of a west chassis at an 8-channel FOADM site where OSN
1800 equipment and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II equipment are deployed (OSN 1800 uses
the ESC communication mode)

Platform
Figure 9-15 Fiber connections of a west chassis at an 8-channel FOADM site where OSN
1800 equipment and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II equipment are deployed (OSN 1800 uses
the OSC communication mode)
9.3 1 Degree ROADM

9.3.1 Signal Flow

A 1-degree ROADM site provides one optical direction and can be upgraded to a multi-
degree ROADM site without interrupting services.

Platform
The 1-degree ROADM site consists of one ROADM board. The signal grooming of the
WSMD4 board is used as an example.
In the receive direction:

l The optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the
line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical
supervisory unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are sent to the WSMD4
board after being amplified.
l The main path optical signals with frequency spacing of 100 GHz are locally dropped
through demultiplexer boards.
The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process.
Figure 9-16 shows the signal flow of 1-degree ROADM.
Figure 9-16 Signal flow of a 1-degree ROADM in a 40-wavelength system
9.3.2 Chassis Configuration Layout

This topic describes the typical configuration of 1-degree ROADM sites.
When the OSN 1800 is configured as a ROADM, it consists of the following functional units:
l Optical transponder boards (OTUs)

l Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing (ROADM) boards
l Optical amplifier boards (OAs)

Platform
l Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards
The following describes the typical configuration of 1-degree ROADM sites.
As shown in Figure 9-17 and Figure 9-18, one chassis group is required.
Figure 9-17 Typical configuration of a 40-wavelength ROADM site
Figure 9-18 Typical configuration of an 80-wavelength ROADM site
9.4 2 Degree ROADM

9.4.1 Signal Flow

A 2-degree ROADM site provides two optical directions and can be upgraded to a multi-
The 2-degree ROADM site consists of two ROADM boards (west, east) with the same signal
grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example.

Platform

l The optical supervisory signals and the main-path optical signals are separated from the
supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the
WSMD4 board after being amplified.
l The west WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into two equal optical
signals.
– One optical signal is locally dropped through demultiplexer boards.
– The other optical signal passes through the east WSMD4 board.
Figure 9-19 shows the signal flow of a 2-degree ROADM.


l ROADM boards

Platform
As shown in the following figures, two chassis groups are required in each ROADM site.
9.5 3 Degree ROADM

9.5.1 Signal Flow

A 3-degree ROADM site provides three optical directions and can be upgraded to a multi-
The 3-degree ROADM site consists of three WSMD4 boards (west, east, south) with the same
signal grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an example.

Platform
supervisory unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are sent to the west
l The west WSMD4 board splits the main path optical signals into three equal optical
signals.
– The other two optical signals pass through the east and south WSMD4 boards each.
Figure 9-22 shows the signal flow of 3-degree ROADM.

Platform


l ROADM boards

Platform

As shown in the following figures, three chassis groups are required in each ROADM site.
9.6 4 Degree ROADM

9.6.1 Signal Flow

A 4-degree ROADM site provides four optical directions and can be upgraded to a multi-

Platform
The 4-degree ROADM site consists of four WSMD4 boards (north, south, east, west) with the
same signal grooming. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4 board is used as an
example.
supervisory unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are sent to the west
l The west WSMD4 board splits the main path optical signals into four equal optical
signals.
– The other three optical signals pass through the east, south, and north WSMD4
boards each.

Platform

This section describes the typical configurations of a 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM site.
l ROADM boards

Platform

As shown in the following figures, four chassis groups are required.
9.7 9 Degree ROADM

9.7.1 Signal Flow

A 9-degree ROADM site provides nine optical directions and can be upgraded to a multi-

Platform
The 9-degree ROADM site consists of nine 9-degree ROADM boards (direction 1 to direction
9) with the same signal grooming. Take DWSS9 as an example. The signal grooming of the
DWSS9 board in direction 1 is used as an example.
In the receive direction, optical signals from the main optical path are received in direction 1.
The optical signals are dropped using the WSS optical module or traverse to the DWSS9
board in another direction.
Figure 9-28 Signal flow of a 9-degree ROADM in an 80-wavelength system

This section describes the typical configurations of a 9-degree 80-wavelength ROADM site.

Platform

l ROADM boards
The following describes the typical optical-layer configuration of a 9-degree ROADM site.
As shown in Figure 9-29, nine chassis groups are required. In an 80-wavelength system, a
DWSS9 board needs to be cascaded locally.
9.8 OLA
The OLA consists of optical amplifier boards. The product is applicable to the DWDM
system.
9.8.1 Signal Flow

It separates the optical supervisory signals and the main path signals in the received line
signals and sends the former to the system control, supervisory, and communication board for
processing. The main path signals are amplified by the amplifier board and multiplexed with
the processed optical supervisory signals, and then sent to the line fiber for transmission.
The diagram of DWDM OLA node is illustrated in Figure 9-30.

Platform
Figure 9-30 Schematic diagram of the OSN 1800 DWDM OLA node

This section describes the typical configuration for an optical line amplifier (OLA) site.
When the OSN 1800 is configured as an OLA, it consists of the following functional unit:
The following figure shows the typical configuration for an OLA site where a compact OptiX
OSN 1800 II is deployed. The typical configuration for an OLA site where an OSN 1800 is
deployed is the same.
Figure 9-31 Typical configuration for an OLA site

Figure 9-32 shows the optical-layer fiber connections of a chassis at an OLA site, where the
optical supervisory channel (OSC) function is configured only in the west.

Platform
Figure 9-32 Fiber connections of a chassis at an OLA site
9.9 Regeneration Station (REG)

A WDM span is limited due to factors such as chromatic dispersion (CD), polarization mode
dispersion (PMD), optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and non-linear effect (NLE), which
affect system transmission performance. To prolong a WDM span, REG stations can be
deployed. Through reshaping, retiming, and regenerating (3R), an REG station regenerates
electrical signals and improves signal transmission quality.
9.9.1 Signal Flow

The signal flow of the REG is basically equivalent to that of two back-to-back OTMs. No
signals, however, are added or dropped. The intermediate signals are regenerated through the
regenerating optical transponder unit.
Figure 9-33 shows the functional modules of the REG on which the regeneration function is
implemented by line boards.

Platform
Figure 9-33 Functional modules of the REG

The product can be configured as various types of NEs in the case of different board
combinations.
An REG consists of the following functional units:
l Regenerating line boards (line unit)
l Optical add/drop multiplexer boards (OADM unit)
l (Optional) Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards
Figure 9-34 shows the typical configuration for a 40-channel REG site in ESC
communication mode. The site uses three OSN 1800s at the electrical layer and two compact
OptiX OSN 1800 IIs at the optical layer. OSN 1800 and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II
communicate using extended ECCs, and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II communicates with the
equipment at another site using optical supervisory channels (OSCs).

Platform
Figure 9-34 Typical configuration for a 40-channel REG site (OSN 1800 uses the ESC
communication mode)
Figure 9-35 shows the typical configuration for a 40-channel REG site in OSC
communication mode. The site uses three OSN 1800s at the electrical layer and two compact
OptiX OSN 1800 IIs at the optical layer. OSN 1800 and compact OptiX OSN 1800 II
communicate using extended ECCs, and OSN 1800 communicates with the equipment at
another site using OSCs.
Figure 9-35 Typical configuration for a 40-channel REG site (OSN 1800 uses the OSC
communication mode)

Platform

The west and east optical-layer chassis are compact OptiX OSN 1800 IIs. The following
figure illustrates the optical-layer fiber connections of a west chassis at a 40-channel REG
site.
Figure 9-36 Fiber connections of a west chassis at a 40-channel REG site (OSN 1800 uses the
ESC communication mode)

Platform
Figure 9-37 Fiber connections of a west chassis at a 40-channel REG site (OSN 1800 uses the
OSC communication mode)
9.10 CWDM
Compared to dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) transmission, coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) transmission is ideal for small-capacity and short-
haul networks.
9.10.1 Signal Flow

CWDM systems can use OTM devices and OADM devices and support ESC/OSC
communication mode. This section uses OTM devices and the ESC communication mode to
describe the signal flow in a CWDM system.
The signal flow involves the transmit and receive directions.
l In the transmit direction, the optical transponder board converges or converts the various
accessed signals to standard CWDM wavelengths, which comply with ITU-T G.694.2,
and then the optical add/drop multiplexer board multiplexes these signals to main path

Platform
signals containing multiple wavelengths. Then, the main path signals are sent to the line
for transmission.
l In the receive direction, the main path signals are demultiplexed to signals containing
multiple wavelengths by the optical add/drop multiplexer board. Then, after the optical
transponder board converts or divides these signals, these signals are sent to the
corresponding client-side equipment.
Figure 9-38 show the functional modules of the CWDM system.
Figure 9-38 Functional modules of the CWDM system

This section describes the typical configuration for an 8-channel CWDM site.
When the OptiX OSN equipment is configured in a CWDM system, it consists of the
following functional units:
l Optical transponder boards (OTU)
l All types of optical add/drop multiplexer boards (OADM unit)
l (Optional) Protection boards
The following figure shows the typical configuration for an 8-channel CWDM site where a
compact OptiX OSN 1800 II is deployed. The typical configuration for a CWDM site where
an OSN 1800 is deployed is the same.
Figure 9-39 Typical configuration for an 8-channel CWDM site

Platform

The following figure illustrates the optical-layer fiber connections of a west chassis at an 8-
channel CWDM site.
Figure 9-40 Fiber connections of a west chassis at an 8-channel CWDM site

Platform
Product Description 10 Network Management
10 Network Management
About This Chapter
The OSN 1800 equipment can be managed through the ETH port (management Ethernet port)
using the network management system (NMS) or local craft terminal (LCT), and it also
supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts a standard management information model and the object-
oriented management technology. The NMS can exchange information directly with the NE
software through the communication module, which realizes the management of alarms and
performance, and implements end-to-end configuration on the management plane.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the Simple Network Management Protocol, SNMPv2 or
SNMPv3 so that the third-party NMS can monitor the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 10-1 shows network management.

Platform
Figure 10-1 Network management
NOTE
The figure uses a network where Huawei equipment is deployed at different layers as an example. In this
figure, NEs at sites A, F are OSN 1800 NEs, NEs at site B-E are OptiX OSN 8800 NEs.
As shown in the figure above, network management involves:

l Network Management System: iManager U2000 (U2000) and iManager U2000 Web
LCT (Web LCT)
l Inter-NE communication management:
– The NEs between site A (OSN 1800) and site B (OptiX OSN 8800) are
interconnected with fibers and exchange information over electric supervisory
channels (ESCs)/optical supervisory channels (OSCs)using the HWECC or IP over
DCC protocol.
– The NEs between sites B and E are interconnected with fibers and exchange
information over ESCs using the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol.
– Some NEs between sites A and F (for example, NEs at site A) are interconnected
with network cables, and exchange information over Ethernet channels (at ETH
ports on the related boards) using the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol.
– The NEs at sites B and D are used as gateway NEs (GNEs) and are connected to the
external DCN through a switch or router, communicating with the network
management system (NMS). All the other NEs are used as NON-GNE,
communicating with the NMS through the GNEs.
Network Management System

The NMS manages alarms, performance, configurations, communication, security, and
topology of the entire optical transport system. It also provides end-to-end management
according to the user requirements. The NMS improves network quality, lowers maintenance
costs, and ensures proper utilization of network resources.

Platform
Huawei provides two NMS generics: U2000 and U2000 Web LCT. The U2000 is generally
installed at a network management center for remotely managing equipment. The Web LCT is
generally installed on a PC for local access to equipment to locally configure and maintain
individual NEs.
Inter-NE Communication Management

Inter-NE communication management is based on data communication network (DCN). A
DCN consists of network management systems (NMSs), gateway NEs (GNEs), non-GNEs,
and the connections between them. Both the NMSs and NEs are nodes of a DCN. The DCN
between the NMSs and NEs is called the external DCN, and the DCN between NEs is called
the internal DCN.
l An external DCN is a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN) and uses
the TCP/IP protocol for communication. It provides communication between NMSs and
communication between the NMS server and GNEs.
l An internal DCN provides communication between NEs using the HWECC or TCP/IP
protocol. The protocol packets are transmitted over ESC, OSC or Ethernet channels.
10.1 Network Management Software
The OptiX equipment series is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission
network management system (NMS).
10.2 Inter-NE Communication Management Based on DCN
This section describes the implementation scheme and network application of inter-NE
communication management based on DCN.
10.3 Intra-NE Communication Management based on Master-Slave Shelf
This section describes the planning principles and cascading scheme of intra-NE
communication management based on master-slave shelf.
10.4 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and
the U2000/Web LCT server time. This allows the U2000/Web LCT to record the correct time
at which alarms occur and the correct time at which abnormal events are reported by NEs.
10.5 Interfaces Between the NMS and OSS
The U2000 provides multiple types of northbound interfaces (NBIs) for connecting to
different types of operations support systems (OSSs).
10.1 Network Management Software

The OptiX equipment series is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission
network management system (NMS).
Functionality of the Network Management Software

The NMS maintains all NE equipment in a network. In compliance with ITU-T
Recommendations, it integrates a standard management information model as well as an
object-oriented management technology.
The NMS manages OptiX equipment using GUI interface. The GUI interface complies with a
special management protocol defined by Huawei exclusively for OptiX equipment.

Platform
The NMS runs on a workstation or PC, managing equipment and transmission networks to
help users operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment. The management
functions of the NMS are as follows:
l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears,
and counts alarms in real time; provides alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis, and
fault diagnosis.
l Performance management: monitors performance; browses, analyzes and prints
performance data; forecasts medium- and long-term performance; and resets the
performance register.
l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails,
subnets, and time.
l Security management: provides NMS user management, NE user management, NE login
management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT)
access control for equipment.
l Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown
(ALS), and optical fiber power detection; and collects equipment data to assist
maintenance personnel when troubleshooting.
Classification of the Network Management Software

Two types of network management software are available: U2000 and Web LCT.
l U2000
The iManager U2000 (U2000) is Huawei's major and future-proof network management
product and solution.
The U2000 is an integrated management platform for that centrally manages transport
equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security equipment,
and Metro Ethernet equipment). The U2000 is designed as the major management
system and provides powerful management functions at the NE and network layers.
In the TMN, the U2000 is located on the element management layer and network
management layer. Therefore it supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
l WEB LCT
The iManager U2000 Web local craft terminal is abbreviated as Web LCT.
The Web LCT uniformly manages Huawei OptiX series, such as WDM equipment.
Based on browser/server architecture, the Web LCT provides the ability to configure and
maintain individual NEs, as well as the ability to manage alarms, configuration,
performance, and security.
10.2 Inter-NE Communication Management Based on

DCN
This section describes the implementation scheme and network application of inter-NE
communication management based on DCN.
10.2.1 DCN Network Application

The DCN supports various networking modes. NEs can be connected through optical
interfaces or Ethernet ports for inter-NE communication. In certain situations, inter-NE

Platform
communication supports transparent transmission of OAM information from third-party

equipment.
The DCN has the following typical applications depending on the networking.
Networking with Only Huawei Equipment

Figure 10-2 shows the typical networking setup when only Huawei equipment is used.
Figure 10-2 Networking setup when using only Huawei equipment
Network Application Where Third-Party Equipment Transparently Transmits

OAM Information from Huawei Equipment
Figure 10-3 shows a network where third-party equipment transparently transmits OAM
information from Huawei equipment.
Figure 10-3 Network application where third-party equipment transparently transmits OAM
information from Huawei equipment

Platform
In this scenario, the third-party equipment must transparently transmit OAM information from
Huawei equipment. During information transmission, the third-party equipment must not
parse the OAM information. In addition, the third-party equipment must not terminate
GCC/DCC bytes.
10.2.2 DCN Implementation Scheme

A data communication network (DCN) provides channels for transmitting OAM information
between an NMS and NEs and between different NEs, so that the NMS can uniformly
manage the NEs on a network.
Table 10-1 describes the DCN solutions.
Table 10-1 DCN solutions

Para Inband DCN Outband DCN
meter
ESC OSC
DCC channel GCC channel
Defini In the inband DCN The outband The outband The outband
tion solution, the NMS DCN solution DCN solution DCN solution
manages network transmits OAM transmits OAM transmits OAM
devices by transmitting information over information information
OAM information over DCC channels using fixed using fixed
service channels instead of overhead bytes supervisory
provided by the service channels (GCC channels) channel
network devices. No to manage in service frames wavelengths of
additional device or network devices. to manage optical
DCN network is network devices. supervisory
required to transmit the channel (OSC)
OAM information. boards.

Platform

meter
ESC OSC
Chara l Flexible High reliability. l This solution l This solution

cterist networking. OAM Because OAM does not provides
ics information is information is require extra independent
mapped into an transmitted over wavelengths wavelengths,
Ethernet data channels to transmit facilitating
frame, which is separate from the OAM network
assigned a fixed service channels, information maintenance
VLAN to the DCN and therefore and fault
distinguish the network between helps reduce diagnosis.
OAM information the network the CAPEX. l OSCs are
from data services. management l This solution independent
The OAM center (NMC) saves the of service
information is and managed investment channels and
transmitted together devices can be on OSC are stable.
with data services established in resources and
on the network, various ways, l This solution
prevents applies to
offering flexible for example, insertion loss
network options. using E1 private complex
introduced networks and
This solution helps lines or Ethernet. by OSC
significantly reduce When a service can supervise
devices, any site.
the OPEX. channel becomes helping
l The inband DCN faulty, the lower the l Insertion loss
VLAN priority is network OAM network caused by
configurable. information can construction OSC
be obtained in a costs and interconnecti
timely manner, power budget on should be
enabling real- for optical considered
time network paths. during
monitoring and network
therefore planning.
ensuring high
network
reliability.
DCN l HWECC l HWECC l HWECC -

comm l TCP/IP l TCP/IP l TCP/IP
unicat
ion
protoc
ols
Appli Packet networks TDM networks OTN networks OTN networks

cable
netwo
rks

Platform

meter
ESC OSC
DCN 64 channels Channel type: Channel type: Channel type:

comm D1-D3, D4-D12 3-/9-/18-byte D1-D3,
unicat GCC channels OSC_18,
ion FE_DCN
chann
els Channel count: 225 channels
DCN Composition
A data communication network (DCN) consists of network management systems (NMSs),
gateway NEs (GNEs), non-GNEs, and the connections between them. Both the NMSs and
NEs are nodes of a DCN. The DCN between the NMSs and NEs is called the external DCN,
and the DCN between NEs is called the internal DCN.
l External DCN
In general, an external DCN is a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network
(WAN) and uses the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol
for communication. It mainly provides communication between NMSs and
communication between the NMS server and GNEs.
l Internal DCN
An internal DCN provides communication between NEs using the HWECC or TCP/IP
protocol. The protocol packets are transmitted over an inband channel, electric
supervisory channel (ESC), OSC, or Ethernet communication channel.
DCN Communication Protocols

DCN communication can be implemented using the HWECC, or IP over DCC protocol.
l HWECC Protocol
HWECC is a Huawei proprietary protocol stack. It is the most applicable and advanced
ECC communication solution for Huawei transmission devices. The HWECC protocol
stack distinguishes NEs by ID and creates routes automatically. Therefore, the HWECC
protocol is easy to use. However, the HWECC protocol cannot interwork with a
network-level protocol on third-party devices. In general, it is used when only Huawei
devices are used on a network.
l IP over DCC Protocol
Huawei IP over DCC transmits TCP/IP protocol packets over a DCC or GCC channel.
Like the HWECC protocol, IP over DCC is used to implement communication between
NEs. The difference between them is that IP over DCC transmits IP protocol packets
using DCC or GCC bytes but the HWECC protocol transmits Huawei-developed
protocol packets using DCC or GCC bytes. Because IP over DCC uses the standard
TCP/IP protocol, it can interwork with a network-level protocol on third-party devices,
facilitating network management.

Platform
DCN Communication Channels

WDM equipment supports inband DCN and outband DCN.
l Inband DCN
The NMS manages network devices by transmitting OAM information over service
channels provided by the managed devices. In the inband DCN solution, OAM
information is mapped into an Ethernet data frame and is transmitted together with
services.
l Outband DCN
This DCN solution transmits OAM information over channels that do not occupy service
bandwidth, for example, over the ESC, OSC, or Ethernet.
– ESC: The ESC carries NE OAM information over fixed overhead bytes (DCC/GCC
channels) in service frames. Using the ESC, communication between NEs can be
achieved directly through the interconnection of OTU boards, PDH tributary
boards, or SDH line boards.
– OSC: OAM information is transmitted between WDM equipment using OSCs (such
as D1 to D3 and byte 3 to byte 20 of ST2 boards) provided by the OSC unit.
– Ethernet: The managed NEs provide Ethernet physical channels through the
Ethernet NMS port (ETH).
10.2.3 DCN Design Requirements

A DCN must be properly planned to prevent potential communication problems.
A DCN, independent of the protocol to be used, must be planned properly before you
configure it for a network.
A DCN plan should adhere to the following principles:
l An ECC subnet scale meets the security requirements and will not result in an ECC
storm.
l A single ECC subnet contains a primary GNE and a secondary GNE so that the subnet
will not be unreachable by the NMS if a GNE fails.
l A GNE manages an appropriate number of subtending NEs and does not impose
pressure on the traffic at a single subtending NE.
l Alternative routes are available for communication between NEs so that the
communication between the NEs will not be interrupted in the case of a fiber cut,
especially when the fiber connects to an OLA site.
10.2.3.1 Related Concepts

This section describes some essential concepts for DCN planning.
NE ID
NEs on a network can be distinguished by an NE ID. Huawei's OptiX NEs use NE IDs as NE
identifiers. Each NE ID on the DCN must be unique and must be planned according to the
DCN plan.
An NE ID consists of 32 bits. The 8 most significant bits are reserved for future use. The 8
second most significant bits represent the extended ID (also called the subnet ID) to identify

Platform
the subnet that the NE belongs to. The 16 least significant bits represent the basic ID of the
NE. For example, if the NE ID is 0x00090001, the extended ID is 9 and the basic ID is 1.
Each NE has a factory set ID, which consists of a basic ID and an extended ID:
l The basic ID is within the 0x6001-0xBFEF range, which corresponds to the
24577-49135 range in the decimal system.
l The extended ID is within the 0x90-0xFE range, which corresponds to the 144-254 range
in the decimal system.
When planning NE IDs, change the factory set NE ID as follows:

l Set the basic ID to within the 0x1-0x6000 range, which corresponds to the 1-24576
range in the decimal system.
l Set the extended ID to within the 0x1-0x8F range, which corresponds to the 1-143 range
in the decimal system.
NOTE
If the NE ID is the factory-default NE ID, it must be changed to the planned NE ID. Do not use the
factory-default NE ID.
NE IP Address
An NE uses its IP address as a unique identifier during TCP/IP communication.
By default, the IP address and ID of an NE are associated with each other. In other words,
when users change the NE ID, the system changes the NE IP address accordingly. However,
this association will become invalid if users change the NE IP address manually.
There are two ways to convert between an NE ID and an NE IP address:

l Hexadecimal system: IP = 0x81090000 + basic NE ID. For example, if the basic NE ID
is 0x0001, then the NE IP address is 0x81090001, which is 129.9.0.1 in the dotted
decimal notation.
l Decimal system: The NE IP address is expressed in the 129.9.A.B format, where the
letter A is the quotient and the letter B is the remainder after the basic ID is divided by
256. For example, if the basic NE ID is 24833 (decimal), then dividing 24833 by 256
will produce a quotient of 97 and a remainder of 1. Therefore, the NE IP address is
129.9.97.1.
NOTE
If you want to manually set an IP address for an NE, observe the following rules:
If the subnet mask ranges from 128.0.0.0 to 255.255.0.0 (including 128.0.0.0 and 255.255.0.0), IP
addresses in the format of 192.168.x.y, 192.169.x.y, or 192.170.x.y are not allowed.
GNE
A gateway NE (GNE) is an NE that connects to the NMS using the TCP/IP protocol. In
general, an NE that connects to the NMS through a LAN or WAN network port is a GNE. The
NMS application layer can directly communicate with the application layer of a GNE. The
NMS can connect to one or more GNEs. A GNE and its subtending NEs (non-GNEs)
comprise a management domain. The NMS accesses a non-GNE through its GNE.

Platform
Non-GNE
GNEs communicate with non-GNEs through the DCN channels between them. Non-GNEs
can communicate with an NMS only through a GNE.
DCN Subnet
A DCN subnet consists of NEs that communicate with each other through a DCN. When the
network scale is large, the network can be divided into DCN subnets for management. Each
DCN subnet can communicate with the NMS through an external DCN. DCN communication
is unavailable between NEs in different DCNs.
NOTE
In this document, "network", "DCN network", "DCN subnet", and "subnet" all refer to an internal DCN
network unless otherwise specified.
DCN Route Depth

The DCN route depth is calculated using the following formula:
DCN route depth = Maximum number of hops on a route from a non-GNE to a GNE + 1
Number of DCN Directions

By default, DCN links in ESC mode are established between each NE and its adjacent NEs.
The number of DCN directions indicates the number of DCN links between an NE and its
adjacent NEs.
l When the HWECC protocol is used, only one DCN link will be created if multiple links
are available between two NEs. In this scenario, the number of DCN directions is the
number of adjacent NEs.
l When the IP over DCC protocol is used, multiple DCN links will be created if the same
number of service links is available between two NEs. In this scenario, the number of
DCN directions is greater than the number of adjacent NEs.
NOTE
On a DCN network that uses the IP over DCC protocol, it is recommended to disable unneeded
parallel links and retain a maximum of four links between two NEs.
10.2.3.2 Networking Capability

This topic describes the networking capability of a DCN subnet.
DCN Subnet Scale

Due to the inherent limitations of the DCC protocol, there is a limit on the number of NEs
(physical NEs with unique IDs) in a network even though there are sufficient GNEs. If the
number of NEs in a network exceeds the limit, the network must be divided into multiple
DCN subnets.
The DCN subnet scale varies depending on the communication protocol. The details are as
follows:
l HWECC protocol

Platform
When the HWECC protocol is used, the upper limit on the number of NEs on a DCN
subnet is 200 (100 or less is recommended).
NOTE
l The number of hops on the shortest link between any two NEs on a ring or chain cannot be
greater than 15, depending on the depth of the DCN subnet.
l 1800 V/1800 II Enhanced: The preceding upper limits are provided assuming that the number
of DCN directions of all NEs on a subnet is less than or equal to 64. If the number of DCN
directions is greater than 64, it is recommended to disable the DCN channels in some
directions or submit the networking diagram to Huawei engineers for analysis.
l 1800 I&II Compact: The preceding upper limits are provided assuming that the number of
DCN directions of all NEs on a subnet is less than or equal to 24. If the number of DCN
directions is greater than 24, it is recommended to disable the DCN channels in some
directions or submit the networking diagram to Huawei engineers for analysis.
l IP over DCC protocol
When the IP over DCC protocol is used, the upper limit on the number of NEs is 400 on
a DCN subnet consisting of only this product. When both the IP over DCC protocol and
the HWECC protocol are used, the upper limit on the number of NEs is 200 on the DCN
subnet.
NOTE
Massive packets will be generated in a large DCN network. When the DCN network scale exceeds the
previous specifications, the packets will exceed NE processing capabilities and the DCN network will be
unstable. The following problems may occur when the DCN network is overloaded:
l NEs may undergo warm resets or even become unreachable by the NMS in the case of link
flapping.
l NEs cannot be properly managed in the case of heavy traffic generated during software loading or
massive data querying, because the bandwidths of DCN channels are occupied.
Management Capability of DCN GNEs

Multiple GNEs can be configured for a DCN. GNEs bridge the DCN communication between
an NMS and non-GNEs. The GNEs forward communication data between the NMS and non-
GNEs. Users must manually specify a GNE for non-GNEs.
Each GNE can connect to a maximum of 50 non-GNEs, regardless of the protocol. If there are
more than 50 non-GNEs for one GNE, another GNE must be added.
10.2.3.3 Subnetting
The number of NEs on a network increases as the network scale expands, leading to more
embedded control channel (ECC) routes between NEs. Due to the limitations of
communication protocols, the total number of NEs on a data communication network (DCN)
must not exceed the upper limit even though there are sufficient gateway NEs (GNEs). If the
total number of NEs on a DCN exceeds the upper limit, some problems are likely to occur.
For example, specific NEs are unreachable by the NMS, alarms on the NEs are lost, and the
system control boards on these NEs are reset unexpectedly. To prevent these issues, subnet a
DCN.
When you subnet a DCN, adhere to the following guidelines:
l Ensure that the number of NEs on each DCN subnet is within the recommended range.
l Disable data communications channel (DCC) or general communication channel (GCC)
communication between DCN subnets.

Platform
l Before dividing a DCN into subnets, plan an external DCN for connecting to gateway
NEs on each subnet.
l Ensure that subnetting a DCN must not compromise the existing DCN route restoration
(protection) capability.
l Plan separate optical and electrical NEs at a site in the same DCN subnet.
10.2.3.4 Gateway NE Selection

Network planning determines the division of a network into subnets according to the network
topology, GNEs, and the subnet that each GNE belongs to. Dividing a network into subnets is
related to GNE selection. After a GNE is selected, a subnet is also determined on the network
topology. Therefore, selecting a GNE is the key procedure in network planning.
Principles for Selecting DCN Gateway NEs

The following are the general principles for selecting a GNE:
l A GNE must be a key node on a network, such as the central node, intersecting node, or
tangent node (namely, NE with multiple DCN directions).
l When a backbone network has branch networks, the NE connecting a branch network to
the backbone network is configured as the GNE, and this NE belongs to the backbone
network.
l When there are multiple subnets, the NE connecting two subnets can be configured as a
GNE.
l A GNE is not only a key node in the network topology, but also plays an important role
and involves busy ECC communication.
l Only an NE connected to the U2000 through a network cable can be configured as a
GNE.
l There should not be too many GNEs on a network. Otherwise, network performance
may be affected. It is recommended that the number of GNEs managed by an NMS does
not exceed 2000. If the number exceeds 2000, use extended ECC to combine some of the
GNEs.
l Usually, multiple independent NEs in a network topology (such as the NEs in a ring
network) should be connected to the same GNE.
l A GNE processes the largest volume of traffic on a network. To ensure stable
communication, select equipment with a strong ECC processing capability as the GNE.
NOTE
In practical applications, the number of DCN directions on an electrical NE is greater than that of DCN
directions on an optical NE; therefore, it is recommended to use an electrical NE as a GNE at a site
where electrical NEs are separated from optical NEs.
Principles for Configuring Primary and Secondary GNEs

To ensure the reliability of the connections between a network and the U2000, select an NE as
the secondary GNE according to the same principles as when selecting an NE as the primary
GNE. The secondary GNE can also manage some NEs. In this way, the two GNEs back each
other up to enhance the network stability.
When you create an NE on the NMS, you must specify the primary GNE and secondary
GNEs (three at most) for the NE. Communication data between the NE and NMS is
forwarded by the primary GNE. When the communication link between the primary GNE and

Platform
NMS is disconnected or the primary GNE is malfunctioning, the communication data is

switched to secondary GNE 1; if secondary GNE 1 is malfunctioning, it is switched to
secondary GNE 2; if secondary GNE 2 is malfunctioning, it is switched to secondary GNE 3.
Network traffic is unbalanced if GNEs in the network connect to different numbers of non-
GNEs. In addition, if most of the NEs in the network share the same secondary GNE, the
traffic on these NEs will be switched to the secondary GNE if their primary GNEs are faulty,
and the secondary GNE will be overloaded. To prevent this problem, ensure that:
l All GNEs have a similar number of subtending NEs.

l All GNEs are mutually backed up.
The following provides a configuration example. This example assumes that there are 100
non-GNEs and four GNEs (GNEs A, B, C, and D). It is recommended to divide the non-
GNEs into four groups. For the first group, specify GNE A as the primary GNE and GNEs B,
C, and D as the secondary GNEs. For the second group, specify GNE B as the primary GNE
and GNEs A, C, and D as the secondary GNEs, and so on.
10.3 Intra-NE Communication Management based on

Master-Slave Shelf
This section describes the planning principles and cascading scheme of intra-NE
communication management based on master-slave shelf.
10.3.1 Master-Slave Shelf Planning Principle

This topic provides the specifications of master and slave subracks.
Table 10-2 Rules for master and slave subrack cascading
Master System Slave System Limit on Slave Subrack

Subrack Control Subrack Control Quantity
Type Board Type Board
Model of Model of ASON Non-
the Master Slave Scenario ASON
Subrack Subracks Scenario
1800 I&II F1SCC 1800 I&II F1SCC - 6

Compact Compact
1800 I&II F3SCC 1800 I&II F3SCC - 7

Compact Compact
1800 V(F- XCH/ 1800 V(F- 1800 V(F- - 7

Series) UXCM/ Series), Series):
UXCME 1800 I&II XCH/
Compact UXCM/
UXCME
1800 I&II
Compact:
F3SCC

Platform
Master System Slave System Limit on Slave Subrack

Subrack Control Subrack Control Quantity
Type Board Type Board
Model of Model of ASON Non-
the Master Slave Scenario ASON
Subrack Subracks Scenario
1800 V(Z- UXCMS01 1800 V(F- 1800 V(F- If the master 7

Series) Series), Series): subrack is an
1800 V(Z- XCH/ electrical
Series), UXCM/ subrack: one
1800 I&II UXCME electrical
Compact 1800 V(Z- slave
Series): subrack or
UXCMS01 two optical
slave
1800 I&II subracks
Compact:
F3SCC
1800 V(Z- UXCMS02 1800 V(Z- UXCMS02 If the master A maximum

Series) Series) subrack is an of nine
electrical electrical
subrack: one slave
electrical subracks are
slave supported,
subrack or and the total
two optical number of
slave slave
subracks subracks
cannot be
greater than
19.
NOTE
Unless otherwise stated, the 1800 V(F-Series) and 1800 V(Z-Series) subracks are identified by system
control board models.
If any electrical-layer board is configured in the subrack, this subrack is an electrical subrack.
Limitations on initiating electrical-layer ASON are as follows:
l If the number of slave subracks has exceeded the upper limit before electrical-layer ASON is
enabled, all slave subracks can work normally upon electrical-layer ASON initiation, but the
SUBRACK_EXCEED alarm will be reported and no more slave subracks can be added.
l If the logical subracks are manually added, the number of logical subracks cannot exceed the
specified threshold.

Platform
Table 10-3 Specifications of master and slave subracks

Item Specifications
Cascading 1800 V(F-Series): ring or tree

topology 1800 V(Z-Series): ring or tree
1800 I&II Compact (F1SCC): ring or chain
1800 I&II Compact (F3SCC): ring or tree
Cascading port If slave subracks are 1800 V(F-Series) and 1800 V(Z-Series) subracks:
l Tree network: any EXT1 or EXT2 port on the active and standby
XCH/UXCM/UXCME/UXCMS01 boards can be used as the
cascading port.
l Ring network: The EXT1 port is the working port and the EXT2
port is the protection port. Either the EXT1 or EXT2 port on the
active and standby XCH/UXCM/UXCME/UXCMS01 boards
cannot be used as the cascading port. They cannot be used
simultaneously.
If the slave subrack is 1800 I&II Compact with F3SCC boards:
l In tree cascading mode, the EXT2&CLK port can be used as the
cascading port.
l In ring cascading mode, both the EXT2&CLK and
ETH2&EXT1&OAM ports can be used, but the slave subracks
cannot be interconnected through the ETH2&EXT1&OAM port.
The EXT2&CLK and ETH2&EXT1&OAM ports are recommended
for subrack connection.
NOTE
1800 I&II Compact (F3SCC): When configuring master and slave subracks, both
the EXT2&CLK and ETH2&EXT1&OAM ports of the F3SCC board are
available but the ETH1 port is unavailable, and the subracks cannot be
interconnected through the ETH2&EXT1&OAM port. The EXT2&CLK and
ETH2&EXT1&OAM ports are recommended for subrack interconnection.
NOTE
The EXT2&CLK and ETH2&EXT1&OAM ports of the master and slave
subracks are enabled by default. The ETH2&EXT1&OAM port of the F3SCC
board uses the autonegotiation mode.
l In Tree mode, if the ETH2&EXT1&OAM port is connected to a slave
subrack, the system will automatically change the value of Shelf Link Mode
to Ring and multiplexes the ETH2&EXT1&OAM port to the EXT1 port.
l In Ring mode, if the ETH2&EXT1&OAM port is connected to a PC or
router, the system will automatically change the value of Shelf Link Mode to
Tree and multiplexes the ETH2&EXT1&OAM port to the ETH2 port.
When the 1800 I&II Compact (F3SCC) functions as the master
subrack:
l On a tree network, only the EXT2&CLK port on the F3SCC board
in the master subrack can be used to cascade the subracks, but the
ETH2&EXT1&OAM port cannot be used to cascade the subracks.
l On a ring network, both the EXT2&CLK and ETH2&EXT1&OAM
ports on the F3SCC board in the master subrack can be used to
cascade the subracks.

Platform
Item Specifications
Inter-subrack Supported by the ring network formed by 1800 I&II Compact (F3SCC),
communication 1800 V(F-Series), and 1800 V(Z-Series) subracks, but not supported by
protection the tree network formed by these subracks.
10.3.2 Master-Slave Shelf Cascading Scheme

This topic describes the master-slave subrack mode in terms of the communication mode,
subrack ID assignment, and associated boards.
Master-Slave Subrack Communication Mode (1800 I&II Compact F1SCC)

In master-slave subrack mode, the system control boards provide ports for communication
between subracks. Figure 10-4 shows the connection of the subracks on a ring network.
Figure 10-4 Physical connection for ring network

Platform
Port Function in the Master Shelf or Function in the Other Slave

Slave Shelf 1 Shelves (Except for Slave Shelf
1)
ETH1 Master shelf: connecting to the NMS Cascading the master shelf and slave
shelves
ETH2&O Cascading the master shelf and slave Cascading the master shelf and slave
AM shelves shelves
RM2/TM2 Cascading the master shelf and slave Performing OSC communication
shelves
NOTE
The ETH2&OAM and RM2/TM2 ports on the master shelf and slave shelf 1 cannot be used at the same
time. Specifically, if the ETH2&OAM ports on the master shelf and slave shelf 1 are used for cascading
the master shelf and slave shelves, their RM2/TM2 ports cannot be used for performing OSC
communication; if the RM2/TM2 ports on the master shelf and slave shelf 1 are used for performing
OSC communication, their ETH2&OAM ports cannot be used for cascading the master shelf and slave
shelves.
Master-Slave Shelf Communication Mode (1800 I&II Compact F3SCC)

In master-slave shelf mode, the system control boards provide ports for communication

Platform
Port Name Master Subrack Function Slave Subrack Function
ETH1 Connecting to the NMS or Closing the port

performing extended ECC
communication
EXT2&CLK Cascading the master subrack Cascading the master subrack

and slave subracks and slave subracks
ETH2&EXT1&OA Cascading the master subrack Cascading the master subrack

M and slave subracks and slave subracks
Master-Slave Subrack Communication Mode (1800 V)

In master-slave subrack mode, the system control boards provide ports for communication
NOTE
The physical master and slave subrack connection mode of 1800 V(Z-Series) is the same as that of 1800
V(F-Series). The following uses 1800 V(F-Series) as an example.

Platform
Port Name Master Subrack Function Slave Subrack Function
ETH (XCH/UXCM/ Connecting to the NMS or Closing the port

UXCME/ performing extended ECC
UXCMS01/ communication
UXCMS02)
EXT1&EXT2(XCH/ Cascading the master subrack Cascading the master subrack

UXCM/UXCME/ and slave subracks and slave subracks
UXCMS01/
UXCMS02)
EXT2&CLK N/A Cascading the master subrack

(F3SCC) and slave subracks
ETH2&EXT1&OA N/A Cascading the master subrack

M (F3SCC) and slave subracks
Subrack ID Assignment in the Master-Slave Subrack Mode

1800 I&II Compact (F1SCC): The chassis barcode and subrack ID are identified on the
chassis labels. The ID of the master subrack is 0, and the IDs of slave subracks range from 1
to 6.
1800 I&II Compact F3SCC, 1800 V(F-Series) or 1800 V(Z-Series):
l The chassis barcode and subrack ID are identified on the 1800 V(F-Series) chassis
labels. The ID of the master subrack is 0, and the IDs of slave subracks range from 1 to
7.
l The LED of the system control board (F3SCC) on the 1800 I&II Compact displays the
subrack ID. The ID of the master subrack is 0, and the IDs of slave subracks range from
1 to 7.
l The LED of the system control board (UXCMS01) on the 1800 V(Z-Series) displays the
1 to 7.
l The LED of the system control board (UXCMS02) on the 1800 V(Z-Series) displays the
1 to 19.
l Do not set duplicate subrack IDs; otherwise, an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict
will be reported. In ring networking mode, the master and slave subracks cannot be
isolated, and boards on an existing subrack will get offline if the ID of a new subrack is
duplicate with the existing subrack. In tree networking mode, if subrack IDs are
duplicate, new subracks cannot go online but existing subracks are still normal.
Associated Boards
The master-slave subrack mode involves the SCC board, the system control board in the
master subrack and that in a slave subrack provide different functions:
l The system control board in the master subrack processes alarms and overheads for both
the master subrack and the slave subracks, and grooms services, manages configuration,
adjusts the fan speed, and manages the indicators of the master subrack. In addition, the

Platform
system control board in the master subrack delivers the configuration data to each slave
subrack. All slave subracks are connected to the master subrack that is connected to the
U2000. In addition, the system control board in the master subrack provides the
protection switching function.
l The system control board in a slave subrack forwards information, detects alarms,
adjusts the fan speed, manages the indicators of the slave subrack, and provides the
protection switching function.
Comparison Between the Master-Slave Subrack Mode and the Independent

Subrack Mode
Comparison between the master-slave subrack mode and the independent subrack mode.
l In master-slave subrack mode, all subracks are displayed as one NE on the NMS and
therefore only one NE ID exists. In independent subrack mode, each subrack is displayed
as one NE. Therefore, the number of NE IDs are the same as the number of subracks.
l In master-slave subrack mode, if no network cable is connected to the port for cascading
master and slave subracks or the network cable is malfunctioning, for the 1800 I&II
Compact (F1SCC), the port will report an ETH_LINK_DOWN alarm. For the 1800 I&II
Compact (F3SCC), 1800 V(F-Series), or 1800 V(Z-Series), the port will report a
LAN_LOC alarm.
l 1800 I&II Compact (F1SCC):
– F1SCC: The OptiX OSN 1800 always supports the independent subrack mode but
supports the master-slave subrack mode only in V100R002C00 or later.
– In master-slave subrack mode, only the ETH1 port on the F1SCC board in the
master subrack can be connected to the NMS. In independent mode, both ETH1 and
ETH2&OAM ports can be connected to the NMS.
– The ETH2&OAM ports on the F1SCC boards in the master subrack and slave
subrack 1 and the ETH1 and ETH2&OAM ports on the F1SCC boards in the other
slave subracks (except for slave subrack 1) are used for cascading the master
subrack and slave subracks in master-slave subrack mode and are used for
performing extended ECC communication in independent subrack mode.
– In master-slave subrack mode, the RM2/TM2 ports on the F1SCC boards in the
master subrack (with the subrack ID being 0) and slave subrack (with the subrack
ID being 1) are used to cascade the master and slave subracks. In independent
mode, they are used in OSCs.
10.4 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs

With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and
the U2000/Web LCT server time. This allows the U2000/Web LCT to record the correct time
at which alarms occur and the correct time at which abnormal events are reported by NEs.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000/Web LCT, the time at which such
alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the time
when the alarm is generated is incorrect. This may affect fault locating because the time when
the alarm is generated is recorded in the U2000/Web LCT. In addition, the time when the
abnormal events are generated is recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the accuracy of
NE time, the U2000/Web LCT provides a time synchronization scheme with the following
servers: the U2000 server and the standard NTP server.

Platform
NOTE
The Web LCT improves the accuracy of NE time by synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time.
l If synchronization with the U2000 server is used, all NEs use the U2000 server time as
the standard time, and can be synchronized with the U2000 server manually or
automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the time of the workstation or computer
system on which the U2000 server resides. This scheme features easy operation, and is
applicable to a network that requires relatively low time accuracy.
l If synchronization with the standard NTP server is used, all NEs and the U2000 are
synchronized with the standard NTP server automatically. The NTP server can be the
U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme is applicable to a network that
requires relatively high time accuracy.
NTP Network Application

Figure 10-7 shows a network in which NTP is used to ensure synchronization across the
network.
Figure 10-7 Network using NTP to ensure synchronization
As shown in Figure 10-7, the equipment in the network can be classified into three
categories:
l The highest-level time server: the 0-level time server

l The middle-level time server: the 1- or 2-level time server that obtains time information
from the higher-level time server and provides time information for the lower-level time
server

Platform
l Clients: obtaining time information only

In application, the server and clients can be configured as follows:
l Choose the NMS server as the time server for NEs. The NMS server can be set as the
highest-level time server, or set to obtain time information from other time servers.
l NEs can be set as the client, obtaining time information from the specified time server.
10.5 Interfaces Between the NMS and OSS

The U2000 provides multiple types of northbound interfaces (NBIs) for connecting to
different types of operations support systems (OSSs).
OSSs are software systems upon which the following management functions of the equipment
are based and provided to carriers: performance management, inventory management, service
management, and fault management. The network layer of the OSS is above the U2000 layer.
Usually, the OSS manages equipment through U2000s. The U2000s communicate with the
OSS through NBIs. The U2000 supports multiple NBIs such as TL1, XML, CORBA, SFTP,
and SNMP to implement fast integration with the OSS provided by the carrier.
Introduction to OSS
OSSs are independent software systems that are used to enhance the work efficiency of
equipment maintenance engineers. According to their different functions, OSSs are classified
into service assurance system, service provisioning system, inventory management system,
and service diagnosis system.
OSSs reduce maintenance costs and enhance maintenance efficiency. Table 10-4 lists the
features of different OSSs.
Table 10-4 Features of different OSSs

OSS Feature Description
Service Monitoring and Provides unified ports for performance

assurance assurance of the system measurement and supports performance
system performance statistics reports for various services.
Supports the ability to report equipment
alarms in real time, and filter and clear
equipment alarms.
Service Fast service Supports unified provisioning flow for

provisioning provisioning various services and screens the differences
system between equipment provided by different
vendors.
Inventory Unified resource Implements the inventory query for network

management management wide resources and the resource change
system notification.

Platform
NBI Type
The U2000 provides various NBIs to the network management layer. This helps the U2000 to
connect to different NMSs. Table 10-5 lists the U2000 NBIs provided to the network
management layer.
Table 10-5 List of U2000 NBIs

Interface Type Function
XML NBI Through the XML NBI, the U2000 provides unified
management for alarms, performance, inventory, and service
provisioning to the OSS. This NBI supports router, Metro,
transport, and access domain equipment.
CORBA NBI Through the CORBA NBI, the U2000 provides unified
management for alarms to the OSS. This NBI supports router,
Metro, transport, and access domain equipment.
Through the CORBA NBI, the U2000 provides management
for performance, inventory, and service provisioning for
Metro and transport domain equipment.
SNMP alarm NBI Through the SNMP alarm NBI, the U2000 provides
management for alarms to the OSS. This NBI supports router,
Metro, transport, and access domain equipment.
Performance Text NBI Through the Performance Text NBI, the U2000 provides the
function for exporting performance data to the specified FTP
server for analysis by the OSS.

Platform
Product Description 11 Operation and Maintenance
11 Operation and Maintenance
About This Chapter
Routine equipment maintenance and troubleshooting are essential to ensure that a network
runs properly. The OSN 1800 provides strong operation and maintenance capabilities.
Table 11-1 Functions for deployment and configuration

Function Description
Features of l Simplified Installation and Commissioning of Hardware: A

installation chassis has a simple structure, and is easy to install. The various
function boards are configured with the commissioning
indicators to show the board running status and the receiving
status of the optical power. The on-site installation and
commissioning engineers can conveniently check the working
status of the equipment in time.
l Legible Wavelength Information Label: The small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) modules on the OTU boards can be identified
by the label of the wavelength number. The type of an optical
module can be identified by the color of its puller.
l Fiber/Cable Port Safety Design: Different fibers and cables of
the product use different ports. The ports are very different in
appearance. In addition, cable labels are used to indicate the
types of the cables. Therefore, the installation position of every
cable is clear. The cable ports of the equipment are designed to
prevent mis-insertion. The installation of cables cannot be
complete if the cables are inserted reversely or improperly. If a
cable is inserted improperly, no damage may occur in the
equipment even when the equipment is powered on. In this
way, no serious damage may be generated.
Automatic search for Supports the fiber auto-discovery function on the NMS.
optical fibers

Platform
End-to-End service When configuring an end-to-end service, you can create a service
configuration trail that traverses different layers and directly create a client
service trail. You do not need to know how the service grooming
between the OTN/SDH/Packets layers is implemented or create an
ODUk/VC-3/VC-4/VC-12/Packets server trail at each layer. After
you create a client service, the client service trails at different
OTN/SDH/Packets layers are generated automatically. This
simplifies the service configuration process.
Tunable Wavelengths OTU boards and OTN line boards support tunable wavelengths on
the WDM side.
Table 11-2 Routine maintenance functions

Online monitoring The OSN 1800 series have the capability of monitoring
performance of WDM-side and client-side signals, facilitating
equipment maintenance.
Alarm and l Provides audible and visual alarms warn of emergencies to help
performance network administrators take prompt action.
management l Provides running status indicators and alarm indicators on all
boards to help administrators locate and handle faults quickly.
l Provides the alarm input and output function to facilitate alarm
collection for external devices.
l Dynamically monitors the operation and alarm status of all NEs
using the NMS.
l Detects alarms and performance of the active and standby
system control board.
l Supports 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring
events.
RMON Monitors data from different network segments on a transmission

network. RMON supplements simple Ethernet performance
management tools, and can be used on a wide range of networks.
Voltage check Measures input voltages and detects undervoltage and overvoltage
states.

Platform
Automatic laser l SDH single-mode optical ports and the client-side optical ports
shutdown (ALS) of OTU boards and OTN tributary boards support the ALS
function.
l Packet Ethernet boards support the setting of upper threshold or
lower threshold of input optical power.
NOTE
The ALS function supported by single-mode optical ports is different from
that supported by the client-side optical ports of OTU boards and OTN
tributary boards. For details, see 6.12 Automatic Optical Power
Management.
Port impedance Supports the query of port impedance on the NMS.

query
Optical module Allows the NMS to query information about optical modules,
information query including single-mode/multi-mode, rate level, supplier, production
date, and wavelength.
Power consumption l Computes system power consumption.

control l Monitors the total power consumption of an NE, and reports an
alarm if the total power consumption exceeds the power
consumption threshold of the NE.
l Supports the query of the power consumption of an NE/board
by using the NMS.
Port information Queries communication protocols in use, status, functions, and

query names of ports used for external communication and physical ports
connected to networks.
Jitter Suppression With a jitter suppression unit between the optical receive module
Function and the optical transmit module, the OSN 1800 has excellent jitter
suppression function.
Optical Doctor Performs online OSNR monitoring, performance monitoring, and

System performance optimization for 10G and 100G/200G wavelengths.
Table 11-3 Fault diagnosis functions

ETH OAM Uses OAM protocol packets to detect and monitor the connectivity
and performance of service trails. The process does not affect
services.
NOTE
The ETH OAM in packet mode and TDM mode is supported.

Platform
MPLS-TP OAM l MPLS-TP OAM can detect, identify, and locate faults on packet
switched networks. Working with other protection schemes,
MPLS-TP OAM notifies NEs of the faults, so the NEs can
implement protection switching.
l MPLS-TP OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW
OAM.
One-click data l Provides a one-click data collection function for fault data to
collection reduce data collection time before service recovery.
l Users can collect fault data selectively and can end a collection
process manually.
Loopback Service boards support inloops and outloops to facilitate fault

location.
PRBS l An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used as an

instrument to transmit and receive unframed services in order to
analyze whether service paths are faulty.
l An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used to analyze
itself or the entire network.
l The PRBS function substitutes for a test instrument during
deployment or fault location.
Warm/Cold resets System control, switching, and timing boards and service boards
support warm and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect services.
Hot swap l Service boards, system control, switching, and timing boards,
and fan boards support hot swapping.
l Pluggable optical modules can be hot-swapped.
l Service cables and auxiliary cables can be hot-swapped.
NSF NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. When the

control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures
that the data services are not interrupted, ensuring transmission of
the key services on the network.
Port mirroring Packet boards and TDM boards support port mirroring that enables
Ethernet service analysis and service fault diagnosis without
affecting the services.
Port traffic mirroring Packet boards support port traffic mirroring that enables Ethernet
service analysis and service fault diagnosis without affecting the
services.

Platform
Table 11-4 Functions for upgrades

Upgrade and loading l Supports in-service upgrades and loading of board software and
of board software NE software.
and NE software l Supports remote loading of board software and field
programmable gate array (FPGA).
l Supports a complex programmable logical device (CPLD) in-
service upgrade on OTN boards.
l Supports error-proof loading and resumable loading.
Hot patch loading Supports the hot patch loading function. Running software can be
upgraded without being interrupted.
Software package Software package loading enables NE and board software to be

loading loaded to an NE at a time. OSN 1800 supports automatic
customized package loading and forcible customized package
loading.
11.1 Optical Doctor System

Huawei OTN equipment supports the Optical Doctor (OD) system. The OD system provides
for intelligent end-to-end, refined, and digital management of the optical layer on a WDM
network. Through centralized configuration for optical-layer parameters, the OD system
supports automatic monitoring, analysis, commissioning, and optimization of network
performance.
11.2 Fiber Doctor System
The fiber doctor (FD) system is used to monitor and manage line fibers in a network. By
precisely detecting the fiber connection status, the FD system helps maintenance personnel
analyze the quality of fiber connectors and splicing points, which facilitates quick fiber issue
diagnosis.
11.3 Automatic Commissioning of Optical Power
Automatic commissioning of optical power (automatic optical-layer commissioning) can help
implement automatic site deployment and automatic service provisioning.
11.4 Supervision and Communication Module
The system control and communication (SCC) unit is integrated in the UXCL/UXC board. It
provides system monitoring and management functions. The system control and
communication interfaces are present on the control/cross-connect/clock integrated board and
AUX board.
11.5 Service Package Configuration
Service package makes the configuration operation easily and fast.
11.6 Service Auto-adaption
The OSN 1800 I enhanced chassis supports the service auto-adaption function that
automatically adapts to the received services without any manual configuration.
11.7 Intelligent Fiber
OTU boards of the product provide the intelligent fiber (IF) function. With the IF function, an
OTU board can automatically insert maintenance code streams to the client-side optical ports
on the downstream board in case of an input fault on the client or WDM side of the upstream

Platform
board. In this manner, the fault information can be transferred to the client side of the
downstream board.
11.8 Cascading NEs
NEs can be cascaded by using network cables. Then, the NEs can communicate network
management information by means of extended ECC.
11.9 TP-Assist Solution
Transport packet assist (TP-Assist) allows a packet network to be efficiently planned, quickly
deployed, and easily maintained like an SDH network.
11.10 MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP OAM provides various fault detection and locating capabilities.
11.11 ETH OAM
This section describes the ETH OAM function, which includes Ethernet service OAM and
Ethernet port OAM.
11.12 RMON
RMON defines a serial of statistic formats and functions to realize the data exchange between
the control stations and detection stations that complies with the RMON standards.
11.13 Port Mirroring
For the existing complex networks, equipment has already provided various effective fault
diagnosis methods. However, the methods require path overheads or even interrupt service.
Therefore, a fast fault diagnosis method that does not affect services is urgently required. Port
mirroring effectively addresses this requirement.
11.14 PRBS Test(1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I Enhanced)
If no commissioning instruments are available in the network maintenance phase or on a new
network where no services are deployed, you can perform a self-transmit and self-receive test
using the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) function to check whether links on each
section are normal by performing loopbacks section by section.
11.15 PRBS Test(1800 I&II Compact)
Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 1800 I II compact provides the pseudo random bit sequence
(PRBS) error detection function. On the U2000, the meter board can be configured to send
PRBS test signals, and the client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently
transmit the PRBS test signals. In this way, you can perform the bit error test of the
transmission link without attaching a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
11.16 Loopback
Loopbacks provide an effective means of troubleshooting a network, by verifying a service on
a segment-by-segment basis.
11.17 Hot Patches
The product supports the hot patch technology (the hot patch can be loaded locally or
remotely).
11.18 Software Package Loading
Software upgrade by package loading refers to a process in which NE software and board
software of an NE are loaded (locally or remotely) at a time to replace the original software.
This loading mode avoids the repetitive loading actions for the boards one by one and
therefore improves the upgrade efficiently.
11.19 Automatically Customized Package Loading

Platform
When detecting that the storage space is insufficient during package loading upon an upgrade,
the system automatically deletes the files corresponding to the offline boards or subracks,
such as OSN 810 and OSN 850, all TDM boards, and slave subracks equipped with F3SCC.
11.1 Optical Doctor System

Huawei OTN equipment supports the Optical Doctor (OD) system. The OD system provides
for intelligent end-to-end, refined, and digital management of the optical layer on a WDM
network. Through centralized configuration for optical-layer parameters, the OD system
supports automatic monitoring, analysis, commissioning, and optimization of network
performance.
Challenges for WDM Network O&M

As WDM networks adopt higher transmission rates and become meshed, reliable network
maintenance plays a more important role. An easier-to-use and more professional operation
and maintenance (O&M) tool is required.
Currently, WDM networks are facing the following difficulties in the deployment,
commissioning, configuration, and network maintenance phases:
l Lack of quick and accurate OSNR monitoring methods:
After the network rate increases to 100 Gbit/s or higher, the original spectrum
monitoring method cannot quickly and accurately monitor the OSNR of a system. It is a
great challenge and a trend to develop an online OSNR monitoring tool for network
maintenance.
l Lack of reliable and quick optical-layer O&M methods:
On meshed networks, WDM services become more flexible, and frequent service
creation and deletion make network commissioning and maintenance more complex.
Traditional manual OSNR monitoring cannot address WDM network development
requirements from the following aspects:
– Configuration is complex.
When network optical-layer performance needs to be monitored or optimized,
configuration needs to be performed for each site on the network, which is time-
consuming and costly. In addition, some configuration items are widely dispersed
and therefore are easily neglected. As a result, commissioning engineers have to
perform a network-wide check site by site, leading to low efficiency.
– Network performance deterioration cannot be detected in a timely manner.
Optical power fluctuation caused by fiber aging, component aging, wavelength
adding or dropping, or external environment cannot be discovered by manual
monitoring in a timely manner. Network-wide data collection and analysis require a
long time and high costs.
– Manual optimization is inefficient.
When optical-layer performance needs to be optimized, fault points and
optimization points have to be manually identified and optimization has to be
manually performed span by span. On a meshed network, optimization of one link
may cause power fluctuation on other links and as a result the other links have to be
also optimized. The optimization is time-consuming and complex.
With the development of WDM technologies and the change of network topology, an
effective network O&M tool is required.

Platform
Functions of the OD System

The OD system supports online OSNR monitoring for 100G, 200G wavelengths, making the
OSNR monitoring of 100G, 200G wavelengths as convenient as that of 10G wavelengths.
This greatly facilitates routine maintenance and makes it easy to upgrade 10G networks to
100G, 200G networks.
Figure 11-1 Online OSNR monitoring using the OD system
The online OSNR monitoring provided by the OD system has the following features:
l Simple operations
The OSNR monitoring function is integrated into the U2000. It can be performed by
directly operating the U2000. The virtual meter provides graphical display of the
monitored OSNR information, without using other auxiliary devices or complex
operations.
l High detection precision
The detection precision is better than that of traditional 10G OSNR detection.
l Wide range of monitored wavelengths
All site types, all wavelengths including 10G, 100G, 200G can implement online OSNR
monitoring.
In addition, the OD system can be used to perform O&M of the optical layer on a WDM
network, as described below.

Platform
Figure 11-2 O&M of the optical layer on a WDM network
l Centralized configuration for network-wide monitoring

The OD system supports centralized configuration for optical-layer performance
monitoring parameters, greatly saving labor costs.
l Automatic monitoring of optical-layer performance
The OD system can automatically monitor network-wide optical-layer performance
without using any meters. It can automatically detect the channels with abnormal
performance.
l Automatic optimization of optical-layer performance
Based on the performance data of each channel, the OD system can automatically adjust
the optical power of each channel so that the channel works in the optimal state.
l End-to-end (E2E) graphical display of optical-layer performance data
The OD system graphically displays link performance, facilitating status query and fault
isolation.
To sum up, the OD system can achieve OSNR monitoring of high-rate WDM networks, quick
monitoring deployment, monitoring, optimization, and analysis of E2E optical-layer
performance. It improves wavelength-level optical-layer O&M capabilities and provides
services along the lifecycle of WDM networks, simplifying the network O&M and saving the
operating expense (OPEX).
System Composition
The OD system requires the interoperation between the hardware and software.
The hardware monitors and reports optical-layer performance in real time, performs
corresponding adjustments, and is uniformly scheduled by the software. The software
provides user-friendly GUIs, supports network-wide configuration, provides visualized
reports, and achieves centralized control and uniform scheduling.
l Hardware
The hardware required by the OD system includes the following boards installed on the
NE:
– Optical amplifier (OA) boards, spectrum analysis boards, optical wavelength
conversion board supporting light sensor (LS OTU boards for short): They are used

Platform
to obtain optical-layer performance data, monitor all optical signals in a centralized

way without interrupting services, and report the monitored optical-layer
performance data to the OD system.
NOTE
Currently, some OTU boards support LS. When wavelength conversion is performed at the
transmit end, the low-frequency pilot-tone LS signals and LS overheads can be loaded, which are
used by the receive end to identify and detect optical performance data. Some OA boards can
directly report optical performance data (LS OA boards for short) after detecting LS signals.
Therefore, optical performance data does not need to be reported by spectrum analysis boards.
Table 11-5 describes the typical deployment rules for each type of boards.
Table 11-5 Typical deployment rules for boards
Typical Configuration MCA Board

Deployment
OTU Board OA Board
Scenario 1: Only Non-LS OTU LS OA OPM8 must be

non-LS OTU deployed on all OA
exists. Non-LS OA boards (including LS
LS OA+Non-LS OA boards).
OA
Scenario 2: Only LS OTU LS OA OPM8 is not

LS OTU exists. mandatory.
LS OTU Non-LS OA OPM8 is mandatory.
LS OTU LS OA+Non-LS OPM8 must be

OA deployed on all non-
LS OA boards.
Scenario 3: Both Non-LS OTU LS OA OPM8 must be

non-LS OTU +LS OTU deployed on all OA
and LS OTU Non-LS OA boards (including LS
exist. LS OA+Non-LS OA boards).
OA
– Gain-adjustable OA boards: They are used to adjust optical signal performance

parameters.
– Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) boards: They are used for inter-site
communication.
l Software
The OD system is integrated in the U2000. Users can deliver network-wide performance
monitoring configuration commands using the U2000. After obtaining the optical-layer
performance data reported by each NE, the OD system analyzes the performance data
and graphically displays the analysis result. Based on the configuration policy, the OD
system instructs the OA boards to perform adjustments and optimize optical-layer
performance.
The following figure shows the interoperation between the hardware and software of the OD
system.

Platform
Figure 11-3 Interoperation between the hardware and software of the OD system
The user checks for

abnormal events and
6 performance data.
7 Optimization
is started. The user configures
1
the OD function.
8 5
The OD system triggers
optimization of channels with The OD system obtains optical
abnormal performance. performance data from the
equipment and graphically displays it. 2 The OD system delivers
configuration commands to
4 the equipment.
The equipment reports abnormal events
and performance data to the OD system.
3 The OD system accurately

detects OSNR and other
performance data through
the interoperation between
hardware and software.
The hardware of the NE in

each OMS is involved in the
optical performance query
and adjustment.
Mode 1: An MCA board is used to query and adjust the optical Mode 2: An LS OA board is used to query and adjust the optical
performance. performance.
MCA MCA
OTU
OTU
OTU Non-LS OTU OTU LS OTU Non-LS OA LS OA
NOTE
The OD preferentially selects the MCA boards to query and adjust the optical performance.
11.2 Fiber Doctor System

The fiber doctor (FD) system is used to monitor and manage line fibers in a network. By
precisely detecting the fiber connection status, the FD system helps maintenance personnel
analyze the quality of fiber connectors and splicing points, which facilitates quick fiber issue
diagnosis.
OTDR Meter: Traditional Fiber Quality Monitoring

In a WDM system, fiber issues, such as fiber aging, fiber damages, fiber coiling, large-radius
bending, and large pulling stress, may cause large fiber attenuation and high BERs that will
consequently impair network operating.
In addition to fault diagnosis, traditional optical time domain reflectometers (OTDRs) can be
used to measure the fiber length, attenuation introduced in fiber transmission, and fiber
connector attenuation. OTDRs are therefore widely used in the fiber engineering and network
deployment phases.

Platform
Figure 11-4 Schematic diagram of the OTDR detection application
Fiber performance testing is classified into acceptance testing and maintenance testing based
on the test implementation phase. Acceptance testing is performed when links are offline.
With the wide application of fibers, maintenance testing has become a vital and usual part of
the process. Regularly performed maintenance testing helps detect the fiber performance in a
network in a timely manner. If traditional OTDRs are used to perform fiber performance
testing, the testing needs to be performed on site and services need to be interrupted.
Online fiber status detection methods that can achieve remote, online, accurate, and quick
fiber status detection are necessary to improve maintenance efficiency and reduce
maintenance costs.
Line Fiber Quality Monitoring Function of the FD System

Using built-in probe lasers on the TNF1AST4 board to emit probe light, the FD system
detects insertion loss changes and change occurring positions in fibers based on the Rayleigh
scattering and Fresnel reflection principles. The FD system then reports the detected data to
the NMS to implement the following functions:
l Provides visualized OTDR meter-like GUIs on the NMS.
l Supports remote monitoring on fiber quality in unidirectional or bidirectional mode.
l Supports quality detection for fibers within different length ranges based on the
monitoring mode and detection parameter settings.
l Saves and compares historical detection results.
l Displays the length and attenuation of a specific fiber span on the entire network.
l Proactively reports alarms to the NMS and indicates the position of a fiber cut.

Platform
Figure 11-5 Schematic diagram of the FD detection application
The line fiber quality monitoring function of the FD system helps maintenance personnel
quickly discover and rectify fiber quality issues, ensuring normal network operations.
Application Scenario of the Line Fiber Quality Monitoring Function
Table 11-6 Application scenario of the line fiber quality monitoring function
Board Type Scenario
TNF1AST4 This board is mainly used for fiber quality monitoring and fault diagnosis
during O&M. It provides the following functions:
l Checks fiber quality before deployment commissioning.
l Performs real-time monitoring during network running and checks
fiber status.If a fiber cut is detected, a FIBER_BREAK_POS alarm
will be proactively reported to the NMS, indicating the position of the
fiber cut.
l Locates fault points when a fiber cut occurs and a MUT_LOS alarm is
reported by FIU board, or verifies fiber recovery status after a fiber cut
is removed.
Components of the FD System

The FD system requires the interoperation between hardware and software.
The hardware emits probe light to obtain fiber performance data, which is then uniformly
scheduled by the software. The software provides user-friendly GUIs to set detection modes
in various scenarios.
l Hardware
The TNF1AST4 boards support the line fiber quality monitoring function. They emit
probe light to obtain fiber performance data, receive detection results, and report the
obtained fiber performance data to the FD system.
l Software

Platform
The FD system is integrated on the U2000. After users issue detection commands on the
U2000, the FD system receives the performance data reported by equipment and
graphically displays the data.
The following figure shows the interoperation between the hardware and software of the FD
system.
11.3 Automatic Commissioning of Optical Power

Automatic commissioning of optical power (automatic optical-layer commissioning) can help
implement automatic site deployment and automatic service provisioning.
Figure 11-6 shows how automatic commissioning of optical power is implemented.

Platform
Figure 11-6 Flowchart for automatic commissioning of optical power
Automatic commissioning of optical power has the following characteristics:
l Remote commissioning personnel can use the NMS or Web LCT to exchange
information with NEs, and start remote automatic commissioning for NEs.
l Topology relationships can be automatically identified and established between NEs.
l OA commissioning communication is supported (only by TNF2OBU boards) when no
OSC is configured.

Platform
l Automatic commissioning of optical power can be initiated in the specified direction.

l Hybrid commissioning is supported. Specifically, manual commissioning can be
performed for sites and spans where automatic commissioning conditions are not met,
and automatic commissioning can be performed for sites where automatic
commissioning conditions are met.
l Commissioning information of each NE can be displayed in real time during
commissioning.
l The commissioning results can be displayed after commissioning is complete.
11.4 Supervision and Communication Module

The system control and communication (SCC) unit is integrated in the UXCL/UXC board. It
provides system monitoring and management functions. The system control and
communication interfaces are present on the control/cross-connect/clock integrated board and
AUX board.
The SCC unit collects state information, alarm and performance parameters from the
functional modules of each board. Then the SCC unit converts, processes and stores the
information and parameters. At the same time, it sends the control and administration
information to other functional modules of the NE. Table 11-7 describes the type of control
and communication ports that the UXCL/UXC and AUX boards provide.
Table 11-7 System control and communication interfaces

Interface Description
OAM The operation, administration and maintenance port. The RS45

interface is provided to communicate with the terminal through the
public packet switched network.
DCC Provides the data communication channel (DCC) of the supervisory

communication link.
Control and Communicates with other boards in the shelf, collects performance
communication data, and delivers the configuration.
Qx The network management communication port.
The SCC unit monitors the running status of the boards in the NE. The main monitoring
parameters are as follows:
l Input optical power
l Output optical power
l Current of the laser
l SDH service performance
l Packet performance
l FEC performance
l Ethernet performance
l OTN performance

Platform
11.5 Service Package Configuration

Service package makes the configuration operation easily and fast.
When an NE of the OptiX OSN 1800 series is powered on for the first time, by default, the
service initially configured on the board. On site, the hardware installation personnel only
need to commission the optical power to the normal value. After the equipment is running
normally, according to the application scenario of the NE, the user can remotely issue
commands on the NMS to configure the service on the board of the NE.
In addition, the NMS software for the product provides the quick configuration wizard with
which the NE time synchronization and performance monitoring can be configured. In the
case of the typical configuration, the quick configuration wizard enables you to complete the
one-touch service configuration simply by selecting the service package.
The TNF1LQM, TNF1LQM2 and LWX2 boards of the OptiX OSN 1800 series support the
following one-touch service application scenarios:
l GE transparent transmission
l GE/STM-1 hybrid transmission
11.6 Service Auto-adaption

The OSN 1800 I enhanced chassis supports the service auto-adaption function that
automatically adapts to the received services without any manual configuration.
When the TMA1UXCL system control board is interconnected to the peer NE through the
line-side ports OUT1/IN1 and OUT2/IN2, the local NE can automatically adapt to the
services of the board on the peer NE. Then, the DCN automatically becomes available, so that
the NMS can manage the NEs in a centralized manner.
NOTE
l The OUT1/IN1 and OUT2/IN2 ports are on the A1PSND2, A1SLND, and A1EX2 logical boards,
which also support service auto-adaption.
l When the peer board receives the OTU2/OTU2e/STM-64/STM-16/10GE LAN service, the type of
the received service on the TMA1UXCL board automatically adapts to the same service type.
Enabling Service Auto-adaption

l New site deployment
When a device is powered on for the first time during site deployment, service auto-
adaption is enabled by default after optical fibers are properly connected and the device
and boards are powered on and running properly.
l Replacement with new spare parts
If the spare TMA1UXCL system control board is a new board, service auto-adaption is
enabled by default after the board is powered on and running properly.
l Replacement with reused spare parts
If no logical board is configured in slot 31 for the original TMA1UXCL system control
board, service auto-adaption is automatically enabled after the spare board is inserted,
powered on, and running properly.

Platform
If a logical board is configured in slot 31 for the original TMA1UXCL system control
board, after the spare board is inserted, powered on, and running properly, you need to
enable the service auto-adaption function by pressing the LAMP button on the spare
board within 10 minutes starting from the time when the STAT indicator is on. The
details are as follows:
a. Press and hold the LAMP button on the TMA1UXCL system control board for 15
to 30 seconds, and then release it. The NE enters the service auto-adaption
debugging state and the STAT, PROG, SRV, and ALM indicators are steady red.
b. After entering the debugging state, press and hold the LAMP button for 2 to 4
seconds within 10 seconds, and then release the button for 2 to 4 seconds. Repeat
this operation for three times. The device starts to clear the database of the spare
parts, perform a cold reset on the board, and enable service auto-adaption.
When the database data of the spare part is being cleared, the STAT, PROG, SRV,
and ALM indicators blink red quickly (on for 300 ms and off for 300 ms).
When the service auto-adaption is in process, the STAT, PROG, SRV, and ALM
indicators blink orange quickly (on for 300 ms and off for 300 ms).
l Resets on the system control board
After the logical board in slot 31 for the TMA1UXCL system control board is deleted, a
cold reset is performed on the system control board or the system control board is reset
after a power failure. In this case, the service auto-adaption function is automatically
enabled.
After the service auto-adaption succeeds, the DCN becomes available. The NEs are displayed
in green on the NMS. You can manage the NEs through the NMS.
NOTE
If an R_LOS, PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE (the optical module cannot be detected), or

LSR_NO_FITED (the optical module is not installed) alarm exists on the NE, service auto-adaption will
not be performed.
If no R_LOS, PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE, or LSR_NO_FITED alarm exists on the NE, check the
indicator status to determine whether service auto-adaption is in process. If the indicators are still in
service auto-adaption state for more than 20 minutes after the function is enabled, check whether the
optical module or optical fiber is properly connected. If yes, rectify the fault and then re-start service
auto-adaption.
Table 11-8 Description of indicators in service auto-adaption state
Indicator Color Status Description
STAT/ Red On The NE enters the service auto-

PROG/SRV/ adaption debugging state.
ALM
Red Blinking Blinking quickly (on for 300 ms
and off for 300 ms): The
database data is being cleared.
Orange Blinking Blinking quickly (on for 300 ms

and off for 300 ms): Service
auto-adaption is in process.

Platform
11.7 Intelligent Fiber

OTU boards of the product provide the intelligent fiber (IF) function. With the IF function, an
OTU board can automatically insert maintenance code streams to the client-side optical ports
on the downstream board in case of an input fault on the client or WDM side of the upstream
board. In this manner, the fault information can be transferred to the client side of the
downstream board.
The configuration of optical port is shown in Figure 11-7 (a) and Figure 11-8 (a).
NOTE
The OTU board without service convergence function is an exception of the OTU board with service
convergence function. The IF function of the two types of boards is implemented in the same way.
The IF function is implemented using the following methods:

l IF function enabled
– When no optical signals are input to the receive optical port on the client side of the
opposite OTU board, if the IF function at the corresponding transmit optical port on
the client side of the local OTU board is enabled, the transmit optical port on the
local board automatically inserts maintenance code streams, which will make the
downstream link down, as shown in the Figure 11-7 (b).
– When no optical signals are input to the receive optical port on the WDM side of
the OTU board or a fault is generated at the ODU or OTU layer, all transmit optical
ports with the IF function enabled on the client side of the OTU board insert
maintenance code streams, which will make the downstream link down, as shown
in Figure 11-7 (c).

Platform
Figure 11-7 IF function diagram
NOTE
l The maintenance code streams refer to the standard code streams such as 10B_ERR. The inserted
maintenance code streams vary with the client-side services. Because only GE services on the
OptiX OSN 1800 support the IF function, the maintenance code stream is 10B_ERR.
l The ODUk-layer faults include ODUk_AIS, ODUk_OCI, and ODUk_LCK and the OTUk-layer
faults include OTUk_AIS, OTUk_LOF, and OTUk_LOM.
l IF function disabled
– When no optical signals are input to the receive optical port on the client side of the
opposite OTU board, if the IF function at the corresponding transmit optical port on
the client side of the local OTU board is disabled, the transmit optical port on the
local board inserts IDLE code streams, which will not make the downstream link
down, as shown in Figure 11-8 (b).
– When no optical signals are input to the receive optical port on the WDM side of
the OTU board or a fault is generated at the ODU or OTU layer, all transmit optical
ports with the IF function disabled on the client side of the OTU board insert IDLE
code streams, which will not make the downstream link down, as shown in Figure
11-8 (c).

Platform
Figure 11-8 IF function diagram
11.8 Cascading NEs

NEs can be cascaded by using network cables. Then, the NEs can communicate network
management information by means of extended ECC.
In some special scenarios, a network or an NE is isolated on a network and no fiber
connection is established between the network or NE and a gateway NE. In this case, NEs can
be cascaded by using network cables to achieve communication between the network or NE
and the gateway NE by means of extended ECC rather than DCC.
As shown in Figure 11-9:
l The ETH1 port on the SCC board of the gateway NE (NE 1) is connected to a network
port on the NMS computer by using a network cable so that the NMS can manage all the
connected NEs.
l The ETH2&0AM port on the SCC board of the gateway NE (NE 1) is connected to the
ETH1 or ETH2&OAM port on the SCC board in NE 2 to achieve communication
between NEs.

Platform
To cascade multiple NEs, connect the network ports of the NEs by using network cables. A
maximum of eight non-gateway NEs can be cascaded.
Figure 11-9 Diagram of cascading NEs
11.9 TP-Assist Solution

Transport packet assist (TP-Assist) allows a packet network to be efficiently planned, quickly
deployed, and easily maintained like an SDH network.
11.9.1 Background
With the explosive growth of data traffic, services carried on MANs and mobile bearer
networks have changed from traditional voice services to data services (mainly, video,
Internet, and VoIP services). MANs and mobile bearer networks, themselves, have also
evolved from mainly SDH networks to mainly packet networks. However, compared with
SDH technologies, packet transport technologies have many disadvantages in performance
monitoring and fault diagnosis, bringing huge O&M challenges to packet networks
(especially large-scaled packet networks).
The O&M challenges include:
l How to quickly plan and deploy large-scale packet services
Packet services are much more complex than SDH services. Especially, packet networks
have various networking modes, with each using different transport technologies and
different packet forwarding modes. This requires that O&M personnel be highly skilled
and exercise caution during configuration. In addition, it is more complex to verify
packet services than to verify SDH services, which makes it more difficult to deploy and
commission packet services.
l How to monitor packet service performance
Unlike SDH services wherein containers at each level have dedicated overhead bytes for
performance monitoring, packet services have no corresponding overheads. How to

Platform
implement delicacy monitoring over each service and each service level is a huge
challenge.
l How to quickly locate a fault
Packet networks and services on the packet networks are more complex than SDH
networks and services on the SDH networks. In addition, fault isolation performance on
packet networks is poorer than on SDH networks. For example, once a broadcast storm
occurs on a packet network, the entire broadcast domain will be affected. Therefore,
O&M personnel must be capable of quickly locating and rectify the fault.
To handle these difficulties and challenges, the packet network O&M measures must evolve
in a network-centered, service-centered, and intelligent manner.
Table 11-9 Packet network O&M trend

O&M Trend Main Requirements
Network-centered Conduct service configuration, monitoring,

and fault diagnosis at the network level,
instead of on a per-NE basis.
Service-centered Quickly deploy and commission services.

Clearly display service paths and views.
Conduct monitoring by service, allowing
the impacts that each feature has on services
to be displayed in a real-time manner.
Intelligent Implement intelligent fault diagnosis.

Decrease manual intervention and improves
O&M automation.
Allow batch operations based on services or
templates.
11.9.2 TP-Assist O&M System and Functions

In compliance with the network-centered, service-centered, and intelligent packet network
O&M trend, Huawei promotes a brand new O&M system based on the TP-Assist solution.
The O&M system covers the entire O&M process from network planning to fault diagnosis.

Platform
Figure 11-10 TP-Assist O&M system
Table 11-10 Functions of the TP-Assist O&M system

Function Description License Purpose
Control
Professional planning service and Experienced planning expert teams – Improves

planning tools provide professional planning planning
service. efficiency.
Planning tool UniSTAR Designer, Improves
embedded with the common planning
network HLD/LLD design accuracy.
templates and device/board/
interface capacity parameter
templates, is used. This tool is
applicable to various network
planning scenarios including new
network construction, network
expansion, network migration, and
service adjustment.
End-to-end service deployment Deploys Ethernet services and None Quick service
hybrid services in an end-to-end configuration
manner. Improves
Deploys Ethernet services, and configuration
hybrid services in an end-to-end accuracy.
manner.
Deploys services across microwave
and optical fibers in an end-to-end
manner.
Deploys ERPS in an end-to-end
manner.

Platform

Control
Automatic deployment of alarm Deploying ETH OAM or MPLS- None Avoids extra
management with service TP OAM when deploying Ethernet OAM
deployment services and MPLS tunnels in an deployment
end-to-end manner. operations.
Allows the NE
to automatically
report alarms
when a service
fault occurs.
One-click service connectivity test Supports one-click service None Quick

connectivity test for Ethernet commissioning
services and MPLS tunnels that are Lowers project
deployed in an end-to-end manner. acceptance
costs.
One-click service performance test Supports one-click packet loss, None Quick
delay, and delay jitter tests for commissioning
Ethernet services and MPLS Lowers project
tunnels that are deployed in an end- acceptance
to-end manner. costs.
Automatic tests with no need for Simulating the Smartbits function, None Quick
any instrument supports delay, throughput and commissioning
packet loss ratio tests for services. Lowers project
acceptance
costs.
Performance Network-level The performance management None Optimized

monitoring and performance system (PMS) embedded in the monitoring
measurement monitoring and U2000 supports unified monitoring points, rich
measurement and measurement of any service
system measurement object and monitoring
performance indicator in the methods
network. Visualized
It supports 24-hour service status monitoring;
pre-warning and monitoring, and network-level
provides equipment performance and service-
threshold-crossing alarms and centered
network performance threshold- monitoring
crossing alarms.
360-degree Allows all-service-layer (port, Yes

traffic statistics MPLS tunnel, PW, and VLAN)
and monitoring traffic statistics and monitoring in a
based on service service view.
paths Supports QoS packet loss
detection.

Platform

Control
Visualized Queries and For E-Line services, allows users Yes Service
O&M display of to find the service working path visualization
service paths and protection path views based
based on VLANs.
VLANs For E-LAN services, allows users
to find the VLAN domain views
based on VLANs.
Queries and For E-LAN services, allows users Yes

display of to find the actual MAC address
service paths forwarding path views based on
based on MAC MAC addresses.
addresses
Display of L2 Illustrates the running status of the None

protocol status spanning tree protocol and ERPS
information protocol of each NE in the service
based on service view.
paths
Intelligent fault diagnosis Performs automatic fault diagnosis Yes Intelligent fault
for Ethernet services by layer diagnosis
(service/PW/tunnel/port) and by Cross-product
level (connectivity/performance/ fault diagnosis
configuration).
Quickly outputs fault diagnosis
reports on a one-click operation
GUI.
IP ping Initiates IP ping packets to and None

responds to IP ping packets sent
from client equipment, therefore
quickly narrowing down the fault
location to the client equipment or
the transport network.
Support near-end or far-end IP ping
responding.
Supports initiating an IP ping test
to the near-end or far-end.
Network-level E-LAN service loop Checks whether an E-LAN service Yes

detection on an NE forms a loop.
Automatically shuts down a looped
service.
Displays the loopback path.

Platform
11.10 MPLS-TP OAM

MPLS-TP OAM provides various fault detection and locating capabilities.
MPLS-TP OAM supports proactive OAM and on-demand OAM.
l Proactive OAM: Once MPLS-TP OAM is enabled, OAM operations do not stop until a
network fault occurs.
l On-demand OAM: After MPLS-TP OAM is enabled, OAM operations do not proceed
until they are activated separately.
Table 11-11 classifies MPLS-TP OAM functions.
Table 11-11 Classification of MPLS-TP OAM functions

OAM Type OAM Function
Proactive OAM Fault management CC
RDI
AIS
CSF
On-demand OAM Fault management and LB

isolation
LT
Performance monitoring LM
DM
LCK and TST
Table 11-12 describes MPLS-TP OAM functions and their application scenarios.

Platform
Table 11-12 MPLS-TP OAM functions and their application scenarios

MPLS-TP OAM Description Application Scenario
Function
CC A pair of MEPs periodically l CC is used to test

transmits and receives unidirectional connectivity
continuity check message of links in real time.
(CCM) frames to check l To further locate a faulty
continuity with each other. link on a network, LT needs
CC reports alarms upon to be used as well.
detection of the following
defect conditions:
l LOCV: No CCM frame is
received within three and
a half consecutive
detection periods. (The
detection period can be
manually set or
determined in auto-
sensing mode. In auto-
sensing mode, the
detection period is
determined by the CCM
transmission period.)
l UNEXPMEG: A CCM
frame with an unexpected
MEG ID is received.
l UNEXPPER: A CCM
frame with a period field
value different from the
preset detection period is
received.
l UNEXPMEP: A CCM
frame with an unexpected
MEP ID is received.
l SF: The packet loss rate
exceeds the preset signal
fail (SF) threshold.
l SD: The packet loss rate
exceeds the preset signal
degrade (SD) threshold.
RDI When the local MEP detects l Defect conditions that peer
a fault on the network side, MEPs have encountered are
the local MEP notifies the reported in real time.
remote MEP of this fault and l RDI is used only when CC
the remote MEP generates an is enabled.
RDI alarm.

Platform

Function
Client Signal Fail (CSF) When the local MEP detects The local end needs to notify
a link fault on the access side, the remote end of link faults on
the local MEP notifies the the access side in real time.
remote MEP of this fault and
the remote MEP generates a
CSF alarm.
AIS After receiving AIS packets, l If an MPLS port on an AIS-

the client-layer MEP enabled transit node detects
generates the AIS alarm. a defect condition, the
After detecting a fault at the transit node suppresses the
server layer, the system LOCV alarm generated on
inserts AIS packets to the the tunnel.
client-layer to suppress l If an AIS-enabled switching
alarms from the client layer. provider edge (S-PE)
detects a defect condition,
the S-PE suppresses the
LOCV alarm generated on
the PW.
LB LB is used to verify l LB is used to verify

bidirectional connectivity of a bidirectional connectivity
MEP with a MIP or a peer of links on an on-demand
MEP. basis.
If a MEP initiates an LB test
to a MIP, the time to live
(TTL) field value must be
equal to the number of hops
between the MEP and the
MIP. If a MEP initiates an LB
test to its peer MEP, the TTL
field value must be equal to
or greater than the number of
hops between the two MEPs.
LT LT is used to verify l LT is used to verify

bidirectional connectivity bidirectional connectivity
between an MEP and an MIP of links and locate faults on
or between a pair of MEPs, an on-demand basis.
and locate the fault if any. l The equipment achieves LT
by initiating LB tests at a
MEP to its closest node
until its target node.

Platform

Function
LM LM is used to measure frame l Frame loss on tunnels or

loss between a pair of MEPs PWs can be measured on an
by counting transmitted and on-demand basis.
received data frames between
the pair of MEPs.
LM can measure near-end
and far-end frame loss. For a
MEP, near-end frame loss
refers to frame loss
associated with ingress data
frames while far end frame
loss refers to frame loss
associated with egress data
frames.
DM DM is used to measure frame l Frame delay and frame

delay and frame delay delay variation on tunnels
variation between a pair of or PWs can be measured on
MEPs by transmitting and an on-demand basis.
receiving OAM frames with
DM information.
Lock (LCK) and test The LCK function enables a l Calculate the packet loss
(TST) local service-layer MEP to rate on a tunnel or PW as
notify the remote client-layer required.
MEP when the local service- l The TST function and the
layer MEP is locked, to LCK function must be used
suppress LOC alarms at the together.
client layer.
The TST function enables a
local MEP to periodically
send TST packets to the
remote MEP and calculates
the number of transmitted
packets and the number of
received TST packets at the
remote end, therefore
calculating the packet loss
rate.
11.11 ETH OAM

This section describes the ETH OAM function, which includes Ethernet service OAM and
Ethernet port OAM.
On traditional WDM and OTN networks, Ethernet links are maintained based on the optical
layer or OTN channels. As networks develop, the volume of traffic on WDM and OTN
networks increase and networking modes become more complex. This poses higher

Platform
requirements on Ethernet link maintainability, and brings an urgent demand for Ethernet
service and link maintenance in addition to link maintenance on the optical layer or OTN
channels, to enhance maintenance and administration on WDM and OTN networks.
Huawei WDM and OTN equipment uses Ethernet port OAM and Ethernet service OAM to
provide complete ETH-OAM solutions, addressing OAM requirements of Ethernet services
and links. Figure 11-11 shows application scopes of Ethernet port OAM and Ethernet service
OAM on OTN networks.
Figure 11-11 Application scopes of Ethernet port OAM and Ethernet service OAM on OTN
networks
11.11.1 Ethernet Service OAM

An Ethernet board supports a wide range of Ethernet service OAM operations, including the
continuity check (CC), loopback (LB), and link trace (LT).
Table 11-13 provides details on Ethernet service OAM operations and application scenarios.
Table 11-13 Ethernet service OAM operations and application scenarios

Operation Explanation Application Scenario
Name
CC The connectivity between MEPs is l The CC method is used to test

detected through periodical exchange unidirectional connectivity of
of continuity check messages links in real time.
(CCMs). This detection method is l To further locate a faulty link on
called continuity check (CC). a network, the LT method needs
NOTE to be used as well.
Only an MEP can initiate or respond to a
CC.

Platform

Name
LB The LB method can be used to test l The LB method is used to test

the status of any MP link from the bidirectional connectivity of
source MEP to the maintenance links.
domain. l Unlike a CC, the LB method
NOTE provides one-time detection. You
Only an MEP can initiate or terminate an need to issue a command to
LB test.
initiate an LB test.
l The LB method fails to locate a
specific faulty link on a network
in one attempt.
LT Compared with the LB method, the l The remote loopback method is

LT method is more powerful on fault used to locate a problem on site.
locating. That is, the LT method can l The LT method is also used to
locate a faulty network segment in locate a fault.
one attempt.
l Compared with an LB test, all the
NOTE
MPs on a link under an LT test
Only an MEP can initiate or terminate an
LT test. respond to LTM frames.
According to their responses, all
the MIPs from the source MEP to
the destination MEP can be
determined.
AIS The alarm indication signal (AIS) is The AIS activation method is used
used to report errors to a higher level when the fault information needs to
node in the case of ETH-OAM. After be reported to a higher level MP.
a fault is detected by an MP, if this If several MDs exist on links, to
MP activates the AIS, it sends the locate a fault accurately, activate the
AIS packet to a higher level MP so AIS and set the level of the customer
that the higher level MP is informed hierarchy that functions to suppress
of the fault information; if this MP the AIS information.
does not activate the AIS, it does not
report the fault.
NOTE
In normal cases, if an MP is set to level
n, the level of the customer hierarchy
that functions to suppress the AIS
information should be set to n+1.

Platform

Name
LM The loss measurement (LM) function The LM function tests the

is an equipment-specific counter that availability of a link. A bidirectional
counts the lost frames on the ingress link becomes unavailable once it
and egress ends of a link. When a becomes unavailable in either
link becomes faulty, the LM function direction.
helps to analyze the fault.
Packet loss ratio = Number of lost
frames/Number of frames within an
interval T. The packet loss ratio is
expressed as a percentage.
The LM function can be single-
ended or dual-ended.
The single-ended LM is on-demand,
providing one-time packet loss ratio.
The dual-ended LM is active,
periodically and automatically
providing packet loss ratio.
NOTE
The equipment supports only the single-
ended LM of Egress port or far end.
DM The delay measurement (DM) This function helps fault locating by

function measures the Ethernet using a loopback to measure the
service transmission delay between a frame delay.
pair of MEPs.
Each independent maintenance end
point (MEP) can perform the DM
function. The DM function can be
performed in two ways: One-way
DM and Two-way DM.
NOTE
The equipment supports only the Two-
way DM.
FDV Different frames may have different The FDV function measures the
delays. The frame delay variation frame delay variation between MEPs
(FDV) measures the Ethernet service on a point-to-point link.
transmission delay variation between
a pair of MEPs based on DM results.
RDI The remote defect indication (RDI) l Single-ended error management

function indicates a local fault for a l Remote performance check,
peer MEP. reflecting a fault that occurred on
the remote end

Platform

Name
OAM Ping Ping is an in-service test. Ping helps This method is used to check the
to simulate the packet loss rate and performance of services between the
delay of services that result from bit local equipment and data
errors. Based on the check of communication equipment that
connectivity, ping provides refined supports the ICMP protocol.
management over the performance Compared with the check of
of Ethernet links at the MAC layer. connectivity, this method provides
more detailed and accurate OAM
information.
11.11.2 Ethernet Port OAM

The Ethernet board supports Ethernet port OAM operations, including the OAM auto-
discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopback, and self-loop test.
Table 11-14 provides details on Ethernet port OAM operations and application scenarios.
Table 11-14 Ethernet port OAM operations and application scenarios

Operation Explanation Application Description
Name Scenario
OAM auto- By exchanging l The equipment that A successful OAM

discovery information OAM supports the IEEE auto-discovery is a
protocol data units 802.3ah OAM prerequisite for
(OAMPDUs) protocol is implementing link
periodically, the local identified. performance
equipment is informed l If an auto-discovery monitoring and remote
whether its opposite fails, a relevant loopbacks. That is, the
end supports the IEEE alarm is reported. link performance
802.3ah OAM monitoring and
protocol. loopback functions are
available at a port only
when an OAM auto-
discovery is successful
at the port.

Platform

Name Scenario
Link The link performance l The link

performance monitoring method performance
monitoring monitors the bit error monitoring method
performance (errored is used to monitor
frames or errored the performance of
signals) of a link. On services on a link in
detecting that bit errors real time.
exceed the threshold, l The link
the local end sends a performance
specific bit error event monitoring method
to the opposite end by can precisely
using the event analyze and
notification monitor the link
OAMPDU. In this performance within
case, the opposite end a specific range.
reports a relevant
alarm. l According to actual
requirements, you
can set window
values and
threshold values for
three link
performance events
on the NMS. In this
manner, whether
the link
performance
degrades to the
threshold can be
detected.
NOTE
To perform
performance
measurement from
different aspects,
classify link
performance
monitoring into
errored frame event
monitoring, errored
frame seconds
summary event
monitoring, errored
frame period event
monitoring, and
errored symbol
period event
monitoring.

Platform

Name Scenario
Link The OAM entity The fault locating

performance transmits the faults method is used to
monitoring (including link faults, locate a problem on
dying gasps, critical site.
events) detected by the
local end over the flag
field defined by the
OAMPDU to the
remote end. In this
way, the fault
notification is realized.
Remote The OAM entity at the l The remote

loopback local end transmits a loopback method is
loopback control used to locate a
OAMPDU to a remote problem on site.
OAM entity to request l By comparing the
a loopback. Based on number of
the analysis data of the transmitted packets
loopback, you can with the number of
perform fault locating received looped-
and link performance back packets, the
tests. remote loopback
method helps to
detect bidirectional
performance and
faults of the link
from the loopback
initiation end to the
loopback response
end.
Self-loop test After the self-loop test l The self-loop test

function is enabled on method helps to
an Ethernet unit, you detect a port
can detect a self-loop loopback and an
that occurs when the intra-board
fiber in the transmit loopback.
direction of a port is l Once a loop occurs
connected to the same on a network, the
port in the receive equipment can
direction, and an intra- detect it and reports
board loopback a relevant alarm.
between two connected
ports on the same
board.

Platform
11.12 RMON
RMON defines a serial of statistic formats and functions to realize the data exchange between
the control stations and detection stations that complies with the RMON standards.
The RMON statistics of the equipment are stored in the RMON agent of an Ethernet unit. The
NMS uses basic Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) commands to exchange
statistics with and collect statistics from the RMON agent. With these statistics, operating and
maintenance personnel can perform real-time monitoring, error detection, and fault analysis
and handling on Ethernet services.
The equipment accomplishes the following RMON management groups specified in IETF
RFC2819:
Table 11-15 RMON Management Groups

RMON Description Remark
Manage
ment
Groups
Statistics The statistics group allows users to The Ethernet unit supports statistics
group query port performance in real time, group based on port.
such as the number of packets that are The sampling interval of a statistics
received and sent with specified group can be set. The value range of
length and number of packet loss the sampling interval is from 5
events within a certain period. second to 150 seconds.
Alarm The alarm group allows users to The Ethernet unit supports port-based
group monitor important port performance. alarm groups. You can create only
Once the monitored performance one alarm group for a board. The
crosses a threshold, an alarm is number of alarm entries in an alarm
reported, for example, when the group must not exceed ten.
number of bytes in corrupted packets You can set the following items to
or the number of packet loss events which the alarm object corresponds:
crosses the threshold. monitored object, sampling interval,
report mode (report in case of upper
threshold-crossing, report in case of
lower threshold-crossing, report all),
upper threshold, and lower threshold.

Platform

Manage
ment
Groups
History The history control group allows The history control group has the
control users to periodically collect and store following attributes:
group the required port performance data. l History table type
You can set the history table type
to 30-second, 30-minute, custom
period 1, or custom period 2. In
the case of a custom period, you
need to manually set the required
sampling interval.
l Monitored object
This specifies the port on which
performance data is collected. You
can set monitored objects for each
history table type.
l Number of items
This specifies the number of
history performance data entries
that are stored in the Ethernet unit.
Because the history performance
data is stored in the wrap mode,
the stored data is the latest history
performance data. For example, if
the number of items is set to 10,
the Ethernet unit stores the latest
ten history performance data
entries. You can set the number of
items for each history table type.
The number of items can be set to
50 at most.

Platform

Manage
ment
Groups
History The history group allows users to The history group has the following
group query and filter the required historical attributes:
performance data for fault analysis l History table type
and diagnosis.
This specifies the sampling period
to which the history performance
data corresponds. You can set the
history table type to 30-second,
30-minute, custom period 1, or
custom period 2.
l Monitored object
This specifies the port to which
the history performance data
corresponds.
l Performance entry
This specifies the performance
entries to which the history
performance data corresponds.
The list of performance entries is
the same as the list of the
performance entries that can be
added into a statistics group.
l Query conditions
This specifies the relative time to
which the history performance
data corresponds. 1 represents the
oldest item. You can query a
maximum of ten entries at one
time.
NOTE
You can query performances in the
history group only after the performance
monitoring parameter in the history
control group is pre-set.
11.13 Port Mirroring

For the existing complex networks, equipment has already provided various effective fault
diagnosis methods. However, the methods require path overheads or even interrupt service.
Therefore, a fast fault diagnosis method that does not affect services is urgently required. Port
mirroring effectively addresses this requirement.
Port mirroring has the following features:
l The entire physical port is mirrored.

Platform
l Port mirroring applies to online fault diagnosis. It mirrors the traffic or some services
from one port to another port, and then an analyzer is used for fault diagnosis.
l After port mirroring is used, traffic can be monitored using an analyzer.
l Direction of Mirror Source Function Point.
– Ingress: The traffic received by the mirror source port is replicated to the mirror
destination port.
– Egress: The traffic transmitted by the mirror source port is replicated to the mirror
destination port.
– Bidirectional: The traffic received and transmitted by the mirror source port is
replicated to the mirror destination port.
Unlike port mirroring that only copies and monitors the services on the entire port, port traffic
mirroring combines port mirroring and flow mirroring. It copies and monitors the services on
a port based on the likes of VLAN tag, VLAN priority, IP priority, destination MAC, making
fault location more accurately.
NOTE
The following takes port mirroring as an example. The similar goes to other mirroring scenarios.
As shown in Figure 11-12, a port on NE1 is the mirror source port and another port on NE1 is
the mirror destination port. NE1 replicates the traffic at the mirror source port to the mirror
destination port. An analyzer is used to analyze the traffic or to monitor the traffic in real time
without affecting the services. NE1 receives services from the User A through Port 1 and
transmits the services through Port 2. Set Port 1 or Port 2 as the mirror source port and set
Port 3 as the mirror destination port.
Figure 11-12 Typical networking for port mirroring
NOTE
The following describes the implementation of mirror source function point on ingress and egress.

Platform
In the ingress direction of NE1 when Port 1 is the mirror source:
1. NE1 replicates all the ingress traffic at Port 1 (the mirror source port) to Port 3 (the
mirror destination port).
2. Normal services are transmitted from NE1 to NE3 and then to the User B. The replicated
ingress mirror services are transmitted from NE1 to the analyzer.
3. The analyzer monitors and analyzes the mirror services to monitor and analyze normal
services in the ingress direction.
In the egress direction of NE1 when Port 2 is the mirror source:
1. NE1 replicates all the egress traffic at Port 2 (the mirror source port) to Port 3 (the mirror
destination port).
2. Normal services are transmitted from NE1 to NE3 and then to the User B. The replicated
egress mirror services are transmitted from NE1 to the analyzer.
3. The analyzer monitors and analyzes the mirror services to monitor and analyze normal
services in the egress direction.
11.14 PRBS Test(1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I Enhanced)

If no commissioning instruments are available in the network maintenance phase or on a new
network where no services are deployed, you can perform a self-transmit and self-receive test
using the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) function to check whether links on each
section are normal by performing loopbacks section by section.
The information provided in Figure 11-13 shows that, in PRBS applications, the local board
with the PRBS test function sends PRBS codes and analyzes the PRBS codes looped back
from the remote end. By comparing the PRBS codes looped back from the remote end with
the PRBS codes that should be received according to the theoretic calculation, the local board
determines whether equipment or the transmission line is normal. Table 11-16 shows the
application networking for the PRBS test.
For the same network, the information provided in Table 11-16, shows that a client-side
PRBS test is more penetrative than a WDM-side PRBS test. If a board on which the PRBS
test has been started does not receive the PRBS test signals transmitted from the local board,
the board reports a PRBS-LSS alarm.
Figure 11-13 PRBS application

Platform
NOTE
l When a PRBS test is in progress, only query operations can be performed. Users are not allowed to
delivery any configuration to the boards participating in the test. During a PRBS test, the boards
participating in the test cannot carry any services. If services are carried on the boards, they will be
interrupted during the PRBS test.
l The PRBS test function is only used during deployment and fault location. After the deployment and
fault location, users must disable the PRBS Test Status.
l The PRBS codes vary according to the types of client-side service. Therefore, to perform a client-
side PRBS test, users must ensure that the client-side service types for the tester board and auxiliary
board are the same.
Table 11-16 PRBS networking applications

Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
Upstream GE/10GE services

PRBS test
on the client
side
NOTE
No self-loop is required on the client side of meter boards.
Downstream Standard OTN

PRBS test services, SDH
on the client services, CPRI
side services, OBSAI
services, GE/10GE
services
NOTE
For the F2ELOM(STND) and TNF1LDX(STND) boards,
the client-side downstream PRBS test does not require
auxiliary boards.
WDM-side —
PRBS test

Platform
Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
PRBS test SDH services (the

on SDH PRBS signal
boards initiated from the
cross-connect
board)
SDH services (the

PRBS signal
initiated from the
line board)
PRBS test PDH services

on PDH
boards
Meter board: used to generates PRBS test signals and monitors PRBS test signals that are
looped back from the remote board. By comparing the transmitted and received PRBS test
signals, you can determine whether the current link or equipment is normal.
Auxiliary board: connects a meter board and the network under test to transparently
transmit the PRBS test signals. Auxiliary boards need to be configured at the near end only
when client-side services that are set to SDH services other than standard OTN services.
When a tributary board or line board is used as a meter board or auxiliary board, cross-
connections need to be configured to form a complete service path.

Platform
11.15 PRBS Test(1800 I&II Compact)

Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 1800 I II compact provides the pseudo random bit sequence
(PRBS) error detection function. On the U2000, the meter board can be configured to send
PRBS test signals, and the client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently
transmit the PRBS test signals. In this way, you can perform the bit error test of the
transmission link without attaching a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
Boards that support the PRBS function are classified into meter boards and auxiliary boards.
l A meter board generates PRBS test signals and monitors PRBS test signals that are
looped back from the remote board. By comparing the transmitted and received PRBS
test signals, you can determine whether the current link or equipment is normal.
l Certain meter boards need to work with auxiliary boards during the PRBS test. An
auxiliary board connects a meter board and the network under test to transparently
transmit the PRBS test signals.
Ethernet Services PRBS Test Scenario

The F2ELOM, F2ELOM(STND), F1ELQM, F2LQM, F2LQM2, F1LOE, F1LDE, and
F2LDGF2 boards that receive GE services, the F1LDX(STND) board that receives 10GE
services, and the C12X5 board that receives GE/10GE services are used as meter boards to
generate GE/10GE PRBS test signals. No auxiliary board is required. GE/10GE signals with
PRBS test signals can pass through Huawei or third-party WDM networks. Figure 11-14
shows the test scenario.
Figure 11-14 GE PRBS Test Scenario
When interconnecting with Huawei or third-party networks, F2ELOM, F2ELOM(STND),

F1LDX(STND), F1ELQM, F2LQM, F2LQM2, F1LOE, F1LDE, and F2LDGF2 boards can
start the PRBS test on the WDM or client side. The C12X5 board can start the upstream
PRBS test.
NOTE
For a PRBS test on the WDM side, PRBS test signals are transmitted from the client side to the WDM
side and then looped back to the client side. For a PRBS test on the client side, however, PRBS test
signals are transmitted and received both on the client side.
l Start a PRBS test in the upstream direction.
– When the PRBS test is started on the WDM side,
the meter boards F2ELOM, F1ELQM, F2LQM, F2LQM2, F1LOE, F1LDE, and
F2LDGF2 generate GE PRBS test signals, which are then mapped into OTN

Platform
signals. The ports on the WDM side are interconnected with the equipment under
test and a fiber loopback must be performed on the client side of the meter boards.
After being transmitted to the remote end, the GE signals are looped back on the
WDM or client side of the equipment under test. Then the meter boards check the
loopbacked GE PRBS test signals. Figure 11-15 shows the test principle.
Figure 11-15 Schematic diagram of a GE PRBS test on the WDM side (non-
C12X5/F1LDX(STND)/F2ELOM(STND) board)
– The meter board C12X5 generates GE/10GE PRBS test signals. The meter board
F1LDX(STND) generates 10GE PRBS test signals. The meter board
F2ELOM(STND) generates GE PRBS test signals.The GE/10GE signals are then
mapped into OTN signals. The ports on the WDM side of the C12X5/
F1LDX(STND)/F2ELOM(STND) board are interconnected with the equipment
under test. After being transmitted to the peer end, the signals are looped back on
the WDM or client side of the equipment under test. Then the meter board checks
the loopbacked GE/10GE PRBS test signals. The PRBS test signals support RMON
statistics collection. Figure 11-16 shows the test principle.
NOTE
l The C12X5 board supports PRBS tests only for GE services in TTT-AGMP mapping mode
and 10GE LAN services in bit transparent mapping (11.1G) mode.
l The F1LDX(STND) board supports PRBS tests only for 10GE LAN services in MAC
transparent mapping (10.7G) mode.
l The F2ELOM(STND) board supports PRBS tests only for GE services in GFP-T mapping
mode.

Platform
Figure 11-16 Schematic diagram of an upstream GE/10GE PRBS test (C12X5/

F1LDX(STND)/F2ELOM(STND) board)
l Start a PRBS test in the downstream direction.

– The meter boards F2ELOM, F2ELOM(STND), F1ELQM, F2LQM, F2LQM2,
F1LDE, and F2LDGF2 generate GE PRBS test signals. The meter board
F1LDX(STND) generates 10GE PRBS test signals. After being transmitted to the
remote end, the signals are looped back on the client or WDM side of the
equipment under test. Then the meter boards check the loopbacked GE/10GE PRBS
test signals. Figure 11-17 shows the test principle.
NOTE
l The F1LDX(STND) board supports PRBS tests only for 10GE LAN services in MAC
transparent mapping (10.7G) mode.
l The F2ELOM(STND) board supports PRBS tests only for GE services in GFP-T mapping
mode.

Platform
Figure 11-17 Schematic diagram of a GE/10GE PRBS test on the client side
– When the PRBS test is started on the client side, the meter board F1LOE generates
GE PRBS test signals. After being transmitted to the remote end, the signals are
looped back on the client or WDM side of the equipment under test. The OUT and
IN ports on the meter board are connected using a pigtail. Then the meter board
check the loopbacked GE PRBS test signals. Figure 11-18 shows the test principle.
Figure 11-18 Schematic diagram of a GE PRBS test on the client side
Common PRBS test scenario

The networking mode for the PRBS test varies according to the service type of the OTU
board.
l When the F1LSX/F2LSX board functions as the meter board, PRBS test signals are
generated from the TX port on the client side and transparently transmitted to a WDM
network through an auxiliary board. The PRBS test signals are then looped back on the
WDM or client side of the equipment under test and checked at the RX port of the meter
board. Figure 11-19 shows the test principle.

Platform
Figure 11-19 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test (1)
l The F1LQPL/F1LQPU board that carries STM-16 services and the F1LQM/F1LQM2
board that carries STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 services function as meter boards and
generate PRBS test signals. The ports on the WDM side are interconnected with the
equipment under test and a fiber loopback must be performed on the client side of the
meter board. After being transmitted to the remote end, the signals are looped back on
the WDM or client side of the equipment under test. Then the meter boards check the
loopbacked GE PRBS test signals. Figure 11-20 shows the test principle.
l The F1LWX2/F1LDX, the F2ELOM board that carries STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/

OTU1/10GE LAN services, the F1ELQM/the F2LQM board that carries STM-1/STM-4/
STM-16/OTU1 services, the F2LQM2 board that carries STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
services, and the F1LQM/F1LQM2 board that carries OTU1 services function as meter
boards and no auxiliary board is required. The PRBS test signals are generated at the TX
port on the client side. After being transmitted to the remote end, the signals are looped
back on the WDM or client side of the equipment under test. Then the meter boards
check the loopbacked GE PRBS test signals. Figure 11-21 shows the test principle.

Platform
l The TSP board that carries STM-1/E1/T1 services and the F1LQPL/F1LQPU board that
carries OTU1 services function as meter boards. No auxiliary board is required. The
PRBS test signals are generated at the TX port on the client side. After being transmitted
to the remote end, the signals are looped back on the WDM or client side of the
equipment under test. The OUT and IN ports on the meter board are connected using a
pigtail. Then the meter board check the loopbacked GE PRBS test signals. Figure 11-22
shows the test principle.
l The F2CP6/C12X5 board supports the PRBS test on CPRI/OBSAI services in the
downstream direction on the client side and the PRBS test on OTN interface on the
WDM side.
– PRBS test started in the downstream direction on the client side
The meter board F2CP6/C12X5 generates framed PRBS test signals. After being
transmitted to the remote end, the signals are looped back on the WDM or client
side of the auxiliary board. Then the meter board checks the loopbacked PRBS test
signals. Figure 11-23 shows the test principle.
– PRBS test started on the WDM side

The meter board F2CP6/C12X5 generates unframed PRBS test signals. After being
transmitted to the remote end, the signals are looped back on the WDM side of the
equipment under test. Then the meter board checks the loopbacked PRBS test
signals. Figure 11-24 shows the test principle.

Platform
11.16 Loopback
Loopbacks provide an effective means of troubleshooting a network, by verifying a service on
a segment-by-segment basis.
Hardware Loopback and Software Loopback

l Hardware loopback: To create a hardware loopback at an optical port, connect the
transmit end and receive end of the port using a fiber. A hardware loopback must be
performed onsite.
l Software loopback: To create a software loopback, configure it on the NMS.
Figure 11-25 Differences between a hardware loopback and a software loopback
OTU Board Loopback

A loopback is used to determine whether the board where the loopback is performed is faulty.
The OSN 1800 OTU boards support the same loopback types and these loopbacks are
performed in the same way on different OTU boards. Table 11-17 provides an example of
how to perform loopbacks on OTU boards by describing the loopbacks performed on the
LQM board to verify the board SDH services.

Platform
Table 11-17 OTU board loopback

Loopba Meaning Diagram
ck Type
Client- Detects
side whether the
outloop fiber line and
connectors on
the line are
normal.
Client- Detects
side whether the
inloop received
signals are
properly
processed
inside the
board.
WDM- Detects
side whether the
inloop received
signals are
properly
processed
inside the
board.

Platform
Loopba Meaning Diagram

ck Type
WDM- Detects
side whether the
outloop fiber line and
connectors on
the line are
normal.
OTN Tributary Board Loopback

OptiX OSN equipment supports inloops and outloops on an OTN tributary board.
Table 11-18 OTN tributary board loopback

Loop Meaning Diagram
back
Poin
t
Port Checks whether

outlo optical fibers and
op on connectors
an function properly.
OTN
tribut
ary
board
Port Checks whether

inloo the board properly
p on processes received
an signals.
OTN
tribut
ary
board
OTN Line Board Loopback

OptiX OSN equipment supports inloops and outloops on an OTN line board.

Platform
Table 11-19 OTN line board loopback
Loop Meaning Diagram

back
Poin
t
Port Checks whether

outlo optical fibers and
op on connectors
an function properly.
OTN
line
board
Port Checks whether

inloo the board properly
p on processes received
an signals.
OTN
line
board
SDH Board Loopback

The equipment supports the outloop and inloop on the SDH optical interface board.
Table 11-20 Diagrams of the outloop on the optical interface board
Loopbac Meaning Diagram

k Point
Optical The optical interface

interface outloop does not change
outloop the signal structure.
on the Within the optical
SDH interface board, the
optical signal that is transmitted
interface from the optical receiver
board module is directly looped
from the SDH interface
(before the signal is
processed) to the optical
transmitter module. In
this way, you can check
whether the SDH
interface and the external
cable of the SDH board
are normal.

Platform
Loopbac Meaning Diagram

k Point
VC-4 The VC-4 outloop does

outloop not change the signal
on the structure. Within the
SDH optical interface board,
optical the VC-4 signal that is
interface transmitted from the
board optical receiver module is
directly looped from the
VC-4 channel (before the
signal is processed) to the
optical transmitter
module. The VC-4
outloop can be performed
for checking whether the
VC-4 channels at the
SDH interfaces and on
the fibers connected to
the SDH board are
normal.
VC-3/ The VC-3/VC-12 outloop

VC-12 does not change the
outloop signal structure. Within
on the the optical interface
SDH board, the VC-3/VC-12
optical signal that is transmitted
interface from the optical receiver
board module is directly looped
from the VC-3/VC-12
channel (before the signal
is processed) to the
optical transmitter
module. The VC-3/
VC-12 outloop can be
performed for checking
whether the VC-3/VC-12
channels at the SDH
interfaces and on the
fibers connected to the
SDH board are normal.

Platform
Table 11-21 Diagrams of the inloop on the optical interface board

Loopback Meaning Diagram
Point
Optical The optical interface

interface inloop processes the
inloop on signal at the local end.
the SDH Within the optical
optical interface board, the
interface signal that is transmitted
board from the cross-connect
unit is looped from the
SDH interface (after the
signal is processed) to
the cross-connect unit.
In this way, you can
check whether the SDH
service processing
module and the cross-
connect board are
normal.
VC-4 The VC-4 inloop

inloop on processes the signal at
the SDH the local end. Within the
optical optical interface board,
interface the VC-4 signal that is
board transmitted from the
cross-connect unit is
looped from the VC-4
channel (after the signal
is processed) to the
cross-connect unit. In
this way, you can check
whether the SDH
service processing
module and the cross-
connect board are
normal.
PDH Board Loopback

The equipment supports the outloop and inloop on the PDH electrical interface board.

Platform
Table 11-22 Diagrams of the outloop on the electrical interface board

Point
Outloop on The outloop does not

the PDH change the signal
electrical structure. Within the
interface PDH electrical
board interface board, the
signal that is
transmitted from the
receive port is directly
looped back to the
corresponding
transmit port before
being processed. In
this way, you can
check whether the
PDH interface and the
external cable of the
PDH board are
normal.
Inloop on The inloop processes

the PDH the signal at the local
electrical end. Within the PDH
interface electrical interface
board board, the signal that
is transmitted from the
cross-connect unit is
looped back to the
cross-connect unit
after being processed.
In this way, you can
check whether the
PDH service
processing module and
the cross-connect
board are normal.
Ethernet Board Loopback

The equipment supports the inloop on the Ethernet port. Inloops are classified into the inloop
on the PHY-layer port and the MAC-layer port.

Platform
Table 11-23 Diagrams of the loopback on the Ethernet port

Point
PHY The Ethernet service

loopback that is transmitted from
the NE is looped from
the physical layer of the
Ethernet port to the
SDH layer. In this way,
you can check whether
the MAC layer, SDH
layer, and signals of the
Ethernet board are
normal.
MAC The Ethernet service

loopback that is transmitted from
the NE is looped from
the MAC layer of the
Ethernet port to the
SDH layer. In this way,
you can check whether
the SDH layer and
signals of the Ethernet
board are normal.
11.17 Hot Patches

The product supports the hot patch technology (the hot patch can be loaded locally or
remotely).
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a
new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old
codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or meet the new requirement,
without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
l The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
l The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents
frequent software version upgrade.
l The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot
patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to
avoid upgrade risks.
l The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves
the efficiency of solving problems.

Platform
11.18 Software Package Loading

Software upgrade by package loading refers to a process in which NE software and board
software of an NE are loaded (locally or remotely) at a time to replace the original software.
This loading mode avoids the repetitive loading actions for the boards one by one and
therefore improves the upgrade efficiently.
To ensure that the upgrade is successful, perform a health check on the OptiX OSN equipment
before the upgrade, including checking NE alarms and NE software.
Software package loading has the following features:
l The loading process is based on only the desired NE and is performed in one graphic
user interface (GUI).
l The NE can be automatically managed. The software of the newly seated board is
automatically updated when it does not match the software of the NE. So the efficiency
of the software upgrade is improved.
l Software package loading is an incremental loading process in which only the files that
need be updated are loaded.
l Software package loading supports the rollback function. When the software or hardware
of the system is faulty, the loading fails, and the NE software is restored to the version
before loading.
Software package loading applies to the following scenarios:
l NE software upgrade
l NE software downgrade
l Replacement of equipment software version
11.19 Automatically Customized Package Loading

When detecting that the storage space is insufficient during package loading upon an upgrade,
the system automatically deletes the files corresponding to the offline boards or subracks,
such as OSN 810 and OSN 850, all TDM boards, and slave subracks equipped with F3SCC.
The flash storage space of the F5UXCM or F5XCH01 system control board of the OSN 1800
V is limited. If the F5UXCM or F5XCH01 of the OSN 1800 V is upgraded to V100R007C10
or a later version, the loading package will be automatically customized.
After the package loading, if you need to insert a board or subrack that was deleted due to the
automatic customization, the system may be affected. For details about the impact on the
system and recovery measures, see Table 11-24.

Platform
Table 11-24 Impact on the system and recovery measures for automatically customized
package loading
Types Board/Subrack Insertion After Package Loading
of
Boards Fault Impact on the Recovery Measure
/ Symptom System
Subrac
ks
Delete
d Due
to
Autom
atic
Custo
mizati
on
OSN An The board can go 1. Re-load the customized package.

810/OS SWDL_PKG online, but the 2. If the fault cannot be rectified,
N 850 _NOBDSOF software version and contact Huawei engineers for help.
T alarm is logic version cannot
reported. be upgraded to the
target version.
Services are not
affected.
EGS4/ An The board can go 1. Re-load the customized package.

EFS8 SWDL_PKG online, but the 2. If the fault cannot be rectified,
_NOBDSOF software version and contact Huawei engineers for help.
T alarm is logic version cannot
reported. be upgraded to the
target version.
Services are not
affected.
TDM An The board can go 1. Re-load the customized package.

boards SWDL_PKG online, but the logic 2. If the fault cannot be rectified,
except _NOBDSOF version cannot be contact Huawei engineers for help.
EGS4/ T alarm is upgraded to the target
EFS8 reported. version. Services are
not affected.
Slave An The subrack can go 1. Re-load the customized package.

subrack SWDL_PKG online, but the 2. If the fault cannot be rectified,
s _NOBDSOF software version and contact Huawei engineers for help.
equippe T alarm is logic version cannot
d with reported. be upgraded to the
F3SCC target version.
Services are not
affected.

Platform
Product Description 12 License Management
12 License Management
About This Chapter
A Huawei product license authorizes product use within a specified scope and a specified
period. With a Huawei product license, customers have access to the services committed by
Huawei.
12.1 Feature License

The OSN 1800 supports feature license management.
12.2 RTU
12.1 Feature License

The OSN 1800 supports feature license management.
NOTE
l A license physically refers to a license file.

l License files are updated, loaded, and activated using the NMS.
l License files must be obtained from Huawei engineers. Huawei engineers are responsible for loading and
updating the license files.
Table 12-1 OSN 1800 V/OSN 1800 II Enhanced Feature license information
License Name Function
Chassis-level SDH Enables a chassis to receive/transmit SDH services.

function license
Chassis-level OTN Enables a chassis to receive/transmit OTN services.

function license
Chassis-level Enables a chassis to receive/transmit packet services.

packet function
license

Platform
Port-level packet Enables an FE, GE, or 10GE/OTU2 port to receive/transmit packet

function license services. One license applies only to one port.
Board-level packet Enables an HUNQ2/UNQ2 board to receive/transmit packet services.

function license
IEEE 1588v2 Enables a chassis to support the IEEE 1588v2 function.

function license
Optical Doctor Allows the use of the Optical Doctor V2 functions on system.
management
system License
Wavelength
Doctor
management
system License
Optical Doctor
optimization
system License
Service encryption Allows the encryption of services at each port of the board.
license NOTE
The F2LTX board supports this license.
Fiber doctor Allows the TNF1AST4 board to support the line fiber quality
management monitoring function.
system software
license
WSMD9XF Ports Allows the number of optical ports for configuring services.
RTU (Right for
more than 4 ports)
Table 12-2 OSN 1800 I&II Feature license information
IEEE 1588v2 Enables a chassis to support the IEEE 1588v2 function.

function license
Optical Doctor Allows the use of the Optical Doctor V2 functions on system.
management
system License
Wavelength
Doctor
management
system License
Optical Doctor
optimization
system License

Platform
Service encryption Allows the encryption of services at each port of the board.
license NOTE
The F2LTX board supports this license.
Fiber doctor Allows the TNF1AST4 board to support the line fiber quality
management monitoring function.
system software
license
WSMD9XF Ports Allows the number of optical ports for configuring services.
RTU (Right for
more than 4 ports)
12.2 RTU
Definition
Right To Use (RTU) is a part of hardware. It is used to authorize hardware capabilities in
installments, such as capacities, ports, and cross-connect degrees. RTU is a license for the use
of hardware resources and has the same lifecycle as hardware.
Carrier
Using RTUs to provision services requires the following:
1. Hardware: subracks, boards, and optical modules that support RTUs
2. RTU certificate: setting the number and type of RTUs that have been applied for
Benefits
l Reduced initial investment: The RTU provides customers with a method of purchasing
hardware capabilities in installments, which can significantly reduce initial investment
and quickly achieve balance between income and expenditure.
l Improved slot utilization: The per-slot capability is improved by two times to more than
four times, saving a large number of slots and subracks.

Platform
l Reduced OPEX: Services can be provisioned by remotely loading RTUs. Therefore,

customers do not need to install hardware boards onsite to achieve capacity expansion.
RTU Types
WDM/OTN products support four types of RTUs, as shown in Figure 12-1.

Platform
Figure 12-1 RTU types and functions
No. RTU Type Function
Port enabling Controls the number of available ports. There are client-side
RTU port enabling RTUs and line-side port enabling RTUs.
Line capacity Controls the capacities of line ports.

RTU
OXC subrack Controls the number of OChs that can be configured in an

OCh add/drop OXC subrack.
RTU
OXC line/ Controls the optical cross-connect degrees that can be

tributary board configured for optical line and tributary boards.
degree RTU
For more detail information, see

Platform
l Carrier users: Using WDM&OTN RTUs.

l Enterprise users: Using WDM&OTN RTUs.

Platform
Product Description 13 Security Management
13 Security Management
About This Chapter
The product provides security mechanisms in software and hardware. These mechanisms
protect the system and data against security risks or ensure system and data stability and
reliability in case of attacks.
Overview of Hardware Security

The system reliability of the product reaches up to 99.999%, with the use of high-reliability
hardware design and redundancy design. This ensures that the system is immune to security
threats, and that the hardware system still runs smoothly and reliably under security threats.
Overview of Software Security

The product processes two categories of data: O&M data and service data. The data is
transmitted over independent logical and physical paths and does not affect each other.
Therefore, services on devices of the OSN 1800 are processed in two planes:
l Management plane
The management plane provides access to the required equipment and management
functions, such as managing accounts and passwords, communication protocols, and
alarm reporting. The security feature of the management plane enables secure device
access, concentrated management, and thorough security audit.
l Data plane
The data plane processes service data that enters the devices and forwards service data
packets according to hardware forwarding entries. On one hand, the data plane prevents
user service packets from being intercepted, modified, or deleted, which endangers the
confidentiality and completeness of user data. On the other hand, the data plane ensures
the control of hardware forwarding actions, preventing forwarding entries from being
attacked or modified. In this manner, the forwarding plane of the devices can function
stably and reliably.
Table 13-1 lists the security functions that the product provides.

Platform
Table 13-1 Security functions of the two planes

Plane Function Description
Management Account and password Manages and saves device maintenance

plane management accounts.
Local authentication and Checks account validity and performs

authorization authorization.
Checks account validity and remotely

RADIUS authorization and performs authorization in the concentrated
authentication mode, reducing the maintenance cost.
Records actions about account

Security log management.
Operation log Records non-query operations.
Functions as a standard solution for saving

logs offline, effectively resolving the
SYSLOG management deficient saving space problem.
Provides basic TCP/IP attack prevention

TCP/IP protocol stack capability, such as attacks from incorrect IP
attack prevention packets, ICMP ping/jolt, and DoS.
Provides ACL based on IP addresses and

Access control list (ACL) port numbers.
Supports SSL3.0/TLS1.0 and provides

SSL/TLS encryption secure encrypted tunnels based on security
communication certifications.
Supports SSHv2 clients and servers to

provide Secure File Transfer Protocol
SSH security (SFTP) client services and STelnet
communication services.
Provides OSPFv2, capable of standard

OSPF route protocol MD5 authentication.
Provides NTPv3, capable of MD5

NTP protocol authentication and authorization control.
Provides SNMPv3, capable of security

SNMP management authentication and data encryption
protocol functions.
Data plane Flow control Monitors port traffic. Suppresses multicast

packets, discards unknown unicast/
multicast packets, and uses QoS to control
service traffic.
Discarding of error packets Discards invalid error packets. For

example, a packet whose size is smaller
than 46 bytes.

Platform
Plane Function Description
Loop avoidance Detects loopback at services ports, blocks

loopback, and supports service loopback
detection of Ethernet ports.
Layer 2 service access Provides the access control capabilities:

control filtering of static MAC addresses, blacklist,
learning and forbidding of MAC addresses,
and filtering based on complex traffic
classification.
Service isolation Provides three isolation methods: Layer 2

logical isolation, horizontal isolation, and
physical isolation.
Strict isolation of user Strictly isolates MPLS services within the

services carrier networks and from client-side
services.
For details about security, see Security White Paper and Security Configuration, Maintenance
and Hardening Manual.
13.1 L1 Service Encryption
13.1 L1 Service Encryption

Some customers who have high requirements on transmission security expect to establish an
encryption channel for service transmission based on the physical layer.
The service encryption function uses an encryption algorithm to encrypt client services at the
physical layer. Service encryption on a WDM/OTN network is called L1 service encryption.
With convenient deployment of Figure 13-1, the encryption processing module can be
integrated into an OTU or a tributary board to implement encrypted transmission of services.

Platform
Figure 13-1 L1 Service Encryption System
Compared with traditional encryption solutions such as L2 encryption and L3 encryption, L1

service encryption uses transport devices to transparently transmit client services. It has
advantages in low bandwidth usage, low latency, and support for multiple services, as shown
in Table 13-2.
Table 13-2 Comparison between the traditional encryption solution and L1 service encryption
solution
Traditional Encryption
SSL SSL VPN IPsec Ethernet L1 Service

Item Solution Solution Pipe Encryption
(Storage (Routing Encryption
Device) Device)
Encryption 4 4 3 2 1
layer
Service type Multiple IP/Ethernet IP/Ethernet IP/Ethernet All services

services service service service
Bandwidth Medium High Very high Medium Low

overhead
increased by
encryption
Latency Seconds Hundreds of Seconds Hundreds of Hundreds of

introduced microsecond microsecond nanoseconds
by s s
encryption

Platform
Traditional Encryption
SSL SSL VPN IPsec Ethernet L1 Service

Item Solution Solution Pipe Encryption
(Storage (Routing Encryption
Device) Device)
Application Data center Enterprise Enterprise Point-to- Multiple

scenario private private point scenarios
network network communicati
on of small
enterprises
For more detail information, see

l Carrier users: L1 Service Encryption Feature Guide.
l Enterprise users: L1 Service Encryption Feature Guide.

Platform 14 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the
Product Description DWDM System
14 Nominal Central Wavelength and

Frequency of the DWDM System
Table 14-1 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM System
Wavele Frequency Wavelength Wavele Frequency Wavelength

ngth (THz) (nm) ngth (THz) (nm)
No. No.
1 196.05 1529.16 41 194.05 1544.92
2 196.00 1529.55 42 194.00 1545.32
3 195.95 1529.94 43 193.95 1545.72
4 195.90 1530.33 44 193.90 1546.12
5 195.85 1530.72 45 193.85 1546.52
6 195.80 1531.12 46 193.80 1546.92
7 195.75 1531.51 47 193.75 1547.32
8 195.70 1531.90 48 193.70 1547.72
9 195.65 1532.29 49 193.65 1548.11
10 195.60 1532.68 50 193.60 1548.51
11 195.55 1533.07 51 193.55 1548.91
12 195.50 1533.47 52 193.50 1549.32
13 195.45 1533.86 53 193.45 1549.72
14 195.40 1534.25 54 193.40 1550.12
15 195.35 1534.64 55 193.35 1550.52
16 195.30 1535.04 56 193.30 1550.92
17 195.25 1535.43 57 193.25 1551.32

Platform 14 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the
Product Description DWDM System
Wavele Frequency Wavelength Wavele Frequency Wavelength

ngth (THz) (nm) ngth (THz) (nm)
No. No.
18 195.20 1535.82 58 193.20 1551.72
19 195.15 1536.22 59 193.15 1552.12
20 195.10 1536.61 60 193.10 1552.52
21 195.05 1537.00 61 193.05 1552.93
22 195.00 1537.40 62 193.00 1553.33
23 194.95 1537.79 63 192.95 1553.73
24 194.90 1538.19 64 192.90 1554.13
25 194.85 1538.58 65 192.85 1554.54
26 194.80 1538.98 66 192.80 1554.94
27 194.75 1539.37 67 192.75 1555.34
28 194.70 1539.77 68 192.70 1555.75
29 194.65 1540.16 69 192.65 1556.15
30 194.60 1540.56 70 192.60 1556.55
31 194.55 1540.95 71 192.55 1556.96
32 194.50 1541.35 72 192.50 1557.36
33 194.45 1541.75 73 192.45 1557.77
34 194.40 1542.14 74 192.40 1558.17
35 194.35 1542.54 75 192.35 1558.58
36 194.30 1542.94 76 192.30 1558.98
37 194.25 1543.33 77 192.25 1559.39
38 194.20 1543.73 78 192.20 1559.79
39 194.15 1544.13 79 192.15 1560.20
40 194.10 1544.53 80 192.10 1560.61

Platform
Product Description 15 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System
15 Nominal Central Wavelengths of

CWDM System
Table 15-1 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System

Wavelength No. Wavelength (nm) Wavelength No. Wavelength (nm)
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611

Platform
Product Description 16 Power Saving and Environment Protection
16 Power Saving and Environment

Protection
About This Chapter
16.1 Power Saving(1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I Enhanced)

This topic describes the implementation of equipment power saving.
16.2 Energy Saving(OSN 1800 I&II Compact)
The OptiX OSN 1800 supports control and monitoring of dynamic energy conservation.
16.3 Environment Protection
OSN 1800 is designed to ensure sustainable development. All parts and packaging comply
with related standards and can be recycled and reused properly.
16.1 Power Saving(1800 V/1800 II Enhanced/1800 I

Enhanced)
This topic describes the implementation of equipment power saving.
16.1.1 Static Power Saving

The following power saving measures are taken during the design of the OSN 1800:
l Reduction of power consumption by improving chip manufacturing process
l Use of efficient secondary power modules
l Normalization of client–side 10G optical modules to SFP+ modules
16.1.2 Dynamic Power Saving

Users can perform power saving configurations on the NMS to precisely manage power
consumption.
Table 16-1 and Table 16-2 provides the power-saving measures for these three modes.

Platform
Table 16-1 Power-saving measures of 1800 V

Power- Power-Saving Measure
Saving
Mode Unused Cross- Warm Backup Unused Boards Unused Ports
Connect Buses for Cross-
connect Boards
Normal Unused cross- Not supported Power off Laser on

mode a connect buses on
service boards are
disconnected.
Power- Unused cross- Supported Power off Laser off

saving connect buses on
mode active cross-
connect boards
are disconnected.
All cross-connect
buses on standby
cross-connect
boards are
disconnected.
Enhance Unused cross- Supported Power off Laser off

d power- connect buses on
saving active cross-
mode b connect boards
are disconnected.
All cross-connect
buses on standby
cross-connect
boards are
disconnected.
TDM Unused cross- Not supported Power off Laser off

power- connect buses on
saving active cross-
modec connect boards
are disconnected.
Unused cross-
connect buses on
standby cross-
connect boards
are disconnected.

Platform

Saving
Mode Unused Cross- Warm Backup Unused Boards Unused Ports
Connect Buses for Cross-
connect Boards
a: The normal mode is the default mode. The enhanced power-saving mode is not
recommended, because a switchover from hot backup to warm backup may take a long
time.
b: When warm backup is configured for cross-connect boards, the working mode of the
packet switching unit differs on an NE in power-saving mode and an NE in enhanced
power-saving mode.
c: Only the OSN 1800 V (Z5UXCMS) supports the TDM power-saving mode. When the
TDM power-saving mode is used, OTN boards, packet boards, and universal line boards
are not supported. During the switching from the TDM power-saving mode to the normal
mode, the NE undergoes a cold reset, and the SDH services are interrupted for 5 to 10
minutes. After the system is switched to the normal mode, the power consumption of the
device increases, which may exceed the heat dissipation capability of the cabinet. As a
result, the device cannot work properly. Verify that the power consumption does not exceed
the threshold and then perform the switching.
Table 16-2 Power-saving measures of 1800 II Enhanced

Saving
Mode Unused Cross- Unused Boards Unused Ports
Connect Buses
Normal Unused cross-connect Power off Laser on

mode a buses on service boards
are disconnected.
Power- Unused cross-connect Power off Laser off

saving buses on active cross-
mode connect boards are
disconnected.
All cross-connect buses
on standby cross-
connect boards are
disconnected.
TDM Unused cross-connect Power off Laser off

power- buses on active cross-
saving connect boards are
modeb disconnected.
Unused cross-connect
buses on standby cross-
connect boards are
disconnected.

Platform

Saving
Connect Buses
a: The normal mode is the default mode. The enhanced power-saving mode is not
recommended, because a switchover from hot backup to warm backup may take a long
time.
b: Only the OSN 1800 II Enhanced (Z2UXCL) supports the TDM power-saving
mode.When the TDM power-saving mode is used, OTN boards, packet boards, and
universal line boards are not supported. During the switching from the TDM power-saving
mode to the normal mode, the NE undergoes a cold reset, and the SDH services are
interrupted for 5 to 10 minutes. After the system is switched to the normal mode, the power
consumption of the device increases, which may exceed the heat dissipation capability of
the cabinet. As a result, the device cannot work properly. Verify that the power
consumption does not exceed the threshold and then perform the switching.
Table 16-3 Power-saving measures of 1800 I Enhanced

Saving
Connect Buses
Normal Unused cross-connect Power off Laser on

mode a buses on service boards
are disconnected.
The following describes the power-saving measures:
l Unused cross-connect buses:

– When the active and standby cross-connect boards are powered on, all cross-
connect buses are in the disconnected state by default.
– When a logical board is created on the NMS for a service board, the SCC board
determines the cross-connect buses that need to be connected based on the capacity
of the service board and instructs the cross-connect board to connect these cross-
connect buses.
– When the logical board of a service board is deleted, the SCC board instructs the
cross-connect boards to disconnect the cross-connect buses leading to the service
board slot based on the capacity of the service board.
l Warm backup for cross-connect boards: Cross-connect board supports warm backup.
When the active cross-connect board is functioning properly, the standby cross-connect
board works in warm backup state for the power saving purpose. When the active cross-
connect board is malfunctioning, the standby cross-connect board enters the hot backup
state and then takes over as the active cross-connect board.
l Unused boards:
Before logical boards are added, service boards and cross-connect boards automatically
enter the power saving state, and no power is supplied to the boards.

Platform
l Unused ports: When services or logical ports are not configured, the lasers at unused
ports are turned off for the power-saving purpose.
Heat dissipation is also an effective way for the OSN 1800 to save power. The OSN 1800
provides an adjustable fan speed mode and an auto fan speed mode. In auto mode, the OSN
1800 automatically performs separate and stepless fan speed adjustment for each section
based on the board temperature in that section. For example, the speed of the fans in the low-
temperature section is automatically adjusted to a low level for power saving. In adjustable
mode, the fan speed can be manually set to three levels: low speed, medium speed, and high
speed.
16.1.3 Control and Monitoring of Power Saving Status

The NMS enables users to control and monitor the power saving status.
l On the NMS, users can query the nominal NE power consumption, current NE power
consumption, nominal chassis power consumption, current chassis power consumption,
nominal board power consumption, and current board power consumption.
l The NMS provides a report of network-wide NE power information, such as the nominal
power consumption, current power consumption, mean power saved, and annual power
saved of each NE.
l On the NMS, users can set a power consumption threshold.
NOTE
l If the threshold is set to 16 A, you cannot add a board with high power consumption, such as an
EM20 board.
l When the threshold is changed from a value greater than 16 A to 16 A, boards with high power
consumption still work properly but the NE reports an NE_POWER_OVER alarm.
16.2 Energy Saving(OSN 1800 I&II Compact)

The OptiX OSN 1800 supports control and monitoring of dynamic energy conservation.
Static Energy Conservation

The following measures for energy conservation are taken during design of the OptiX OSN
1800:
l Adopt an easy scheme for board design.
l Use the ASIC with low power consumption to substitute for an ordinary chip.
l Use the power module with high efficiency.
l Use the switching power supply to substitute for the linear power supply.
l Use the standard digital voltage.
Dynamic Energy Conservation

l Board energy conservation (power down) design:
A board enters power saving state by default after the logical board of the board is
created on the U2000.
– The idle optical modules are in power saving state. No power is consumed in this
state.

Platform
– The idle channels are in Unused state. No power is consumed in this state.
– The idle logic processing module and the idle encapsulation/decapsulation module
do not consume power.
l Idle ports are power saving. On the U2000, after Idle Ports is set to Enable Power
Saving and in the WDM port, the Path Use Status of the board is set to Unused, the
ports which are not configured with services on the service board are in power saving
state. That is, a port in power saving state consumes little power.
l Heat dissipation design:
The OptiX OSN 1800 provides two modes of fan speed adjustment: Adjustable Speed
Mode and Auto Speed Mode.
– In Auto Speed Mode, the speeds of the fans in different partitions are adjusted
separately and steplessly according to the board temperatures of the partitions. The
speed of the fans in the low-temperature partition is automatically adjusted to a low
level for energy conservation.
– In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fan speed can be set to five levels: Low Speed,
Mid-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Mid-High Speed, and High Speed.
NOTE
For details about the fan speed adjustment scheme, see the "Functions and Features" of the FAN
board.
Control and Monitoring of Energy Conservation

The U2000 controls and monitors the status of energy conservation.
l The Nominal Power Consumption(W) of an NE, Current Power Consumption(W) of

an NE, Nominal Power Consumption(W) of a board, and Current Power
Consumption(W) of a board can be queried in real time.
l The states of the Idle Portson an NE can be set for energy conservation.
l The power consumption of each NE on the network can be queried. That is, the Nominal
Power Consumption(W), Current Power Consumption(W), Mean Power Saved(W),
and Power Saved In a Year(kWh) of each NE can be queried.
16.3 Environment Protection

OSN 1800 is designed to ensure sustainable development. All parts and packaging comply
with related standards and can be recycled and reused properly.
l Huawei guarantees that the volume of the package containing the OSN 1800 and its
accessories is not more than three times that of the equipment.
l The OSN 1800 is designed for easy disassembling.
l Huawei labels all mechanical plastic parts over 25 g according to the standards of ISO
11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packaging are provided with
standard labels to facilitate recycling and reuse.
l Plugs and connectors are included with the equipment. Users can operate them with
ordinary tools.
l All labels on the equipment can be easily removed. Some identification information like
silkscreen markings is printed directly on to the front panels or chassis.

Platform
Product Description 17 Environment Requirement
17 Environment Requirement
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN equipment is applicable to the Common Bonding Network (CBN) system.
The OptiX OSN equipment is suitable for the installation in a center equipment room for
communications.
17.1 Storage Environment

The storage environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 and NEBS GR-63-CORE.
17.2 Transport Environment
The transport environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 and NEBS GR-63-CORE.
17.3 Operation Environment
The operation environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, NEBS GR-63-CORE, and
YD/T 1821-2008.
17.1 Storage Environment

The storage environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 and NEBS GR-63-CORE.
Climate
Table 17-1 lists the climate requirements for the storage of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 17-1 Climate requirements for the storage of the OptiX OSN equipment
Item Requirement
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C/min
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Platform
Item Requirement
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2
Waterproof Requirement
Requirement for storing equipment on the customer site: Generally, the equipment must be
stored indoors.
No water should remain on the floor or leak to the equipment carton. The equipment should
be placed away from places where water leakage is possible, such as near the automatic fire-
fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, the following conditions must be met.
l The carton must be intact.
l Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton.
l No water is on the ground where the carton is placed.
l The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunshine.
Biological Environment
l Prevent reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.
l Take anti-rodent measures.
Air Cleanness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or
corrosive dust.
l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined
in Table 17-2.
l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined in
Table 17-3.
Table 17-2 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3

Platform
Table 17-3 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 17-4 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for storage.
Table 17-4 Requirements of mechanical stress for storage
Item Specification
Random vibration ASD - 0.02 m2/s3 -
Frequency range 5 Hz to 10 10 Hz to 50 Hz 50 Hz to
Hz 100 Hz
dB/oct 12 - -12
17.2 Transport Environment

The transport environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 and NEBS GR-63-CORE.
Climate
Table 17-5 lists climate requirements for transportation.
Table 17-5 Climate requirements for transportation
Item Requirement
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5% to 95%

Platform
Item Requirement
Temperature change ≤ 1°C/min

rate
Atmospheric pressure 55 kPa to 106 kPa
Waterproof Requirement
The following conditions must be met for transportation.
l The carton must be intact.

l Required rainproof measures must be taken so that the water does not enter the cartons.
l There must be no water on the transportation tools.
l Avoid reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.
Air Cleanness
corrosive dust.
in Table 17-6.
Table 17-7.
Table 17-6 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation
Precipitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤100 mg/m3
Table 17-7 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

Platform
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Cl2 -
Mechanical Stress
Table 17-8 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for transportation.
Table 17-8 Requirements of mechanical stress for transportation

Item Sub-Item Specification
Random ASD 1 m2/s3 -3 dB/oct

vibration
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200
Hz
Bump Shock spectrum type 100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 in each direction
I (mass > 50 kg)
Shock spectrum type 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 in each direction

II (mass ≤ 50 kg)
Direction of bump 6
17.3 Operation Environment

The operation environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, NEBS GR-63-CORE, and
YD/T 1821-2008.
Climate
Table 17-9, Table 17-10, Table 17-11 and Table 17-12 list the climate requirements for the
operation of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Platform
Table 17-9 Requirements on temperature and humidity during operation of OSN 1800 V/OSN
1800 II Enhanced
Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term operating temperature: -5°C to Long–term operating humidity: 5% to

50°Ca 85%
Short-term operating temperature: -10°C to Short-term operating humidity: 5% to

55°C 95%
NOTE
l If the equipment is installed in the cabinet, the effect of radiation can be ignored. If the equipment is
installed outdoors, proper protection should be provided for the equipment against the radiation.
l The temperature and relative humidity are measured at the air intake vent of the equipment.
l A short term refers to a maximum of 96 consecutive hours and the total time of short-term operating
in a year cannot exceed 15 days.
a: Some boards have high requirements on temperature. For details, see slot introduction of
boards.
Table 17-10 Requirements on temperature and humidity during operation of OSN 1800 I
Enhanced
Long-term operating temperature: -5°C to Long–term operating humidity: 5% to

65°C 85%

65°C 95%
NOTE
l The boards can work at a temperature ranging from 55°C to 65°C only when housing industrial-
level optical modules.
Table 17-11 Requirements on temperature and humidity of OSN 1800 I&II Compact
Long-term operating temperature: -5°C to Long-term operating humidity: 5% to

55°Ca 85%

55°C 95%

Platform

NOTE
l Certain boards can work properly under extremely high or low temperature. For details of these
boards, see 6.10 Temperature-Hardened Feature(1800 I&II Compact).
a: Some boards have high requirements on temperature. For details, see slot introduction of
boards.
To improve equipment reliability, ensure that the equipment room is equipped with a precise
air conditioner, which controls temperature and humidity within the following ranges:
l Temperature range: 15°C to 30°C

l Humidity range: 40% to 75%
NOTE
Do not install an air conditioner right above equipment, to prevent air blowing directly from the air
conditioner vent into the equipment. Install an air conditioner as far away from a window as possible, to
prevent humid air blowing from the window to the equipment.
Table 17-12 Requirements on climate during operation
Item Requirement
Altitude -60 m to +4000 m
Temperature change ≤ 0.5°C/min

rate
Wind speed ≤ 5 m/s
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
NOTE
Between 1800 m and 4000 m of altitude, the equipment operating temperature decreases by 1°C for
every increase of 220 m in altitude.
l Avoid reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.

Platform
Air Cleanness
corrosive dust.
in Table 17-13.
Table 17-14.
Table 17-13 Density restrictions for mechanical active substances during operation
Precipitable dust ≤ 15 mg/(m2·h)
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
Table 17-14 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NOx ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 17-15 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.
Table 17-15 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Sinusoidal vibration Velocity 5 mm/s -
Acceleration - 2 m/s2

Platform
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 62 Hz to 200 Hz

Hz
Shock Shock response Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, 3 in

spectrum II each direction
NOTE
A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such
as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input.
SOP Tolerance of Coherent Transmission Systems

State of polarization (SOP) is subject to the amplitude ratio of electric field strength and the
phase difference between two independent oscillation directions (referred to as polarization
directions) that are perpendicular to the optical transmission direction. The fiber loss, latency,
dispersion, and nonlinear effect vary depending on polarization directions, and the amplitude
ratio and phase difference between two polarization directions change accordingly. Therefore,
SOP also changes.
In a coherent system, two polarization directions x and y are used to transmit services. The
receiver must accurately trace the two polarization directions and compensate for their SOP
changes in a timely manner during fiber transmission, so that the signals from the transmitter
can be correctly restored. The maximum SOP change rate that can be tolerated by the receiver
is the SOP change rate tolerance, also called SOP tolerance for short.
During optical fiber transmission, the SOP change rate of optical signals is closely related to
the operating environment. Aerial optical cables are more prone to high-speed SOP changes
within a short period of time than underground optical cables.
To deploy a beyond 100G or 100G coherent transmission system, pay attention to the
following:
l Underground optical cables are recommended.
l If aerial optical cables must be used, you must set the hold-off time of routers to a large
value to prevent the frequent switchovers of routers. The recommended value is greater
than or equal to 200 ms. In addition, you are advised to configure SNCP to prevent
service loss caused by SOP threshold crossing.

Platform
Product Description 18 Complied Standards
18 Complied Standards
About This Chapter
This topic lists the standards that the OSN 1800 complies with.
18.1 ANSI Standards

This topic describes the ANSI standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
18.2 EMC Standards
This topic lists the EMC standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
18.3 Environment-Related Standards
This topic lists the environment-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies
with.
18.4 Fireproofing Standards
This topic lists the fireproofing-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies
with.
18.5 Grounding Standards
This topic lists the grounding-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
18.6 IEEE Standards
This topic lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
18.7 IETF Standards
This topic lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.
18.8 ITU-T Standards
This topic lists the ITU-T standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.
18.9 International Standards
This topic lists the international standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
18.10 Laser Safety Standards
This topic lists the laser safety standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.
18.11 MEF Standards
This topic lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
18.12 Noise-related Standard

Platform
This topic lists the noise-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
18.13 Safety-related Standards
This topic lists the safety-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.
18.1 ANSI Standards

This topic describes the ANSI standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
ANSI Description
Standards
ANSI T1.105 Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) - Basic Description including

Multiplex Structure, Rates, and Formats
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) -

Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC)
ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) -

Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)
ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)

Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PMD)
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
ANSI X3.303 Fiber channel 3rd- Generation Physical interface (FC-PH3)
18.2 EMC Standards

This topic lists the EMC standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Standard Description
IEC Publication Testing and measurement techniques of electrostatic discharge

1000-4-2 immunity test
IEC Publication Radiated RF electromagnetic field immunity test

1000-4-3
IEC Publication Testing and measurement techniques of electrical fast transients/

1000-4-4 burst immunity test
IEC Publication Immunity to conducted disturbances

1000-4-6
Information technology equipment – Radio disturbance

EN 55022 characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
EN 55024 Information technology equipment – Immunity characteristics-

Limits and methods of measurement

Platform
EN 55032 Electromagnetic Compatibility of Multimedia Equipment
IEC 61000-4-2 Testing and measurement techniques – Electrostatic discharge

immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 Testing and measurement techniques – Radiated, radio-frequency,

electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4 Testing and measurement techniques – Electrical fast transient/burst

immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5 Testing and measurement techniques – Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6 Testing and measurement techniques – Immunity to conducted

disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-11 Testing and measurement techniques – Voltage dips, short

interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests
IEC 61000-4-29 Testing and measurement techniques – Voltage dips, short

interruptions
ETSI EN 300 386 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Telecommunication network equipment; Electro Magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);

Additional ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service
in specific applications
ETSI EN 300127 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);

Radiated emission testing of physically large telecommunication
systems
ETSI EN Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications

300-132-2 equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety – generic

criteria for network telecommunications equipment
EN 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 3-2: Limits – Limits

emissions (equipment input current up to and including 16 A per
phase) – (IEC 61000-for harmonic current 3-2:2005 + A1:2008 +
A2:2009)
EN 61000-3-11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 3-11: Limits –

voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems
– Equipment Limitation of voltage changes, with rated current <=
75 A and subject to conditional connection
IEC 61000-6-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-5: Generic standards -

Immunity for equipment used in power station and substation
environment

Platform
EN 50121-1 Railway applications - Electromagnetic compatibility - Part 1:

General
EN 50121-3-2 Railway applications - Electromagnetic compatibility - Part 3-2:

Rolling stock - Apparatus
EN 50121-4 Railway applications - Electromagnetic compatibility - Part 4:

Emission and immunity of the signalling and telecommunications
apparatus
18.3 Environment-Related Standards

This topic lists the environment-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies
with.
ETSI EN 300 Environmental Engineering (EE)

019-1-1 Environmental conditions and environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment
Part 1-1: Classification of environmental conditions: Storage
Class 1.1: Weatherprotected, partly temperature-controlled storage
locations
Class 1.2: Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage
locations

Part 1-2: Classification of environmental conditions: Transportation
Class 2.1: Very careful transportation
Class 2.2: Careful transportation

Part 1-3: Classification of environmental conditions: Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations
Class 3.1: Temperature-controlled locations
Class 3.2: Partly temperature-controlled location
ETSI EN 300 Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and

019-2-3 environmental tests for telecommunications equipment
Part 2-3: Specification of environmental tests Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations

Platform
IEC 60068-2 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1:
Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3:
Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETSI EN 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE)

Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
NEBS GR-63- Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical

CORE Protection
ROHS Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substance in electrical and

electronic equipment.
18.4 Fireproofing Standards

This topic lists the fireproofing-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies
with.
Fireproofing Description
Standard
EN 60950 (Europe) Safety of information technology equipment
ANSI/UL 60950 Safety of information technology equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. Audio, video and similar electronic equipment

950-95 (North America)
IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment

(International)
73/23/EEC (Europe) Low voltage directive
18.5 Grounding Standards

This topic lists the grounding-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.

Platform
Grounding Description
Standards
ETS 300 253 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in

telecommunication centers
GR 1089 CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety - Generic Criteria

for Network Telecommunications Equipment
18.6 IEEE Standards

This topic lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Code Name
IEEE 802.1d Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.1AX Local and metropolitan area networks-Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.1ab Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider

Bridges, QinQ
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection

(CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer
Specifications Amendment: Media Access Control Parameters,
Physical Layers, and Management Parameters for Subscriber
Access Networks
IEEE 802.1ag Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks-Amendment 5:

Connectivity Fault Management
IEEE 802.1p LAN Layer 2 QoS/CoS Protocol for Traffic Prioritization
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3u Type 100BASE-T MAC parameters, Physical Layer, MAUs,

and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation
IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex Operation and Type 100BASE-T2
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3z Media Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer,

repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation

Platform
Code Name
IEEE 802.3ae Media Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and
management parameters for 10Gb/s operation
IEEE 802.3ab Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection

(CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer
Specifications - Physical Layer Parameters and Specifications
for 1000 Mb/s Operation over 4 pair of Category 5 Balanced
Copper Cabling, Type 1000BASE-T
IEEE 1588v2 IEEE Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol

for Networked Measurement and Control Systems
IEEE 1613 Environmental and Testing Requirements for Communications

Networking Devices Installed in Electric Power Substation
NOTE
The power supply to the equipment must be less than 50 V only when
the IEEE 1613 standard in the electric power industry is complied
with. (There is no power supply requirement when other standards are
used.) The equipment must use dedicate backup power system for
communication devices and cannot share the same backup power
system with electric equipment.
18.7 IETF Standards

This topic lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.
IETF Standards Describes
RFC 2697 A Single Rate Three Color Marker
RFC 2702 Requirements for traffic engineering over MPLS
RFC 4541 Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)and

Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping Switches
RFC 6136 L2VPN OAM requirements and framework
RFC 4664 Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs)
RFC 3031 MPLS architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS label stack encoding
RFC 3443 Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching

(MPLS) networks
RFC 3916 Requirements for pseudo-wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
RFC 3985 Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) architecture
RFC 4385 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over
an MPLS PSN

Platform
RFC 4446 IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
RFC 0826 Ethernet address resolution protocol
RFC 3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated

services
RFC 4448 Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks
RFC 5085 Pseudo wire virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV)
RFC 5254 Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-

Edge (PWE3)
RFC 3644 Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
RFC 2212 Specification of guaranteed quality of service
RFC 2474 Definition of the differentiated services field (DS Field) in the IPv4
and IPv6 headers
RFC 2475 An architecture for differentiated services
RFC 2597 Assured forwarding PHB group
RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
RFC 2698 A two rate three color marker
RFC 3140 Per hop behavior identification codes
RFC 3246 An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
RFC 3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated

services
RFC 3670 Information model for describing network device QoS datapath
mechanisms
RFC 4720 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) frame check sequence

retention
RFC 5462 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Stack Entry: "EXP"
Field Renamed to "Traffic Class" Field
RFC 5586 MPLS generic associated channel
RFC 5654 Requirements of an MPLS transport profile
RFC 5921 A framework for MPLS in transport networks
RFC 5860 Requirements for operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM)

in MPLS transport networks
RFC 5960 MPLS Transport Profile Data Plane Architecture
RFC 5659 An Architecture for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-

Edge

Platform
RFC 5950 Network Management Framework for MPLS-based Transport

Networks
RFC 5951 Network Management Requirements for MPLS-based Transport

Networks
RFC 6215 MPLS Transport Profile User-to-Network and Network-to-Network

Interfaces
RFC 6291 Guidelines for the Use of the "OAM" Acronym in the IETF
RFC 6370 MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) Identifiers
RFC 6371 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Framework for MPLS-

Based Transport Networks
RFC 6423 Using the Generic Associated Channel Label for Pseudowire in the
MPLS
RFC 6671 Allocation of a Generic Associated Channel Type for ITU-T MPLS
Transport Profile Operation, Maintenance, and Administration
(MPLS-TP OAM)
RFC 6723 Update of the Pseudowire Control-Word Negotiation Mechanism
RFC 6923 MPLS-TP Identifiers Following ITU-T Conventions
18.8 ITU-T Standards

This topic lists the ITU-T standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.
Recommendations on Architectures
Code Name
ITU-T G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.805 Generic functional architecture of transport networks
ITU-T G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection

architectures
ITU-T G.842 Interworking of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.871 Framework for optical transport network Recommendations
ITU-T G.872 Architecture of optical transport networks
ITU-T G.772 Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission

systems

Platform
Recommendations on Physical-Layer Features

Code Name
ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
ITU-T G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode

optical fiber and cable
ITU-T G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems
ITU-T G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters
of optical amplifier devices and subsystems
ITU-T G.662 Generic characteristics of optical amplifier devices and

subsystems
ITU-T G.663 Application related aspects of optical amplifier devices and sub-
systems
ITU-T G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
ITU-T G.665 Generic Characteristics of Raman Amplifiers and Raman

Amplified Subsystems
ITU-T G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems
ITU-T G.691 Optical ports for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems
with optical amplifiers
ITU-T G.692 Optical ports for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
ITU-T G.693 Optical ports for intra-office systems
ITU-T G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
ITU-T G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM frequency grid
ITU-T G.695 Optical ports for coarse wavelength division multiplexing

applications
ITU-T G.696.1 Intra-Domain DWDM applications
ITU-T G.697 Optical monitoring for DWDM systems
ITU-T G.698.2 Amplified multichannel DWDM applications with single

channel optical interfaces
ITU-T G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital ports
ITU-T G.712 Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code

modulation channels
ITU-T G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment – Description

methodology and generic functionality

Platform
Code Name
ITU-T G.957 Optical ports of equipment and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy
for use on optical fiber cables
ITU-T G.959.1 Optical transport network physical layer ports
Recommendations on Structures and Mappings

Code Name
ITU-T G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
ITU-T G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448,
and 44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures
relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.
704
ITU-T G.707 Network node port for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.708 Sub STM-0 network node interface for the synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.709 Ports for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU-T G.7041/Y.1303 Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
Recommendations on Equipment Functions and Features

Code Name
ITU-T G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.798 Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy equipment

functional blocks
ITU-T G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
ITU-T G.975 Forward error correction for submarine systems
ITU-T G.975.1 Forward error correction for high bit rate DWDM submarine
systems
ITU-T G.780 Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)

networks and equipment
ITU-T G.781 Synchronization layer functions

Platform
Code Name
ITU-T G.782 Types and Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

(SDH)
ITU-T G.810 Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
ITU-T G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node
clocks in synchronization networks
ITU-T Q.812 Protocol profile for electronic communications interactive agent
ITU-T M.2120 International multi-operator paths, sections and transmission

systems fault detection and localization procedures
Recommendations on Network Protection

Code Name
ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ITU-T G.808.1 Generic protection switching-Linear trail and subnetwork

protection
ITU-T G.808.2 Generic protection switching – Ring protection
ITU-T G.873.1 Optical Transport Network(OTN):Linear protection
Recommendations on Jitter and Performance

Code Name
ITU-T G.742 Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448

kbit/s and using positive justification
ITU-T G.751 Digital multiplex equipments operating at the third order bit rate
of 34 368 kbit/s and the fourth order bit rate of 139 264 kbit/s
and using positive justification
ITU-T G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which
are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy
are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy
are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate

Platform
Code Name
ITU-T G.8201 Error performance parameters and objectives for multi-operator

international paths within the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361 Timing and synchronization aspects in Packet Networks
ITU-T G.8262/Y.1362 Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave

clock
ITU-T M.2401 Error performance limits and procedures for bringing-into-

service and maintenance of multiple operator international paths
and sections within an optical transport network
ITU-T G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
ITU-T G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator
sections
ITU-T G.8251 Control of jitter and wander within the optical transport network
(OTN)
Recommendations on Equipment Management

Code Name
ITU-T G.7710 Equipment Management Function(EMF) requirements that are

common to multiple transport technologies
ITU-T G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission

systems
ITU-T G.774 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management information

model for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.1 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) Bidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.2 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) Configuration of the

payload structure for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.3 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) Management of multiplex-

section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.4 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) Management of the

subnetwork connection protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.5 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) Management of connection

supervision functionality(HCS/LCS) for the network element
view
ITU-T G.774.6 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) unidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view

Platform
Code Name
ITU-T G.774.7 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of lower order

path trace and interface labeling for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.9 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.10 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.775 Loss of Signal(LOS),Alarm Indication Signal(AIS) and Remote

Defect Indication(RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for
PDH signals
ITU-T G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy(SDH) management
ITU-T G.8275.1 Precision time protocol telecom profile for phase/time

synchronization with full timing support from the network
ITU-T G.8273.2 Timing characteristics of telecom boundary clocks and telecom

time slave clocks
ITU-T G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy(SDH)
ITU-T G.870/Y.1352 Terms and definitions for Optical Transport Networks (OTN)
ITU-T G.874 Management aspects of the optical transport network element
ITU-T G.875 Optical transport network (OTN) management information

model for the network element view
ITU-T M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
ITU-T Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3 and X interfaces
ITU-T X.721 Information Technology - Open Systems Interconnection -

Structure of Management Information: Definition of
Management Information
ITU-T M.20 Maintenance philosophy for telecommunications networks
ITU-T M.3000 Series Overview of TMN Recommendations
ITU-T Q.921 ISDN user-network interface layer 3 specification for basic call
control. This Recommendation is also included but not published
in I series under alias number I.451
ITU-T Q.931 ISDN user-network interface - Data link layer specification. This
Recommendation is published with the double number Q.921
and I.441
ITU-T X.21 Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-
terminating Equipment for synchronous operation on public data
networks.

Platform
Recommendations on Packet Features

Code Name
ITU-T G.8010 Architecture of Ethernet layer networks
ITU-T G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1 Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2 Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.8011.3 Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Service
ITU-T G.8011.4 Ethernet virtual private rooted multipoint service
ITU-T G.8011.5 Ethernet private LAN service
ITU-T G.8012 Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI
ITU-T G.8012.1 Interfaces for the Ethernet Transport Network
ITU-T G.8021 Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment

functional blocks
ITU-T G.8101 Terms and definitions for MPLS transport profile
ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1 Application of MPLS/MPLS-TP in the transport network
ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8131 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
ITU-T G.8151 Management aspects of the MPLS-TP network element
ITU-T G.8264 Timing distribution through packet networks
ITU-T Y.1541 Network performance objectives for IP-based services
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1730 Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks

and Ethernet services
ITU-T Y.1291 An architectural framework for support of quality of service

(QoS) in packet networks
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1731/G.8013 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ITU-T G.8113.1 Operations, Administration and Maintenance mechanism for

MPLS-TP networks (G.tpoam)

Platform
Code Name
ITU-T Y.Sup4 Supplement on transport requirements for T-MPLS OAM and

considerations for the application of IETF MPLS technology
18.9 International Standards

This topic lists the international standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems:

Common generic criteria
GR-1377-CORE SONET OC-192 Systems Generic Requirements
IEC 61291-1 Optical amplifiers - Part 4: Multichannel Applications Performance

specification Template
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment

No 1-M94
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
IEC 529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP

Code)
SMPTE 259M Television----SDTV1 Digital Signal/Data ---- Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 424M Television----3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
SMPTE 292M Television ---- Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition

Television Systems
CENELEC EN Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and interactive
50083-9 services - Part 9: Interfaces for CATV/SMATV headends and similar
professional equipment for DVB/MPEG-2 transport streams
ETS 300 119 European telecommunication standard for equipment practice
ISO 9001 Quality systems - Model for quality assurance in design,

development, production, installation and servicing
ISO 9314 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
IEC 297 Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series
18.10 Laser Safety Standards

This topic lists the laser safety standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.

Platform
Code Name
IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification,

requirements and user's guide
IEC 60825-2 Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical fiber

communication systems
18.11 MEF Standards

This topic lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
MEF Description
Standards
Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic

MEF 4
Framework
MEF 6 Ethernet Services Definitions - Phase I
MEF 9 Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI
MEF 10 Ethernet Services Attributes Phase 1
MEF 11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework
Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 2: Ethernet

MEF 12
Services Layer
Carrier Ethernet Network ArchitectureFramework Part 2: Ethernet

MEF 12.2
Services Layer
MEF 13 User Network Interface (UNI) Type 1 Implementation Agreement
MEF 14 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1
18.12 Noise-related Standard

This topic lists the noise-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Noise Standard Description
ETSI EN 300 753 Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
The equipment is compliant with the ETSI EN 300 753 class 3.2, and the nominal acoustic
power of the equipment is equal to or lower than 7.2 bels in the attended telecommunication
equipment room.

Platform
18.13 Safety-related Standards

This topic lists the safety-related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies.
Code Name
IEC 60215 Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment
EN 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

Electrical Business Equipment
IEC 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

Electrical Business Equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

60950-1 Electrical Business Equipment
UL 60950-1 3:rd edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment

Including Electrical Business Equipment
IEC Publication 479-1 Guide on the effects of current passing through the human body
IS 8437 {1993} Guide on the effects of current passing through the human body
IS 13252 {1993} Safety of information technology equipment including electrical

business equipment
EN 60825-1 Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and

EN 60825-2 requirements
IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical fibre
communication systems
IEC 60825-2
EN 41003 Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to

IEC 41003 telecommunications networks and/or a cable distribution system
IEC 61850-3 Communication networks and systems in substations - Part 3:

General requirements
NOTE
The power supply to the equipment must be less than 50 V only when
the IEC 61850-3 standard in the electric power industry is complied
with. (There is no power supply requirement when other standards are
used.) The equipment must use dedicate backup power system for
communication devices and cannot share the same backup power system
with electric equipment.

Platform
Product Description A Glossary
A Glossary
Numerics
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
3G See Third Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over
private VLANs.
A
A/D analog/digit
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5
ACH associated channel header
ACL See Access Control List.
ADM add/drop multiplexer
AF See assured forwarding.
AIS alarm indication signal
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AMI See alternate mark inversion.
APC automatic phase changer
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APE See automatic power equilibrium.
API See application programming interface.
APS automatic protection switching

Platform
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.

AS See autonomous system.
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Access Control List A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.
Authentication, A security architecture for distributed systems. Enables control over which users are
Authorization and allowed access to which services and how much resources they can use.
Accounting (AAA)
alternate mark A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent
inversion (AMI) logical 1 values.
application An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications
programming interface that are used for communication between software programs.
(API)
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short
delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For
traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues
to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
shutdown (ALS) transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic power A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end,
equilibrium (APE) ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.
autonomous system A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same
(AS) technology administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an
integer ranging from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be
divided into areas.
avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
(APD) Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA booster amplifier
BBE background block error
BBER background block error ratio
BC boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication.

Platform
BE See best effort.

BEI backward error indication
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIAE backward incoming alignment error
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BRAS See broadband remote access server.
BSC See base station controller.
BTS base transceiver station
BTV broadband TV
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system
regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take
actions to recover the faulty link.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It
(BSC) interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface.
It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station
management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC
controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the
computer.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of
the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the
time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter,
packet loss ratio, and high reliability.

Platform
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
(BIP) an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit
of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-
bit sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by
setting the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition
of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
(BIP-8) transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one
byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of
"1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the
number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
blacklist A method of filtering packets based on their source IP addresses. Compared with
ACL, the match condition for the black list is much simpler. Therefore, the black list
can filter packets at a higher speed and can effectively screen the packet sent from the
specific IP address.
bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a
unit (BPDU) spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports,
addresses, priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended
destination. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. These loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as
services digital voice. It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based
network (B-ISDN) circuits at 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband remote A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
access server (BRAS) networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of
network to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of
multiple services, meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth
utilization of different users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to
a broadband network.
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply (BITS) a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
C
CAPEX capital expenditure
CAR committed access rate
CATV cable TV
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CD chromatic dispersion

Platform
CDVT cell delay variation tolerance

CE See customer edge.
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CES See circuit emulation service.
CFM connectivity fault management
CFR cell fill rate
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLP See cell loss priority.
CMI coded mark inversion
CODEC coder/decoder
CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
CPLD complex programmable logic device
CPRI See common public radio interface.
CPU See Central Processing Unit.
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CRPC case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band
CS class selector
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CTC common transmit clock
CV connectivity verification
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
Central Processing The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that
Unit (CPU) interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and
execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the
computer's main data-transfer path, the bus.
CoS class of service

Platform
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces
Request Broker of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the
Architecture (CORBA) two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on
different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request
broker, or ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program
from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented
environments.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which: a carrier sensing scheme is used. a transmitting
detection (CSMA/CD) data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame, stops transmitting
that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random time interval before
trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped
if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is
unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be
dropped.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At
service (CES) the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These
ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception
end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots.
The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to
the original sequence at the reception end.
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
(CWDM) not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of
an IP packet to be forwarded.
common public radio A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the
interface (CPRI) wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC,
Siemens, and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF
interface. The CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and
equipment. The major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to
reduce the cost of engineering, equipment room, and equipment.
continuity check (CC) An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the
connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity
Check Message (CCM).
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly
connecting to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or
host.
cyclic redundancy A mathematical checksum that can be used to detect data corruption in transmitted
check (CRC) frames. The CRC is a linear hash function, and should not be used for data security
assurance.

Platform
D
DAPI destination access point identifier
DBPS distributed board protect system
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
ground) (DC-I) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the
PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric
equipment.
DCF See dispersion compensation fiber.
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DE discard eligible
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch dual in-line package switch
DM See delay measurement.
DMUX demultiplexer
DNI dual node interconnection
DRDB dynamic random database
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP digital signal processing
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DVB digital video broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
DiffServ See differentiated service.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
Configuration Protocol parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires
(DHCP) to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating
IP addresses to hosts.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.

Platform
data terminal A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the
equipment (DTE) DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced
by DCE.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source
node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
dense wavelength The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
division multiplexing attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific
(DWDM) frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously
in the same fiber.
differentiated service An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits
and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It
is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to
ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP
value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB).
Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections
(DSLAM) and uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
dispersion (DCF) The maximum error of the local clock compared with the reference clock.
dispersion A type of fiber that uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
compensation fiber of the transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
(DCF)
dispersion A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
compensation module dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
(DCM)
E
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree.
E2E end to end
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EMS See element management system.

Platform
EPL See Ethernet private line.

EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESN See equipment serial number.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC Ethernet virtual connection
EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable
and easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s,
1000 Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet passive An Ethernet Passive Optical Network (EPON) is a passive optical network based on
optical network Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access technology that uses a point-to-
(EPON) multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It supports upstream/downstream
symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance of up to 20 km. In the
downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on encrypted broadcast
transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the bandwidth is shared
based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.

Platform
Ethernet-tree (E-Tree) An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet virtual
connection.
European ETSI is a multinational standardization body with regulatory and standardization
Telecommunications authority over much of Europe. GSM standardization took place under the auspices of
Standards Institute ETSI.
(ETSI)
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
electric supervisory A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission
channel (ESC) of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference (EMI) limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
element management ITU-T compliant software that is used to manage one or more specific types of
system (EMS) network element (NE). An EMS enables a user to individually manage all the features
of each NE, but not the communication between NEs. This communication is
managed by the network management system (NMS).
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
channel (ECC) to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
enterprise system A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
connection (ESCON) Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates
a rate of 200 Mbit/s.
equipment serial A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation
number (ESN) of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
amplifier (EDFA) doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump
laser are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting
with doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it
amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
(EF) demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to
(EXP) identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.
F
FAS frame alignment signal
FC See Fibre Channel.
FDB flash database

Platform
FDD See frequency division duplex.

FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection
FICON See Fibre Connect.
FIFO See first in first out.
FIU fiber interface unit
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FMC See fixed mobile convergence.
FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FRR See fast reroute.
FTN FEC to NHLFE
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on
networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
Fibre Connect A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units.
(FICON) It carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fibre channel,
and provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast reroute (FRR) A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of
a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an
active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active
route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the
traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN
FRR, and TE FRR.
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies
many of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate
arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read
and invoked first.

Platform
fixed mobile Communication service provided based on the combination of fixed-line and wireless
convergence (FMC) technologies. Service providing, access technologies, and terminal devices on an FMC
network are independent from each other. The same service can be obtained from
various access networks. Subscribers from different access networks can obtain and
use the same service.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that
indication (FDI) first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its
location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level
client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
frame delay variation A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
(FDV) where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the
number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of
service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service
frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frequency division An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the
duplex (FDD) uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts.
Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
GRE See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM See global system for mobile communications.
Generic Routing A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network.
Encapsulation (GRE) GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE
serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently
transmitting data packets.
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
global system for The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by the European
mobile Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
communications global mobile phone networks. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching
(GSM) subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).

Platform
HA See high availability.

HD-SDI high definition serial digital interface
HDB3 See High Density Bipolar of Order 3.
HDTV See high-definition television.
HEC See header error control.
HPA higher order path adaptation
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
HSPA High Speed Packet Access
High Density Bipolar A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The
of Order 3 (HDB3) HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct
current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive
zeros.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the
Packet Access requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It
(HSDPA) enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without
changing the WCDMA network topology.
header error control A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the
(HEC) cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in
the first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
service (HQoS) to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and
the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the
bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability (HA) A scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high
availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes
over the system functions of the active module.
high-definition High-definition television (HDTV) is a television system providing an image
television (HDTV) resolution that is substantially higher than that of standard-definition television.
HDTV may be transmitted in various formats: 1080p: 1920×1080p: 2,073,600 pixels
(~2.07 megapixels) per frame 1080i: 1920×1080i: 1,036,800 pixels (~1.04 MP) per
field or 2,073,600 pixels (~2.07 MP) per frame Some countries also use a non-
standard CEA resolution, such as 1440×1080i: 777,600 pixels (~0.78 MP) per field or
1,555,200 pixels (~1.56 MP) per frame 720p: 1280×720p: 921,600 pixels (~0.92 MP)
per frame The letter "p" here stands for progressive scan, while "i" indicates
interlaced.
I
IAE incoming alignment error
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICC See ITU carrier code.

Platform
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGRP Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
ILM incoming label map
IP Internet Protocol
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
ISP See Internet service provider.
ITC independent transmit clock
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU carrier code (ICC) A code assigned to a network operator/service provider, maintained by the ITU-T
Telecommunication Standardization Bureau (TSB).
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
Numbers Authority allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA
(IANA) also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite,
including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol
Management Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and
(IGMP) maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
television (IPTV) streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the
media streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to
the terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after
media streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).

Platform
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers
together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host
within the network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits
while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
provider (ISP)
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
adjustment (IPA) regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured
by the laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in
properly.
L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPD link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCK See Locked signal function.
LCT local craft terminal
LER See label edge router.
LM See loss measurement.
LOC loss of continuity
LOM loss of multiframe
LOS See loss of signal.
LP logical port

Platform
LPA lower order path adaptation

LPT link-state pass through
LSA link-state advertisement
LSR See label switching router.
LT linktrace
LTC loss of tandem connection
LTE Long Term Evolution
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer,
(LCK) informs consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and
suppresses the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to
(LER) assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR
(LSR) is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible
for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table,
creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to
groups received in the label forwarding table.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it
were a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member
links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity
initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path
is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few
(LAN) square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate.
Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run
at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loss measurement A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service
(LM) frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames
between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
M
MA maintenance association

Platform
MAC See Media Access Control.

MBB mobile broadband
MBS maximum burst size
MCA multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit
MD See maintenance domain.
MDF See main distribution frame.
MDI medium dependent interface
ME See maintenance entity.
MEP maintenance end point
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIB See management information base.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MLT mechanized loop testing
MPI-R main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S main path interface at the transmitter
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MS multiplex section
MS-PW See multi-segment pseudo wire.
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSI multiframe structure identifier
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures.
MTTR See Mean Time to Repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
MUX See multiplexer.
MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator
Mean Time Between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
Failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time to Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
(MTTR)

Platform
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of
(MAC) the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and
connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC
protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted,
certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control
information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving
data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the
data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted
correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is
transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this
case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.
The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning
trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN
because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame (MDF)
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by
(MD) connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are
managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of
(ME) a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such
(MIB) as routers and switches) in a network.
maximum The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
transmission unit depending on the network-576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
(MTU) Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
multi-segment pseudo A collection of multiple adjacent PW segments. Each PW segment is a point-to-point
wire (MS-PW) PW. The use of MS-PWs to bear services saves tunnel resources and can transport
services over different networks.
multicast listener A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery (MLD) connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On
IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router
to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related
groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
signal (MFAS) always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to
establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between
protection (MSP) and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to
a "protection" channel.

Platform
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate
channels being fixed.
N
NAS network access server
NBI See northbound interface.
NDF new data flag
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NLP normal link pulse
NNI Network-to-Network Interface
NOC network operations center
NPC See network parameter control.
NPE network provider edge
NRT-VBR non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ non-return to zero
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
NTP Network Time Protocol
network parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each
control (NPC) virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded,
measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is
that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according
to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network
interface.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made
point (NSAP) available to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
northbound interface An interface that connects to the upper-layer device to provision services and report
(NBI) alarms and performance statistics.
O
OA optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OC ordinary clock
OCI open connection indication
OCh optical channel with full functionality
ODB optical duobinary

Platform
ODF optical distribution frame

ODU optical demultiplexing unit
ODUk optical channel data unit - k
OFC Open Fibre Control
OLA optical line amplifier
OLP See optical line protection.
OLT optical line terminal
OM optical multiplexing
OMB See outdoor mini box.
OMS optical multiplexing section
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OOF out of frame
OOS out of service
OPA optical power adjustment
OPEX operating expense
OPM optical performance monitor
OPS optical physical section
OPU See optical payload unit.
OPUk optical channel payload unit - k
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI open systems interconnection
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OSS operations support system
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTN optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section.
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
OWSP optical wavelength shared protection
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.

Platform
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification,
administration and location, and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
optical add/drop A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one
multiplexer (OADM) channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical line protection Optical line protection is implemented using the dual feeding and selective receiving
(OLP) function. Two pairs of fibers (that is, four fibers) are used. One pair of fibers function
as the working trail and is used to transmit service signals of a line when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers function as the protection trail and is used to carry
protection switching signals when a fiber cut occurs or the signal attenuation is
excessively large.
optical network A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
terminal (ONT)
optical network unit A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
(ONU) signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical payload unit An OPU contains client signal data as well as a header describing the type of that data.
(OPU) It is conceptually similar to a SONET/SDH path.
optical signal-to-noise The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
ratio (OSNR) important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
optical supervisory A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
channel (OSC) nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and
reflectometer (OTDR) measures the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length
and light loss, and to locate fiber faults.
optical transmission A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS
section (OTS) allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between
NEs.
optical transponder A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
unit (OTU) compliant WDM wavelength.
outdoor mini box A box that is an outdoor subrack with limited space. It supports external AC or DC
(OMB) input, and houses and protects the baseband unit (BBU). It is a component of a base
station.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
PCC protection communication channel
PCN product change notice
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PHB See per-hop behavior.

Platform
PHP penultimate hop popping

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMU power monitoring unit
PON passive optical network
PPI PDH physical interface
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network.
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PVC See permanent virtual circuit.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge.
Pseudowire Emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of
Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched
network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time
division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates
to the real situation.
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network
should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the
IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding
(EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).

Platform
permanent virtual A circuit that can be established as an option to provide a dedicated circuit link
circuit (PVC) between two facilities. PVC configuration is usually preconfigured by the service
provider. Unlike SVCs, PVCs are usually very seldom broken/disconnected. A
permanent virtual circuit (PVC) is a virtual circuit established for repeated/continuous
use between the same DTE. In a PVC, the long-term association is identical to the data
transfer phase of a virtual call. Permanent virtual circuits eliminate the need for
repeated call set-up and clearing.
permanent virtual Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
path (PVP)
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop
filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with
the incoming or reference frequency.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the
hierarchy (PDH) minimum rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
(PDU)
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can
be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent
sequence (PRBS) of the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is
established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information
of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
Q
QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAM See random access memory.
RAN See radio access network.
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller.

Platform
RS regenerator section
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE See Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. As a distributed server/client system, RADIUS provides
(RADIUS) the AAA function.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for
Protocol (RSVP) an integrated services Internet.
Resource Reservation An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in
Protocol-Traffic MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs
Engineering (RSVP- by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP
TE) rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a
Protocol (RIP) route based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a
distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its
neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the
(RAN) CN from wireless network.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random access Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the CPU or other
memory (RAM) hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP
synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
S
SAN storage area network
SAPI source access point identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC square connector
SD See signal degrade.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SDP serious disturbance period

Platform
SELV safety extra-low voltage

SES severely errored second
SESR severely errored second ratio
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SLM single longitudinal mode
SM section monitoring
SMB sub-miniature B
SMSR side mode suppression ratio
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPC soft permanent connection
SPI SDH physical interface
SSH See Secure Shell.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB synchronization status message byte
SSU synchronization supply unit
STG synchronous timing generator
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
STS synchronous transport signal
Secure File Transfer A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Protocol (SFTP)
Secure Shell (SSH) SSH is a set of network protocols for securing connections between computers, as
well as the utility suite that implements these protocols.
Secure Sockets Layer A security protocol that works at a socket layer. This layer exists between the TCP
(SSL) layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned
entities.
Simple Network An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing systems and devices in a network.
Management Protocol The data being monitored and managed is defined by a MIB. The functions supported
(SNMP) by the protocol are the request and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data, and
traps that signal the occurrence of events.
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing
Message (SSM) link. SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network
or synchronization network.

Platform
serial digital interface An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
(SDI)
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded
defect condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment.
standard definition- Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers
network (SONET) to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle
multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84
Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCI tag control information
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch
TLS Transport Layer Security
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOD time of day
TPID tag protocol identifier
TTI transmission time interval
TTL See time to live.
TTSI See trail termination source identifier.
TU tributary unit
TUG tributary unit group
Third Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s
to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.

Platform
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications

Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other
networks through the RNC.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol (TCP) be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the
complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable
protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the
transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,
service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with
bandwidth.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time
multiplexing (TDM) slots (TSn, n is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals
engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to
be transmitted over one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
trail termination A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the
source identifier connectivity verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it
(TTSI) matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect.
U
UAT See unavailable time event.
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UMTS See Universal Mobile Telecommunications System.
UNI See User-to-Network Interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPM uninterruptible power module
Universal Mobile A 3G mobile technology that will deliver broadband information at speeds up to 2
Telecommunications Mbit/s. Besides voice and data, UMTS will deliver audio and video to wireless
System (UMTS) devices anywhere in the world through fixed, wireless and satellite systems.
User-to-Network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
Interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).
unavailable time event An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
(UAT) errored seconds.

Platform
usage parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each
control (UPC) virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded,
measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is
that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according
to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network
interface.
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
VB virtual bridge
VC See virtual channel.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCI virtual channel identifier
VLAN virtual local area network
VOA variable optical attenuator
VP See virtual path.
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
Virtual Router A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
Redundancy Protocol routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
(VRRP) a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP
address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this
virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers
in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the
network.
virtual channel (VC) Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in
the ATM network and is uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual
channel identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted
by a switch.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection (VCC) point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple
end points.
virtual path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM
network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to
(VPI) which virtual path the cell belongs.

Platform
virtual private LAN One kind of point-to-multipoint L2VPN services provided in public network, to
service (VPLS) connect isolated user sites by Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) or Wide Area
Network (WAN), which makes the connection like LAN connection. It is a Layer 2
VPN technology based on Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) and Ethernet.
Through respective PE device, users in different locations can connect with each other
by accessing VPLS network. From the user's perspective, the whole VPLS network is
like a layer 2 switch network, users connect with each other like using LAN directly.
virtual private wire A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
service (VPWS) Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
W
WAN wide area network
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all
priority queues can be scheduled.
X
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
xDSL x digital subscriber line

OSN 1800 V100R009C00 Product Description 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 1800 V100R009C00 Product Description 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 1800 Multi-Service Edge Optical

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

About This Document

Product Name Product Version

OSN 1800 V100R009C00

iManager U2000 V200R018C60 and later

l Network planning engineers

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

NOTE Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Based on Product Version

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

5 Supported Added boards such as SL16Q/SL64S/UXCL(SLN), and updated the

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

6.2.2 E2E Service Management Based on OTN Overheads.............................................................................................. 73

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

9 Node Configuration.................................................................................................................. 224

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

9.7 9 Degree ROADM......................................................................................................................................................245

10 Network Management............................................................................................................ 256

11 Operation and Maintenance..................................................................................................280

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

11.11.2 Ethernet Port OAM.............................................................................................................................................. 313

12 License Management.............................................................................................................. 339

13 Security Management............................................................................................................. 345

14 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System..........................350

17 Environment Requirement.................................................................................................... 359

18 Complied Standards............................................................................................................... 368

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

18.13 Safety-related Standards......................................................................................................................................... 385

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

1 Product Highlights and Specifications

About This Chapter

This topic describes product highlights and system specifications.

1.1 Product Highlights

1.1 Product Highlights

Highlights of OptiX OSN 1800 V Packet Enhanced

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

Highlights of OptiX OSN 1800 I/II Compact

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

Highlights of OSN 1800 II Enhanced

Highlights of OSN 1800 I Enhanced

1.2 Product Specifications(1800 V)

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

Table 1-1 Product appearance and specifications

Dimensions (H x D 221 mm x 224 mm x 442 mm (excluding handle)

Number of slots for l DC-powered chassis: 15

Optical switching 1 to 9-degree reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer

Product OTN 700 Gbit/s

TDM Higher order: 280 Gbit/s; lower order: 40 Gbit/s

Maximu DWDM 80 wavelengths

Center Wavelength DWDM: 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm (C Band, ITU-T G.694.1)

Maximum rate per 200 Gbit/s

Issue 01 (2019-02-28) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

Topology Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring-with-chain, intersecting rings,

Network Tunnel APS, PW APS/FPS, MC-PW APS, MC-LAG, LPT, LAG,